SERVICE MANUAL

CODE: 00ZARM420UA1E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
AR-M312U
AR-M420U
AR-EF5
MODEL AR-EF6
CONTENTS

[1] GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] SIMULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] MACHINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CAUTION

Cautions on laser
+10 nm At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit
Wave length 785 nm
−15 nm is adjusted to 0.4 MILLIWATT PLUS 8 % and is maintained
constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC).
Pulse times 31 cpm model: (4.1 µs ± 4.1 ns)/7 mm
42 cpm model: (5.7 µs ± 5.7 ns)/7 mm
Caution
Output power 0.2 mW - 0.4 mW This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure
safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access
to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified
personnel.

CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. CLASS 1
VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. LASER PRODUCT
ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.

ADVERSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.

UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.

VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR

URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.
Laserstrahl
VARO!AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNT
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
 CONTENTS

[1] GENERAL [6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

1. Note for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 1. Installing procedure flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
A. Cautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 2. Note for installation place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
[2] CONFIGURATION 3. Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 4. Machine installing procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
A. Basic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 A. Removal of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
B. Option lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 B. Installation of paper feed option (AR-D29)
C. List of combination of peripheral devices . . . . . . .2-4 to the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
C. Setting related to process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
[3] SPECIFICATIONS
D. Toner cartridge settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
1. Basic Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
E. Setting related to fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
A. Base Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
F. Paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
B. Document Feeding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
5. Unpacking and installation of the rack (AR-RK2) . . . 6-6
C. Output Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
6. Unpacking and installation of the AR-EF5/EF6 . . . . . 6-6
2. Specific Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
7. Automatic developer adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
A. Printer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
8. Print test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
B. Expanded RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
C. Copy function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 9. Distortion adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

3. B/W Scanner Module (DSPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 10. Expansion memory (commercially available one) . . . 6-8
11. AR-DC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
4. Rack for Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS [7] MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[Maintenance System Table] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
A. Middle East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 1. Engine section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

B. Asia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 2. Scanner / DSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

C. Hong kong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 3. Peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
2. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 [DETAILS OF EACH SECTION]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
A. Drum cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 1. Process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
B. Toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
C. Developer cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Process Section Composition and
3. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Applying Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

A. Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 [OPC drum section] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
B. Storage conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
[5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
1. Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
2. Interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
[Transfer section]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
4. Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
A. Basic screen of copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
B. Job status screen D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . 7-14
(common to print and copy modes). . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
[Developing section] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
5. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
6. Switch, Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . 7-18
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
2. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . 7-23
8. Motor, Clutch, Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
B. Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
 3. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 E. Height adjustment of original detection light
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 emitting unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27 F. Original size detection photo sensor check . . . . 8-12

C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 G. Original size detection photo sensor

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
4. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section . . . . . .7-33
H. Image density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
I. DSPF width detection adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35 [9] SIMULATIONS

D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-37 1. Entering the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

5. Laser scanner section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43 A. Switching the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

B. Canceling the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43 C. Simulation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
D. Details of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-44 2. Adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
A. Processing adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
6. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46 B. Adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47 [10] MACHINE OPERATION

C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48 1. Acceptable originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-50 A. Size and weight of acceptable originals . . . . . . . 10-1
7. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54 B. Total amount of originals that can be set
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54 in the document feeder tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55 2. Standard original setting orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56 3. Automatic copy image rotation -

rotation copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
D. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-57
4. Specifications of paper trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
8. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
A. Applicable plain paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
A. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
B. Major parts and signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-63 5. Printing onto envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
A. Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers . . . . . . . . 10-3
C. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-64
9. Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66 6. Loading transparency film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

A. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-66 [11] TROUBLE CODES

10. Drive section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
A. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-67 2. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11. Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-69 3. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
A. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-69 4. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
12. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-72 [12] ROM VERSION-UP METHOD
A. Maintenance and parts replacement . . . . . . . . . .7-72 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[8] ADJUSTMENTS 2. Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
1. Process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 3. Flash ROM update procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
A. Doctor gap adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 A. Preliminary arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
B. MG roller main pole position adjustment . . . . . . . .8-1 B. Update procedure 1 (Writing with each ROM
C. High voltage output adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 inserted to the specified slot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
2. Image check, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 C. Update procedures 2 (Writing to each ROM
by use of CN6 of the controller PWB) . . . . . . . . 12-2
A. Adjustments on the engine side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
D. In case of “Result: NG” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
B. Adjustment on the scanner side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
E. Turning off the power during update . . . . . . . . . 12-3
3. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
F. Update window display in normal booting . . . . . 12-3
A. OC scan distortion adjustment
(MB-B rail height adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 G. Update process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

B. Vertical image distortion balance [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

adjustment (Copy lamp unit installing
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
position adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
C. Vertical image distortion balance
adjustment (No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing A. Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
position adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 B. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
D. Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion
adjustment [Winding pulley position
adjustment] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
[1] GENERAL
1. Note for servicing
Pictogram
This Service Manual uses some pictographs to assure safe opera-
tion.
Please understand the meanings of pictographs before servicing.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION is ignored, an injury or damage to
property could occur.

A. Cautions for servicing

1) Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or
smudges on the drum will cause dirty printouts.
2) The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.

Fusing unit

3) Do not look directly at the light source of the scanner module.

Doing so may damage your eyes.
4) Five adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer
units. These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the
floor.
Adjuster

Lock Release

5) Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may

result in personal injury or damage to the machine.
6) Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be
moved by more than one person to prevent injury.
7) When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first
turn both the computer and the machine off.
8) Do not print anything which is prohibited from printing by law.
The following items are normally prohibited from printing by
national law. Other items may be prohibited by local law.
• Money
• Stamps
• Bonds
• Stocks
• Bank drafts
• Checks
• Passports
• Driver's licenses
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge into fire. Toner may be
spattered, causing a burn.
10) Store toner or toner cartridges in a hard-to-reach place for chil-
dren.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 GENERAL 1 - 1

[2] CONFIGURATION
1. System configuration
A. Basic system
AR-M312U/M420U
(Copier/Printer model)

Necessary options
• Any one of the scanner module/OC (AR-EF5), scanner module/DSPF (AR-EF6)
• The scanner rack (AR-RK2)
• The stand with multipurpose drawer (AR-D29)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 CONFIGURATION 2 - 1

B. Option lineup
For combinations of options, refer to "C. List of combination of peripheral devices" described later.

12. Finisher
(AR-FN6)

2. Scanner module with OC

(AR-EF5)

7. Exit tray 8. Duplex

(AR-TE3) module/bypass tray
(AR-DU4) 6. Right upper exit
1. Scanner module with DSPF tray (AR-TE5)
(AR-EF6)

5. Upper exit tray

(AR-TE4)

9. Duplex module
(AR-DU3) 13. Mail-bin stacker
(AR-MS1)

10. Saddle stitch

finisher
(AR-FN7) 3. Scanner rack
(AR-RK2)

11. Punch unit

(AR-PN1A/B/C/D)

4. Stand with multipurpose drawer

(AR-D29)

14. Power supply unit

(AR-DC1)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 CONFIGURATION 2 - 2

No. Option item Installing conditions
1 Scanner module with DSPF AR-EF6
2 Scanner module with OC AR-EF5
3 Scanner rack AR-RK2
4 Stand with multipurpose drawer AR-D29
5 Upper exit tray AR-TE4 • Required when the finisher (AR-FN6) or the mail-bin stacker (AR-
MS1) is not installed.
6 Right upper exit tray AR-TE5
7 Exit tray AR-TE3 • Required when the duplex module (AR-DU3) is installed and the
saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7) is not installed.
8 Duplex module/bypass tray AR-DU4 • The stand with multipurpose drawer (AR-D29) is required.
9 Duplex module AR-DU3 • The duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4) cannot be installed with
the exit tray (AR-TE3) or the saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7).
• When the duplex module (AR-DU3) is installed, the exit tray (AR-
TE3) or the saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7) is required.
10 Saddle stitch finisher AR-FN7 • Simultaneous installation with the finisher (AR-FN6) is inhibited.
• The duplex module (AR-DU3) is required.
• The stand with multipurpose drawer (AR-D29) is required.
• The power supply unit (AR-DC1) is required.
11 Punch unit AR-PN1A/B/C/D • The saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7) is required.
12 Finisher AR-FN6 • Simultaneous installation with the saddle finisher (AR-FN7) is
inhibited.
• The stand with multipurpose drawer (AR-D29) is required.
• The power supply unit (AR-DC1) is required.
13 Mail-bin stacker AR-MS1 • The stand with multipurpose drawer (AR-D29) is required.
• The power supply unit (AR-DC1) is required.
14 Power supply unit AR-DC1 • Required when installing the saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7), the
finisher (AR-FN6), or the mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1).

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 CONFIGURATION 2 - 3

C. List of combination of peripheral devices
As shown in the table below, some other peripheral devices (B) may be needed for installation of a peripheral device (A) and some periph-
eral devices cannot be installed together.

Stand with multipurpose drawer

Scanner module with DSPF

Duplex module/bypass tray

Scanner module with OC

Upper exit tray extension

Saddle stitch finisher

Right upper exit tray

Power supply unit

Mail-bin stacker
Duplex module
Scanner rack

Punch unit
Exit tray
Finisher
Related to scanner feature
Scanner module with DSPF AR-EF6
Scanner module with OC AR-EF5
Scanner rack AR-RK2 *1

Related to paper feed unit

Stand with multipurpose *2
AR-D29
drawer
Duplex module/bypass tray AR-DU4 *2
Duplex module AR-DU3 *2

A Output units
Saddle stitch finisher AR-FN7
Finisher AR-FN6
Mail-bin stacker AR-MS1
Exit tray AR-TE3 *3
Upper exit tray extension AR-TE4
Right upper exit tray AR-TE5
Punch unit AR-PN1

Related to extension of
functions and others
Power supply unit AR-DC1 *1

= Must be installed together.

*1 = Any of the units must be installed together.
*2 = Must be installed for installation of the AR-FN7, AR-FN6 and AR-MS1.
*3 = The AR-DU4 is standard provision.
= Cannot be installed together.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 CONFIGURATION 2 - 4

[3] SPECIFICATIONS (in mm)
Paper size A B C D E
A3 297 420 4 289 4
1. Basic Specification
B4 257 364 4 242 4
A. Base Engine A4 210 297 4 202 4
B5 182 257 4 168 4
(1) Form
A5 148 210 4 140 4
Console type
Japanese postcard 100 148 4 92 4
(2) Engine speed Ledger 279 432 4 271 4
Paper size AR-M312U AR-M420U Legal 216 356 4 208 4
A4, 8.5" x 11" 31ppm 42ppm Foolscap 216 330 4 208 4
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R 22ppm 28ppm Letter 216 279 4 208 4
A5R/5.5" x 8.5"R, Invoice-R 31ppm 42ppm Executive 184 267 4 183 4
B5 31ppm 42ppm Invoice 140 2162 4 132 4
B5R, Exective-R 22ppm 28ppm Com-10(envelope) 105 241 4 97 4
B4/8.5" x 14" 17ppm 21ppm C5(envelope) 162 229 4 154 4
A3/11" x 17" 15ppm 19ppm Monarch(envelope) 98 191 4 90 4
Extra, Envelope 15ppm 19ppm DL(envelope) 110 220 4 102 4
ISO B5(envelope) 176 250 4 168 4
(3) Engine composition
Photoconductor type OPC
(6) Warm-up
(diameter of photoconductor : ø30mm) Warm-up time less than 80 seconds
Record method Electrophotograph (laser) Pre-heat requirement Required
Development Dry-type dual-component magnetic Jam recovery time Target: about 30 seconds
method brush development (Under standard condition of 60 seconds left
Charge method Charged saw-tooth method after side cover opening, polygon motor halt)
Transfer method Transfer roller (7) Power source
Cleaning method Counter blade
Voltage 100V system 200V system
Fusing method Heat roller
100-127V 220-240V
Used toner disposal Toner recycling system
Frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
(4) Engine resolution Power cord Inlet type
Resolution Write :600dpi (8) Power consumption
Smoothing Write :1200dpi equivalent
Max. Power consump. 100V system 200V system
Gradation Write :2 levels
1440W 1850W
(5) Printable area (9) Energy Star benchmark
The print area of this product is shown below.
AR-M312U AR-M420U
E Low power mode Less than 169.35W Less than 211.7W
Recovery time from Max. 30 sec. Max. 30 sec.
low power mode
C C Sleep mode Less than 80Wh Less than 80Wh
Transition time to Max. 60 min. Max. 60 min.
sleep mode

(10) Noise
At working less than 6.7B
B At waiting mode less than 4.8B
∗ Showing noise benchmark in each model as a whole system.
(11) Dimensions
External dimensions 32.5" x 26.2" x 44.4"
(W x D x H) (826 mm x 665 mm x 1127 mm)
(including automatic document feeder)
Occupied space 37.9" x 26.2" (963 x 665 mm)
E dimensions (include automatic document feeder)
D (W x D)
A
Weight Engine: Approx. 91 lb (41.4 kg)
Desk: Approx. 55.5 lb (25.2 kg)
Paper size
Rack: Approx. 16 lb (7.4 kg)
Printable area DSPF: Approx. 46 lb (21 kg)

If a printer driver for Windows or Macintosh is used for printing, the

printable area will be smaller. The actual printable area depends
on the printer driver to be used.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1

B. Document Feeding Equipment (4) Print Function
(1) One-drawer tray (included in the base engine) Function PCL5e/PCL6
General Copies 1 - 999
Paper feed method One-drawer tray
Orientation Yes
Sizes to be fed A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Duplex print Yes
Paper capacity 500 sheets (at 80g/m²)
Saddle stitch Yes
Media available for Plain paper 60 - 105g/m², 16 - 28lbs
Binding edge Left/top/right
paper feeding
N-up 2/4/6/8
Paper type Plain, recycled, pre-printed, pre-
punched, color, letter head N-up direction Fixed
Paper size switching To be switched by user N-up border line Yes
(paper size to be entered from the Paper Paper size Yes
operation panel). input Custom paper size 1 size
Dehumidification Not provided Source selection Yes
heater Different first page Yes
Balance detection Provided (paper empty and 3 steps) Transparency inserts Yes
Default size setting 100V system 200V Paper Output tray selection Yes
system output Mail bin Yes
8.5" x 11" A4 Staple Yes
Mounting/demounting Provided Offset Yes
of the tray Punch Yes
C. Output Equipment Graphic Resolution 600/300 dpi
Halftone N/A
(1) Face-down Exit Tray (included in the base engine) Graphic mode Yes
Output position/method Face-down output at the upper side of main Smoothing Yes
unit Toner save Yes
Output paper capacity 400 sheets (80g/m² sheet) Photo enhancement *1 Yes
Output paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R Negative image N/A
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", Mirror image N/A
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R
Zoom N/A
7.25" x 10.5"R, postal card,
Fit to page Yes
Monarch (98 x 191)
Font Resident font 45 fonts
Com-10 (105 x 241), DL (110 x 220),
C5 (162 x 229), ISO B5 (176 x 250) Download font Bitmap TrueType, Graphic
Spec of media for Tracing paper : 52 ~ 59g/m² / 14 ~ 15lbs Others Watermark Yes
paper output Plain paper : 60 ~ 128g/m² / 16 ~ 34lbs Overlay Yes
Index paper : 176g/m² / 47lbs Account control Yes
Cover paper : 205g/m² / 54 ~ 55lbs Custom settings Yes
Transparency firm
*1: PCL6 only
Remaining paper Not provided
detection (5) Compatibility
Exit tray full detection Provided PCL 5e Target for PCL5e is to be compatible with HP
compatibility LaserJet 4000.
2. Specific Function Small margin difference, rendering difference
by different font family, default and transfer
A. Printer Function function difference are not to be included in the
compatibility.
(1) Platform All the PJL commands are not necessarily
IBM PC/AT (Include compatible machine) included in the compatibility.
(2) Support OS PCL6 Target for PCL6 is to be compatible with HP
compatibility LaserJet 4000.
Custom Windows 95/98/Me Small margin difference, rendering difference
PCL5e/6(XL) Windows NT 4.0 by different font family, default and transfer
Windows 2000 function difference are not to be included in the
Windows XP compatibility.
(3) PDL emulation All the PJL commands are not necessarily
included in the compatibility.
PCL6 compatible, PCL5e compatible

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 2

B. Expanded RAM (2) First Copy Time
Installation of an expanded RAM will avoid the following status. Conditions: A4 or 8.5"x11"P from front tray of PPC, without HDD
1) Time out error reduction and with polygon motor running.
2) Spool time reduction AR-M312U AR-M420U
3) Avoidance of VM error / memory full Document glass *1 Less than 5.3 Less than 4.6
seconds seconds
Use a commercially available RAM of the following specifications.
DSPF Less than 6.0 Less than 5.3
If a RAM which does not meet the specifications is installed, it may
seconds seconds
cause a trouble such as that it is not recognized or its capacity is
not correctly recognized. *1: During OC/high-speed mode

<Spesification> (3) Job Speed

DIMM TYPE 168pin 3.3V Unbuffered SDRAM DIMM Non-ECC AR-M312U AR-M420U
DIMM capacity 64MByte, 128MByte, 256MByte S→ S *1 30 cpm (97%) 39 cpm (93%)
CAS LATENCY CL=2 S→ D *2 29 cpm (94%) 38 cpm (90%)
SDRAM CLOCK For PC100, PC133 D→ D *3 29 cpm (94%) 38 cpm (90%)
SPD Supporting *1: S → S : A4 / 8.5" x 11"P original 5 sheets copy 5sets
Parity Not support *2: S → D : A4 / 8.5" x 11"P original 10 sheets copy 5sets
ECC Not support *3: D → D : A4 / 8.5" x 11"P original 5 sheets (10 pages) copy 5sets
<Operation-assured Memory> (As of March / 2001) Note: First copy time has been factored into calculation resulting
Manufacture Capacity Model name RAM CHIP name in reduced CPM.
Kingston 128MB KVR133X64C3/128 HYB39S64800BT-7.5 (4) Continuous Copy
Technology 128MB KVR133X64C3-128 D456821G-A75-9JF
256MB KVR133X64C3-256 HY57V28820AT-H Max. multiple number 999 pages
Viking 64MB VIK8641CL2 µPD456841G5-A80-9JF (5) Copy Ratio
Compornents 64MB VIK8641CL2 D456841G5-A80-9JF
Copy ratio AB series :
128MB VIK6642CL2 TC59SM708FT-80
25%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
128MB VIK6642CL2 D4564841G5-A80-9JF
400%
256MB VIK2642CL2 TC59SM708FT-80
Inch series :
Memory Card 64MB DM864VS65804X-7G GM72V66841XT75
25%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 400%
Technology 128MB DM1665VS65804X-7G HY57V64820HG
Zoom 25 - 400%
C. Copy function 25 - 200% (Copy from DSPF)
Independent Not provided
(1) Copy Speed
scaling
AR-M312U AR-M420U
Actual Reduction Enlargement Actual Reduction Enlargement (6) Exposure/Copy Quality Process
A4, 31 31 31 42 42 42 Exposure mode Binary: Text(auto/manual), Text/photo, Photo
8.5"x11" 256 levels: Not provided
A4R, 22 22 22 28 28 28 Manual steps 9 steps
8.5"x11"R
Smoothing Standard
A5R, 31 31 31 42 42 42
5.5"x8.5"R, Toner save mode Standard
Invoice-R
B5 31 31 31 42 42 42
B5R, 22 22 22 28 28 28
Exective-R
B4, 17 17 17 21 21 21
8.5"x14"
A3, 11"x17" 15 15 15 19 19 19
Extra, 15 15 15 19 19 19
Envelope
Japan P/C In case of printing on post card, engine speed can vary with system
configuration, because next paper is fed after machine completely
output previous page.
∗ Figures in reduction/enlargement are represented by those at
the ratio to show slowest speed

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 3

(7) Copy Function 3. B/W Scanner Module (DSPF)
Function APS ❍
(1) Form
AMS ❍
Scanner (Document glass) / DSPF standard
Paper type select ❍
By type setting Operation panel integral type
(common hardware for all the destinations)
Auto tray switching ❍
Rotation copy ❍ (2) Destination judgment
Electronic sort ❍ When connected with a base engine, the type (Japan domestic
Rotation sort ✕ 100V, overseas 100V or overseas 200V systems) is detected
Reserved copy ❍ and the settings will accordingly be changed.
Prior tray setting ✕ (3) Resolution / Gradation
Recall/register of program ❍ Reading Copy mode
Proof copy ✕ resolution Magnification 25~99 100 101~200 201~400
Preheat function ❍ (dpi) OC 600x600 600x600 600x600 600x600
To be set up by key OC 600x600 600x300 600x600 600x600
operator (High speed):
Auto power shut-off function ❍ DSPF (standard) 600x300 600x300 600x600 -
To be set up by the key DSPF 600x600 600x600 600x600 -
operator program (high quality)
Account control ❍ Reading 256 tones
level
100 accounts
Exposure Electrodeless xenon lamp
Communication support ❍
lamp
(RIC)
Output level Binary
Card counter support Only
provided the connector (4) Document Glass
Coin vendor support Only Reading 297 x 431.8(mm)
provided the connector area 11.7" x 17"
Special Margin shift ❍ Original Left edge / Rear corner alignment
function Edge erase / Center erase ❍ alignment
Dual page copying ❍ Original size Provided
Covers ✕ detection (Standard size only)
Transparency insert ✕ Sizes to be Automatic (one detection unit to be used with
Centering ✕ detected software modification by destination)
Multi shot (N in 1) ❍ (2 in 1 / 4 in 1) Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14",
(Default at overseas 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
Pamphlet copy ❍
100V base engine) 5.5" x 8.5"
2-sided copy orientation ❍
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13",
change
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
Large capacity original mode ❍ (Max. 140 pages)
5.5" x 8.5"
B/W reverse ✕
AB-1(Default at Japan A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,
Shading ✕
domestic 100V / A5A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
Mirror image ✕ overseas 200V base
Repeat ✕ engines)
Date stamp ✕ AB-2 A3, A4R, A5, 216x330 mm
Stamp ✕ OR guide Rear left side Original reference position
Page stamp ✕ display (Print display) " "
Zaurus print ✕ Left side OR guide (From the Interior side)
❍ : Standard Function (Print display) [5-1/2]•[A5 ]•[B5 ]•
[A4 /A5 ]•[8.5"]•[B4 /
✕ : Not provided
B5 ]•[11"]•[A3 /A4 ]
Interior side OR guide (From the left side)
(Print display) [5-1/2]•[A5 ]•[B5 ]•
[A4 /A5 ]•[8-1/2]•
[B5 ]•[11"]•[A4 ]•[13"]•
[14"]•[B4 ]•[A3 ]•[17"]
Interior side OR guide Book marks are at A4 and
8-1/2 positions.
The position available to attach the staple position
guide label when the optional finisher (desktop
console type) is equipped.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 4

(5) DSPF (8) Display device at scanner part
Type DSPF One-scan-dual-side Type Dot map LCD, touch panel
scanning method DSPF with Display dot number 640 x 240 dots (dot pitch 0.24x0.24 mm)
OC integrated LCD operating 153.5 x 57.5 mm
Scan speed Standard mode 45 opm dimension
High quality mode 22.5 opm LCD back-light Fluorescent tube method
Original Center alignment LCD brightness Provided
alignment adjustment
Original size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R11"x17",
(9) Key
8.5"x14", 8.5"x13", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R,5.5"x8.5",
5.5"x8.5"R Mode Job status key
(in Fax mode : long-length paper up to 800mm is selection area Printer mode key
applicable) (ready display LED/data in-memory display LED)
Original 50~128g/m², 15~34lbs Copy mode key
paper User definition key
weight Basic input Start key
Original Max. 50 sheets area CA key
stack (max. 30 sheets for A3, B4,11"x17",8.5"x14") 10-key
capacity (When, however, exceeding 105g/m² Clear key
and A3, B4,11"x17",8.5"x14", max. 15 sheets) * key
or, Total thickness less than # key
6.5mm (at 50~80g/m², 15~21lbs) (10) Touch sense method
5.0mm (at 80~128g/m², 21~34lbs)
Resistive film method
Not Transparency film, secondary original paper,
transportable tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, (11) Used character in the LCD
original type original with crumple/crimp/rip, Dot 8 x 16 , 16 x 16 dots
original with attachment/clipping, Bold display O
original with many punch holes
(with 2 or 3 holes acceptable),
original preprinted with ink-ribbon.
4. Rack for Scanner
Original size Provided (1) Dimensions
detection
Strength 60 kg
Sizes to be Automatic (one detection unit to be used with
Weight Approx. 7.4 kg
detected software modification by destination)
Inch-1 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11",
(Default at overseas 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"
100V base engine)
Inch-2 11"x17", 8.5"x13", 8.5"x11",
8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"
AB-1(Default at A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,
Japan domestic A5, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5,
100V / overseas 8.5"x11", 216x330 mm
200V base engines)
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5,
B5, B5R, 216x330 mm,
8.5"x11"
Original tray Center of the tray Original reference position
guide (inscribeddisplay) " " Original face-down
display placement indication " "
Original Guide (From Center)
(inscribed display) [B5 ]•[A4 /A5 ]•[8.5"]•
[B4 /B5 ]•[11"]•
[A3 /A4 ]
The position available to attach the staple position
guide label when the optional finisher (desktop
console type) is equipped.
(6) Power Source
Supplied from the main unit
(7) Dimensions
External dimensions 32.4” x 23.9” x 7.5” (824 x 606 x190 mm)
(WxDxH)
Occupied space 37.2” x 24.4” (945 x 619 mm)
dimensions (WxD) (When the tray is extended)
Weight DSPF model: Approx. 46.3 lb (21 kg)
OC model: Approx. 28.7 lb (13 kg)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 5

[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
A. Middle East
NO Name Content Life Product name Remark
1 Toner CA(Black) Toner(Toner : Net Weight 814g) 27K AR-450FT *Life setup is based on A4 6%
2 Developer Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 100K AR-450SD
3 Drum Drum x1 100K AR-451DR
4 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR-450KA
Discharging plate x1
Paper dust removing unit x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
5 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR-450KB
Lower heat roller x1
Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) x4
Fusing separation pawl (Lower) x2
Cleaning roller x1
Bearing x2
6 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR-SC1 For AR-FN6
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR-SC2 For AR-FN7
Note1: Print on Master/individual carton: Toner/developer; 2 languages (English/French), DR; 4 languages (English/French/German/
Spanish).
Note2: Packed with machine: DR/Developer UN/Process UN
Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts.

B. Asia
NO Name Content Life Product name Remark
1 Toner CA(Black) Toner(Toner : Net Weight 814g) 27K AR-450ST *Life setup is based on A4 6%
2 Developer Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 100K AR-450SD
3 Drum Drum x1 100K AR-451DR
4 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR-450KA
Discharging plate x1
Paper dust removing unit x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
5 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR-450KB
Lower heat roller x1
Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) x4
Fusing separation pawl (Lower) x2
Cleaning roller x1
Bearing x2
6 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR-SC1 For AR-FN6
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR-SC2 For AR-FN7
Note1: Print on Master/individual carton:4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish).
Note2: Packed with machine: DR/Developer UN/Process UN
Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 - 1

C. Hong kong
NO Name Content Life Product name Remark
1 Toner CA(Black) Toner(Toner : Net Weight 814g) 27K AR-450ST-C *Life setup is based on A4 6%
2 Developer Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 100K AR-450SD-C
3 Drum Drum x1 100K AR-451DR-C
4 100K PM kit Transfer roller x1 100K AR-450KA
Discharging plate x1
Paper dust removing unit x1
DV blade x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
5 200K PM kit Upper heat roller x1 200K AR-450KB
Lower heat roller x1
Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) x4
Fusing separation pawl (Lower) x2
Cleaning roller x1
Bearing x2
6 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 3000x3 AR-SC1 For AR-FN6
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000x3 AR-SC2 For AR-FN7
Note1: Print on Master/individual carton:2 languages (English/Chinease).
Note2: Packed with machine: DR/Developer UN/Process UN
Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 - 2

2. Production number identification C. Developer cartridge
The lot number is of 10 digit, and each digit indicates as follows.
A. Drum cartridge
The lot number shall be printed on the bag.
The lot number, printed on the front side flange, is composed of 10
digits, each digit showing the following content: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
1 Number
2 Alphabet
For this model, this digit is 2. Indicates the model conformity code. T for this model.
2 Alphabet
3 Number
Indicates the model conformity code. T for this model. Indicates the end digit of the production year.
3 Number
4 Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the end digit of the production year. Indicates the production month.
4 Number or X, Y, Z X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Indicates the production month. 5/6 Number
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Indicates the production day on the month.
5/6 Number 7 Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production day on the month.
Indicates the month of packing.
7 Number or X, Y, Z X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Indicates the month of packing.
8/9 Number
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. Indicates the day of the month of packing.
8/9 Number
10 Alphabet
Indicates the day of the month of packing. Indicates the production factory. "A" for Nara Plant.
10 Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. "A" for Nara Plant. 3. Environmental conditions
B. Toner cartridge A. Operating conditions
The lot number is of 7 digits, and each digit indicates as follows.
30 85%
The lot number shall be printed in the position shown in the figure.
85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Humidity (%)

1 Version number (A - sequentially revised)

35 60%
2 Numeral figure
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
3 Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. (B for SOCC)
4 Destination code
5,6 Numeral figures 20
Indicates the production day.
7 Numeral figure or X, Y, Z 10 Temperature 35
Indicates the production month. (Without dew condensation)
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
B. Storage conditions
Serial No. attachment
90
Humidity (%)

Serial No. attachment 20

-10 Temperature 40
Heat seal (Without dew condensation)

Aluminum bag

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4 - 3

[5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Exterior

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

No. Name Function Note

1 Bypass tray This tray can also be used for special papers including Option
transparency film. (AR-DU4)
2 Exit tray The tray is extendable to support large size paper. Extend the tray Option
when 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", A3 or B4 paper is being (AR-DU4/AR-TE3)
used.
3 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet originals. Both Option
sides of two-sided originals can be scanned at once. (AR-EF6)
4 Duplex module Module for two-sided printing Option
(AR-DU3/DU4)
5 Upper paper output area Finished sheets are deposited here. –
6 Upper exit tray extension Provides support for large size paper. Option
(AR-AR-TE4)
7 Operation panel – –
8 Front cover Open to add toner. –
9 Power switch Press to turn power on and off. –
10 Paper tray 1 – –
11 Stand with multipurpose drawer Up to 500 sheets of 20 lbs. (80 g/m2) paper can be loaded. Also Option
special papers such as envelopes (standard sizes only) and (AR-D29)
postcards can be set.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 1

2. Interior

1 2 3 4

5 6

No. Name Function

1 Duplex module side cover Open when a misfeed has occurred in the duplex module.
2 Side cover latch Push up to open the side cover when a misfeed has occurred in the main unit.
3 Fusing unit Lift up to open the side cover when a misfeed has occurred in the main unit.
CAUTION: The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed paper.
4 Toner cartridge (drum/toner cartridge) The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel.
5 Photoconductive drum Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.
NOTE: Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.
6 Cartridge lock lever When replacing the drum, toner or developer cartridge, turn down this lever and pull it out.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 2

3. Operation panel
1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 Touch panel The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel. The display will
change to show the status of print or copy according to which of those modes is selected.
2 Mode select keys and indicators Use to switch the display mode of the touch panel.
3 [PRINT] key/ Press to enter the print mode.
READY indicator/ • READY indicator
DATA indicator Print data can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
Lights up or blinks when print data is being received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is
being performed.
4 [COPY] key Press to select the copy mode and display the basic screen of the copy mode.
Even when the machine is busy in another mode, the basic copy mode screen will appear when
the [COPY] key is pressed.
If this key is pressed and held while the basic screen of the copy mode is displayed, the total
output count and the quantity of toner remaining (percentage) will be displayed.
5 [JOB STATUS] key Press to display the current job status.
6 [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel or to set key operator programs.
7 Numeric keys Use to enter number values for various settings.
8 [*] key ([ACC.#-C] key) If the auditing mode has been set, press this key to close an open account after finishing a copy
job.
9 [#/P] key Press to select the job memory mode.
10 [C] key Press to clear a copy quantity entry.
If this key is pressed while the automatic document feeder is being used, any originals in
progress will be automatically output.
11 Start key When the indicator is lit, copying job can be started.
Press to start copying.
12 [CA] key Press to clear all selected settings and return the machine to the initial settings for the currently
selected mode. Before starting a copy operation, press the [CA] key first.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 3

4. Touch Panel
A. Basic screen of copy mode
When the copy mode key is pressed, this display screen will appear showing the basic copy mode selections.

1 2 3

10
1. A4
2. A4 % 11

4 5 6 7 8

1 Message display Basic status messages are displayed here.

2 [INTERRUPT] key display area When interrupt copy is available, the [INTERRUPT] key will be displayed here.
When an interrupt copy job is being run, a [CANCEL] key will be displayed here to be used for
canceling the interrupt copy job.
3 Copy quantity display Displays the selected number of copies before the [START] key is pressed or the number of
completed copies after the [START] key is pressed.
A single copy can be made when "0" displayed.
4 [2-SIDED COPY] key Touch to display the duplex copy mode setting screen. A highlighted selection on the screen will
indicate the currently selected mode. The setting screen can be closed by touching the [OK] key
on the setting screen whether or not a selection change was made.
5 [OUTPUT] key Touch to display the output mode setting screen. A highlighted selection on the screen will indicate
the currently selected mode. The setting screen can be closed by touching the [OK] key on the
setting screen whether or not a selection change was made.
6 [SPECIAL MODES] key Touch to display the special modes selection screen.
7 Paper size display The display shows the location of the paper trays, the size of the paper in the trays and the
approximate amount of paper loaded in each tray. The approximate amount of paper in a tray is
indicated by .
8 Original size display The original paper size will be displayed when originals are placed on the document glass or in the
document feeder.
9 Exposure display and A touch of the [EXPOSURE] key will open the exposure selection window.
[EXPOSURE] key A highlighted key on the exposure window indicates which exposure mode (AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/
PHOTO or PHOTO) is currently selected. When an exposure mode other than AUTO is selected,
an exposure level scale will also appear in the window.
10 Paper select display and Displays the selected paper size. When the auto paper select mode has been selected, "AUTO"
[PAPER SELECT] key will be displayed.A touch of the [PAPER SELECT] key will open the paper selection window. When
a selection is made, the selection window will close. To close the window without making a
selection touch the key again
11 Copy ratio display and Displays the selected copy ratio. Touch to display the reduction and enlargement copy ratio
[COPY RATIO] key selection screen.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 4

B. Job status screen (common to print and copy modes)
This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
A job list showing the current job at the top of the job queue or a list showing completed jobs can be displayed.
The contents of the jobs can be viewed, moved up to the highest priority in the job queue or deleted from the queue.

1 2

JOB QUEUE SETS / PROGRESS STATUS JOB QUEUE

COPY 003 / 000 COPYING 1/1 COMPLETE
SHARP001 003 / 000 PAPER EMPTY*
DETAIL
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
PRINT JOB

3 4 5 6 7

1 Job list A job list which indicates the current job and reserved jobs or a job list which indicates completed jobs is
displayed. The icons to the left of the jobs in queue represent the job mode.
Print mode Copy mode

When a job list which indicates the current job and reserved jobs is displayed, the displayed jobs
themselves are operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job the highest print priority, touch the
relevant job key to select the job and execute the desired operation using the keys described in 5,6, and 7
2 Mode switching key Use to switch the job list between "JOB QUEUE" and "COMPLETE".
"JOB QUEUE": Displays the list of the current job and the reserved jobs.
"COMPLETE": Displays the list of completed jobs.
3 [PRINT JOB] key Use to display the print job list for all modes (print and copy).
4 Display switching keys Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.
5 [STOP/DELETE] key Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the selected reserved job.
6 [PRIORITY] key If you select a job among the reserved jobs in the "JOB QUEUE" job list to which you wish to give the
highest priority and touch this key, the job will move to the highest priority reserved job.
7 [DETAIL] key Use to display the detailed information of the selected job. The paper size for printing can be changed
from the specified size.
∗ PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display
When a job status display indicates "PAPER EMPTY", the specified size paper is not loaded in any tray to run that job.
In this case, printing is suspended for that job until the required paper is loaded. Until the required paper is loaded another reserved job data
will be printed if possible.
(If paper runs out during printing, another job will not be printed.) If you wish to change the paper size because you do not have the speci-
fied size paper, you can change the size by touching the current job key to select it and touch the [DETAIL] key described in 7.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 5

5. Cross sectional view
A. Scanner unit
3 SPPD
4 SPED
16 1 2 6 7
17 SPOD 5

15

14 13 12 11 10 9 8

No. Name Model No. Name Model

1 CIS unit AR-EF6 10 Copy lamp base unit AR-EF5/EF6
2 Original resist roller AR-EF6 11 No. 1 mirror AR-EF5/EF6
3 Original resist front sensor (SPPD) AR-EF6 12 Copy lamp (Xenon) AR-EF5/EF6
4 Original set sensor (SPED) AR-EF6 13 Mirror base unit AR-EF5/EF6
5 Original take-up sensor AR-EF6 14 No. 3 mirror AR-EF5/EF6
6 Original length sensor 1 (SPLS1) AR-EF6 15 No. 2 mirror AR-EF5/EF6
7 Original length sensor 2 (SPLS2) AR-EF6 16 Original exit roller AR-EF6
8 CCD/lens unit AR-EF5/EF6 17 Original exit sensor AR-EF6
9 Original feed roller AR-EF6

B. Engine
POD1 POD2 POD3
20 21 22 23

19
18
15

16
17
25 4
3
2
1

8
6
9
24
5
PPD1
10

11

12 13 PED TUD 7 14
No. Name No. Name
1 OPC drum 14 Machine tray (Paper tray1) rotating plate
2 Main charger 15 Upper heat roller
3 Cleaning blade 16 Pressure roller
4 LSU 17 Heater lamp
5 Developing unit 18 Thermistor (RTH1 / RTH2)
6 Magnet roller 19 Fusing back roller
7 Toner hopper 20 Reverse gate
8 Transfer roller 21 Paper exit roller
9 Resist roller 22 Full detection lever
10 Paper transport roller 23 Printer control PWB
11 Machine tray (Paper tray1) paper feed roller 24 Power supply unit
12 Machine tray (Paper tray1) separation roller 25 Cleaning roller
13 Machine tray (Paper tray1) take-up roller

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 6

6. Switch, Sensor
A. Scanner unit

5 6
4 7
3
2
1
8

12
9

11

10

Code Name Active condition Model

1 SPPD DPSF original resist front sensor AR-EF6
2 SCOV DPSF paper feed cover sensor AR-EF6
3 SPED DPSF original set sensor AR-EF6
4 OCSW Original open/close sensor AR-EF5/EF6
5 ORSLED Original size sensor PWB (Light emitting side) AR-EF5/EF6
6 SPLS1 DPSF original length sensor 1 AR-EF6
7 SPLS2 DPSF original length sensor 2 AR-EF6
8 SPFVR DPSF original width detection volume PWB AR-EF6
9 ORS-PD Original size sensor PWB (Light receiving side) AR-EF5/EF6
10 SOCD DPSF open/close sensor AR-EF6
11 SPOD DPSF original exit sensor AR-EF6
12 MHPS Mirror home position sensor AR-EF5/EF6

B. Engine

5.POD3
4.POD2

2.DSW-L

3.POD1

7.TCS
8.LUD
6.PPD1 10.MAIN SW

1.DSW-F

9.PED
Code Function/Operation Active condition
1 DSW-F Front door open/close detection H= Door open
2 DSW-L Left door open/close detection H=Door open
3 POD1 Paper exit detection L= Paper detection
4 POD2 Paper exit detection L= Paper detection
5 POD3 Paper exit detection Full L= Paper detection
6 PPD1 Paper transport detection L= Paper detection
7 TCS Toner concentration sensor
8 LUD Paper feed cassette upper limit detection H= Upper limit detection
9 PED Paper feed cassette paper empty detection L= Paper empty detection
10 MAIN SW Power switch

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 7

7. PWB
A. Scanner unit
2 3
1
12

13
4

11
6
10 7
9
8

No. Name Function/Operation Model

1 DPSF control PWB DPSF control AR-EF6
2 Original size detection PWB (Light emitting side) Original size detection when using the table glass AR-EF5/EF6
3 CCD PWB (in lens unit) (The lens unit cannot be Image scan (Table glass/DPSF surface) AR-EF5/EF6
disassembled.)
4 DPSF original width detection volume PWB DPSF original width detection AR-EF6
5 MFP operation PWB Panel operation control AR-EF5/EF6
6 LVDS PWB, Inverter PWB LCD signal relay, Inverter for LCD backlight AR-EF5/EF6
7 Original size sensor (Light receiving side) Original size detection when using the table glass AR-EF5/EF6
8 CIS unit (in CIS unit) (The CIS unit cannot be disassembled.) Image scan (DPSF back surface) AR-EF6
9 CIS interface PWB (in CIS unit) (The CIS unit cannot be CIS signal AD conversion process AR-EF6
disassembled.)
10 Scanner interface PWB Scanner unit and connection of scanner control PWB AR-EF5/EF6
11 CIS control PWB CIS unit control and image process AR-EF6
12 CL inverter PWB Inverter for copy lamp AR-EF5/EF6
13 Scanner control PWB Scanner unit control AR-EF5/EF6

B. Engine
1
4

5
10

8
11 3

Name Function/Operation
1 PRT controller Image process, image data communication control
2 PCU PWB Overall control of the machine and options
3 Power supply unit DC power supply
4 LD PWB (Inside LSU) Laser ON control (Inside LSU: LSU cannot be disassembled.)
5 Mother PWB Signal interface between PCU and the controller
6 Reactor PWB (200V only) Noise filter
7 High voltage resistor PWB High voltage load adjustment
8 Cassette detection PWB Paper cassette control
9 Drawer PWB Fan control
10 High voltage PWB High voltage power supply
11 Fuse PWB Protection of the machine when an abnormal power is supplied.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 8

8. Motor, Clutch, Solenoid
A. Scanner unit
5

4
3
1 2

No. Name Function/Operation Model

1 SPFM DPSF motor Original transport in DPSF scan AR-EF6
2 SPSC DPSF original resist clutch DPSF original scan timing adjustment AR-EF6
3 SPFC DPSF original feed clutch DPSF original feed roller drive AR-EF6
4 SDSS DPSF original stopper solenoid DPSF original stopper gate drive AR-EF6
5 MIRM Mirror motor Mirror base copy lamp base drive AR-EF5/EF6
6 SPFS DPSF original feed solenoid DPSF original feed unit drive AR-EF6

B. Printer
13.PSPS
10.CFM2
6.VFM2
3.POM

9.FM
1.DM

14.RRC
12.TRC

2.MM
11.CPFC 7.VFM1

7.VFM1
5.LUM
8.CFM1

4.TM : Fan blowing direction

Code Function/Operation Type

1 DM Drum motor Brushless motor
2 MM Main motor Brushless motor
3 POM Paper exit motor Stepping motor
4 TM Toner motor Synchronous motor
5 LUM Lift-up motor Synchronous motor
6 VFM2 Heat exhaust fan motor Fan motor
7 VFM1 Cooling fan motor Fan motor
8 CFM1 Suction fan motor Fan motor
9 FM Controller cooling fan motor Fan motor
10 CFM2 Ozone exhaust fan motor Fan motor
11 CPFC Paper cassette paper feed clutch
12 TRC Paper transport clutch
13 PSPS Separation solenoid
14 RRC Resist roller clutch

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5 - 9

[6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. Installing procedure flowchart
There are many combinations between this machine and option units. For installing option units, observe the following procedures for effi-
ciency.
To install the devices effciently, follow the procedure below.
Some peripheral devices may have been installed as standard devices depending on the main unit model.
Part of descriptions and illustrations may be different.

Scanner/document feeder device

Finishing device

Main unit Finishing device

Duplex device Paper feeding device

Start of installation

Main unit, paper feeding

device, and power supply
unit.
Controller board, Yes Install controller board,
AR-D29 extended memory extended memory.
Main unit installed?

No

[Electrical setting/adjustment]
Install duplex/pypass device.
Duplex/bypass Yes 1) Installation of driver software, setting,
device installed? AR-DU3 and operation check
AR-DU4 Main unit/AR-EF5/AR-EF6/AR-PK2

No
2) Paper guide position adjustment/off center adjustment
AR-D29
Install finishing device.
AR-DU3/DU4
Finishing device Yes AR-MS1/AR-DC1
installed? AR-FN6/AR-DC1
AR-FN7/AR-DC1
AR-PN1A / B / C / D
End
No

Install scanner/document feeder.

Scanner/document Yes
AR-EF5/AR-RK2 When installing a paper feeding device, an optional power supply unit or a duplex/bypass device, be
feeder installed? AR-EF6/AR-RK2 sure to reattach the rear cabinet, the AC inlet cover, and the harness cover of the main unit at the end
of installation as needed.
Only off center adjustment is needed for AR-DU3.
No

∗ For installation of an option unit, refer to the Service Manual of the option unit.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 1

2. Note for installation place 4. Machine installing procedure
Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the Note: In advance to installation of the machine, the paper feed
following during initial installation and whenever the machine is option units (AR-D29) should have been installed.
moved.
1) The machine should be installed near an accessible power A. Removal of the machine
outlet for easy connection. 1) Remove the cushioning materials from the right and left of the
2) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that front side.
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also
make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
• For the power supply requirements, see the name plate of
the main unit.
3) Do not install your machine in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight
• poorly ventilated
• subject to extreme temperature or humidity
changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.
4) Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for
servicing and proper ventilation.

11-13/16" (30cm)
2) Remove the locking tape from the right and left sidesof the
tray.
31-1/2" 23-5/8" Then, Remove the top of the carton and lower the plastic bag
(80cm) (60cm) covering the machine while the machine is still on the carton
base.
3) Remove the packing tape from the paper tray, pull out the
paper tray until it stops and remove it by tilting it upward.

23-5/8" (60cm)

3. Unpacking procedure
1) Release the joint, and remove the packing case.
2) Remove the top pad, and open the electrostatic polyethylene
bag.

4) One person must lift by the empty front tray pocket with the
right hand and steady the machine with the left hand placed at
the upper left of the machine.
The other person must lift with the right hand by using the lift-
ing recess in the rear of the machine and also steady the
machine with the left hand as shown in the illustration.

Front side

Rear side

Check the following items are included in the package.

Operating Manual (Common Copier/Key Operation)
CD-ROM (Printer) Note: The center of gravity of the machine lies in the left side
Maintenance card/Maintenance case when viewed from the Back of machine. When lifting the
machine, be careful not to drop it.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 2

B. Installation of paper feed option (AR-D29) to 3) Put the main unit of the printer on the stand/paper drawer.
the machine <1> Pull out the paper tray of the main unit until it stops and then
Note: In advance to installation of the machine, the paper feed remove it by lifting both ends of the tray.
option unit (AR-D29) should have been installed.
<Before installation>
• Start installation after checking that the DATA and COMMUNI-
CATION indicators on the operation panel are neither lit nor
blinking.

<2> Hold the main unit of the printer at the positions shown in the
illustration and put the main unit on the stand/paper drawer
so that the front side and the left side of the main unit are
aligned to those of the stand/paper drawer.
Front side

Rear side

<Parts included>

Front mounting Rear mounting Screws (M4x6):

plates: 2 pcs. plates: 2 pcs. 4 pcs. Caution: For installation of the main unit, it must be held by two
persons and installed without haste.
4) Connect the main unit to the stand/paper drawer.
<1> Attach the rear mounting plates using a supplied screw for
Left adjuster: 1 pc. each.
Rear mounting plate
Left paper guides: 2 pcs. Right paper guides: 2 pcs.

1) Turn off the main switch of the main unit of the printer.
Turn the main switch located on the front side of the printer to
the "OFF" position.
Then remove the power plug from the outlet.
Screw Screw
Rear mounting plate

Rear
mounting plate
"OFF"

Desk frame

2) Attach the adjusters and adjust them. Caution: Insert the rear mounting plates under the desk frame.
<1> Insert the left adjusters to the stand/paper drawer. <2> Pull out the upper paper tray of the stand/paper drawer until it
<2> Turn the each adjusters to lower them until they touch the stops and attach the front mounting plates using a supplied
floor. screw for each.
Then, remove the lock of the paper tray and close the tray.

Front
mounting plate

2
Screw
2
2

1 2

∗ Be sure to attach the left adjuster to prevent overturning.

Front mounting
Caution: The lower tray cannot be pulled out unless the adjuster plate Screw

is lowered to the specified position.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 3

<3> Reattach the paper tray of the main unit. C. Setting related to process
1) Open the left door and the front door.

5) Connect the power supply I/F harness to the PCU PWB of the
main unit of the printer.
<1> Remove the screw that fixes the harness cover of the main
unit of the printer and slide the harness cover up to remove it.
Process the harness cover as shown in the illustration.

Screw 2) Remove the developer cartridge from the machine.

Cut out.

Harness cover

<2> Connect the power supply I/F harness connector (red, 22pin)
to CN11 (red connector) of the PCU PWB of the main unit of 3) Remove the top cover of the developer cartridge.
the printer.

Connector

CN11

<3> Reattach the power supply I/F harness cover to its original
position and fix it with the removed screw.
At this time, ensure that the power supply I/F harness are
arranged as shown in the illustration.
• Fix the harness securely to the wire saddle. 4) While rotating the MG roller, supply developer into the devel-
oper cartridge evenly.
Screw Note: Before opening the developer seal, shake it 4 or 5 times.
Power supply
I/F harness

Harness cover

Wire saddle
Wire saddle

6) Attach the paper guides to the lower tray (large capacity tray)
and set the size.
Refer to "Setting and adjustment" described later. 5) Attach the top cover to the developer cartridge and install the
cartridge to the machine.
∗ If another peripheral device must be installed, carry out the fol-
lowing step at the end of the installation work.
7) Adjust the position of the paper guides of the upper paper tray
of the stand/paper drawer.
Refer to "Setting and adjustment" described later.
8) Carry out the off center adjustment.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 4

D. Toner cartridge settings E. Setting related to fusing
1) Remove a new toner cartridge from the package and shake it 1) Put down the right and the left levers of the fusing unit in the
horizontally five or six times. arrow direction.

2) Insert a new toner cartridge.

Push the cartridge in until it locks securely into place.

F. Paper setting
3) Gently remove the sealing tape from the cartridge. 1) Pull out the first stage paper feed tray.
Slowly pull out the tray until it stops.

4) Return the cartridge lock lever.

2) While pressing the paper holding plate, remove the fixing pin.

3) Put paper in the tray, and close the paper feed tray.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 5

5. Unpacking and installation of the rack 6. Unpacking and installation of the
(AR-RK2) AR-EF5/EF6

Be sure to remove it,

or it may cause a trouble.

1) Attach the rack to the desk unit. Parts included in the scanner unit
★ Be sure to identify the left and the right racks. Refer to the fig-
ure below.
Insert the rack boss into the rack mounting hole (made by
Operation manual Tray Scanner
removing the mold of the desk unit), and fix each rack with two
(1 pc.) (1 pc.) rack sheel
fixing screws (M5 x 70). (1 pc.)

M4 step M4 step Fixing screw

screws (long) screws (short) (M4x8)
(1 pc.) (2 pcs.) (1 pc.)

Cam
Rack sheet 1) Turn off the main switch of the main unit of the printer.
Turn the main switch located on the front side of the printer to
Rack with the Rack with the
rack sheet cam attached the "OFF" position.
attached to it to it Then remove the power plug from the outlet.

Rack mounting hole "OFF"

Boss

Fixing screws Rack mounting hole

2) Put the scanner unit on the rack.
(M5x70)
Boss Adjuster cover Hold the handle of the scanner unit, and put the scanner unit
on the rack from the front side of the rack as shown in the fig-
2) Attach the rack bottom plate. ure. Slowly slide the scanner unit until it is brought into contact
★ Before installing the rack bottom plate, remove the adjuster with the rack and stopped.
cover of the desk.
Attach the rack bottom plate with the fixing screws.

Rack
Scanner unit

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 6

3) Fix the scanner unit. 7. Automatic developer adjustment
Fix the scanner unit which is on the rack with the fixing screw
(M4 x 8), and fix it to the rack with the M4 step screw (long, 1) Attach the cabinets which were removed.
short x 2). 2) Close the left door.
At that time, keep the front door open.
Note: The automatic developer adjustment must be performed by
M4 stepped
screw entering the simulation mode with the front door open. If the
Reference
power is turned on with the front door closed, warm-up is
Reference performed to supply toner to the developing unit. As a
result, the reference toner density cannot be obtained.
3) Insert the power plug into the power outlet.
Screw
(M4x8 4) Switch to the copy mode, and press [P] [*] [C] [*]
[2] [5] [START] [2] [START], and the machine will
M4 stepped enter the simulation mode “AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT”.
screw 5) Close the front door.
(LCD Display)

SIMULATION 25-2
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START.

128
4) Remove the fixing tape for scanner packing and remove the
fixing screw.
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
Remove the pack fixing tape and the fixing screws which are Or stop after 2min.
fixing the scanner unit, and remove the packing note.
SIMULATION 25-2
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. EXECUTING...

128
Scanner unit
fixing screw 6) Press the [START] key, and the automatic developer adjust-
ment will be performed.
During execution of the automatic developer adjustment, the
data (LED) blinks and the LCD indicates the toner sensor
value.
7) After about 2 min, the adjustment value is stored in the
machine. Check that the mode was normally completed.
5) Connect the cable. Normal end: The data LED goes off.
Connect the scanner unit connector with the printer connector, Abnormal end: The error LED lights up.
and fix the connectors with two screws attached to the con- Remove the cause of the error, and execute the automatic
nector. developer adjustment again.
8) Turn off/on the power, and the machine returns to the normal
mode and enters the warm-up mode.

8. Print test
1) After completion of warm-up (normal mode), select [CUSTOM
SETTINGS] → [Data list up] to display the menu.
2) Print [ALL SETUP LIST] to check and confirm the print quality.
3) Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key again to return to the
normal menu.

Scanner cable Screws

Note: When inserting the connector, be careful not to break the

pins, and connect according to the guide.
6) Attach the paper exit tray.
Attach the paper exit tray to the scanner unit as shown in the
figure.

Paper exit tray

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 7

9. Distortion adjustment 10. Expansion memory (commercially
Note: This adjustment must be performed after installing the available one)
machine and its peripheral devices. Note: Before performing this installation work, check that the data
It is basically no need to perform the adjustment because it has lamp on the operation panel is neither lighting nor blinking.
been made when shipping. If there should be a distortion as
shown in the figure below, perform the adjustment according to (1) Installation
the following procedures. 1) Turn off the power of the machine and disconnect the power
1) Use a level gauge to check to confirm that the scanner unit is plug from the power outlet.
installed horizontally. 2) Remove all the cables (such as printer cables) from the control
Make a copy, and if any distortion is found as shown in Fig 1 PWB.
or Fig. 2, loosen the scanner fixing screw (M4 x 8) and the
cam A fixing screw (M3 x 12) to make an adjustment.

Fixing screw
(M4x8)

3) Remove the control PWB.

[Fig. 1]
First copy image

Image
1)
Paper
Difference 2)
• Case of Fig. 1 1)
Shift the cam A in the direction of A by the difference of the image.
For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm. 4) Install each option.
After shifting the cam, tighten the cam A fixing screw (M3 x 12).
<Printer model>
Make a copy again and check to confirm that there is no distortion
on the image. Expansion memory

[Fig. 2]
First copy image

Image

Paper
Difference
• Case of Fig. 2
Shift the cam A in the direction of B by the difference of the image.
For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm.
After shifting the cam, tighten the cam A fixing screw (M3 x 12).
Make a copy again and check to confirm that there is no distortion Note: To prevent breakage by static electricity, take the following
on the image. measures.
After adjustment, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) and the scan- a. Use an earth band for installing procedures.
ner fixing screw (M4 x 8). b. Keep the memory in the protection bag, and remove it from
Attach the decoration seal to the screw hole. the bag only just before installation.
5) Install the control PWB to the machine.
6) Attach the cables which were removed before installation of
the memory.
7) Insert the power plug into the power outlet, and turn on the
power.

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 8

(2) Print test 2) Remove the rear cabinet of the stand/paper drawer and
1) After completion of warm-up (normal mode), select [CUSTOM remove the AC inlet cover.
SETTINGS] → [Data list up] to display the menu. <1> Remove the four screws that fix the rear cabinet and then
2) Print [ALL SETUP LIST] to check and confirm the print quality. remove the rear cabinet.
3) Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key again to return to the
normal menu.
(3) Connecting the machine to a computer
1) Connect the machine to the computer
a. When connecting to a parallel port
The parallel interface of this machine conforms to IEEE - STD -
1284 - 1983. Rear cabinet
Use a commercially available shielded type parallel interface cable
conforming to the specifications of both the machine and the com-
puter.
The connector on this machine is a 36-pin Amphenol female con-
nector.
<2> Remove the screw that fixes the AC inlet cover and then
18 1 remove the AC inlet cover.
<3> Process the AC inlet cover as shown in the illustration.

36 19

For the specifications of the connector on the computer, see the

operation manual of the computer. Cut out.

Parallel interface connector

AC inlet cover

3) Attach the power supply unit (AR-DC1).

Attach the power supply unit to the hanging portions and
secure it using the three supplied screws.
Hanging portion

Hanging portion

11. AR-DC1
∗ Required when installing the paper exit options (AR-FN7/AR-
FN6/ AR-MS1).
Screws
<Before installation> Power supply unit
Screws
• Start installation after checking that the DATA indicator on the
operation panel is not lit or blinking.
4) Connect the optional power supply harness to the PCU PWB
of the printer.
Parts included
<1> Remove the screw that secures the harness cover of the
printer and slide the harness cover upward to remove it.
I.T.E.
ACCESSORY 9K11 Work the harness cover as shown in the illustration.
Screws (3)
Screw

1) Turn the main switch of the printer to "OFF".

Turn the main switch located on the front of the printer to
"OFF". Then, remove the power plug of the printer from the
outlet.

Cut-out

"OFF" Harness cover

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 9

<2> Connect the connector of the optional power supply harness 6) Connect the AC cord of the power supply unit to the main unit
to CN11 of the PCU PWB of the printer. of the printer.
Connect the AC cord of the power supply unit to the outlet
Connector
connector of the main unit of the printer at the location shown
in the illustration.
CN11

<3> Reattach the harness cover to its original position and secure AC cord
it with the removed screw.
At this time, check that wiring of the optional power supply 7) Turn the power switch of the printer to "ON".
harness has been handled as shown in the illustration. Insert the power plug of the printer to the outlet.
Screw Then, turn the main switch located on the front of the printer to
"ON".
Optional power
supply harness

"ON"

Harness cover
Harness cover

5) Attach the rear cabinet of the stand/paper drawer.

<1> Pass the cord of the power supply unit through the hole of the
rear cabinet and attach the rear cabinet to the stand/paper
drawer.

Rear cabinet

<2> Attach the AC inlet cover to the rear cabinet of the stand/
paper drawer and fix it with the removed screw.

AC inlet cover

Screw

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6 - 10

[7] MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
• Self print of set values • When assembling, check that the flat cable and the harness
Use of SIM 22-6 allows to print the set values and the jam his- connectors are securely connected.
tory of the machine. • When connecting the flat cable, be careful not to break the pins.
These values must be printed before execution of maintenance When installing the PWB unit and the memory module, use an
or disassembly procedures. earth band to prevent against breakage by static electricity.

[Maintenance System Table]

1. Engine section
Maintenance cycle : 100K
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Drum peripheral Drum ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Installed when shipping
Cleaner blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Toner reception seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Side molt ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Transfer roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Discharge plate ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
TR bearing (F/R) ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲
After-transfer star ring ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲
TR gear ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Screen grid (❍)✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Drum separation pawl unit ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Charger case (M/C) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Charging plate (saw teeth) (❍)✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Developing section Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Supplied when installing
DV blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
DSD collar ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
DV side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
DV side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Toner cartridge Attached when installing./
EX Japan: 814g,
user replacement for every 27K.
Fusing section Upper heat roller ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Lower heat roller ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Upper separation pawl ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Lower separation pawl ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean and remove paper dust.
Upper heat roller gear ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Cleaning roller ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
CL roller collar ▲ ▲
Filters Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Paper feed section Paper feed roller ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
Transport section PS follower roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper exit reverse section Transport rollers ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper dust remover ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕
Image quality ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

Note 1: Replacement reference: Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference.
Paper feed roller/Torque limiter section: 80K or 2 years

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 1

2. Scanner / DSPF
Maintenance cycle : 100K
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Optical section Mirror/Lens/Reflector/Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Table glass/OC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
White reference sheet ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/Drive wire/Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DSPF Paper feed section Take-up roller ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Note 2
Separation pad ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Note 2
Paper feed roller ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Note 2
Transport section PS roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Exposure section ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(Dust-proof glass)
Paper exit section Paper feed roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
DPSF
Other Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ For cleaning, blow air.
Note 2: Replacement reference: Same as above or 2 years.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 2

3. Peripheral devices
Maintenance cycle : 100K
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Option name Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
ADU Paper feed Paper feed rollers (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 3
+ Manual feed separation section Separation pad (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 3
Torque limiter (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 3
Transport section Transport rollers ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Desk Paper feed Paper feed rollers (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 3
Multi purpose separation section Torque limiter (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 3
Transport section Transport roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Finisher Transport section Transport rollers ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
De-curler roller (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Staple unit Replace unit at 100K
staple.
Staple cartridge User replacement for every
3000pcs.
Mail-bin Transport section Transport roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
stacker Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Saddle finisher Transport section Transport roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕
Other Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Staple unit Replace unit at 100K
staple (including the staple
unit and the holder
section).
Staple cartridge User replacement for every
5000 pcs.

Note 3: Replacement reference: Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference.
Paper feed roller/Torque limiter section: 80K or 2 years

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 3

[DETAILS OF EACH SECTION]

1. Process section
A. General
Toner is attached to electrostatic latent images formed by the
laser beams which were radiated to the OPC drum charged by the
main charger, forming toner images.
The toner images formed on the OPC drum are transferred to
paper by the transfer roller.

No. Name Operation

1 Toner cartridge Supplies toner to the developing unit, and collects waste toner.
2 Developer unit Mixes toner and carrier, and attaches toner to electrostatic latent images to form visible
images.
3 Transfer roller Transfers toner images to the OPC drum.
4 Process drum unit Forms images (electrostatic latent images, visible images) on the OPC drum.
5 Charger case Charges the OPC drum surface negatively and evenly.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 4

Process Section Composition and Applying Voltage

MAX 8KV
constant current

13 3
Separation electrode 12
1
-1.8KV 4
-650V
11 10
2
30 9
6

-800V
5

25µA (42ppm)
15
19µA (31ppm)
MAX 5KV

16 7
Paper dust cleaner Toner density sensor
8
200M 200M
14 14
Process thermistor
-500V

Composition of process section

1 Laser beam Forms latent electrostatic images on the photoconductor drum. (Writing resolution: 600dpi)
The output from LSU can be set with the simulation. (Basically the initial setup is used.)
2 Photoconductor drum Latent electrostatic images are formed on the photoconductor drum. It attracts toner to the
electrostatic images and transfers them to paper. An OPC drum of 30mm diameter is employed.
3 Main charger Applies a high voltage to charge the OPC drum. Of saw teeth type.
4 Screen grid Charges electric charges generated from the main charger to the OPC drum evenly. -650V
5 MG roller Forms a magnetic brush with developer and puts toner on the OPC drum. -500V
6 Developing doctor Keeps the thickness of developer and toner (magnetic brush) on the MG roller at a constant level.
7 Toner quantity sensor Detects the quantity of toner in the developing unit. A magnetic sensor of transmission type is
employed.
8 Process thermistor The temperature inside the machine are detected, and process control is performed according to the
detected temperature.
9 CRUM-IC Toner cartridge conditions (destination, toner motor rotating time, empty, near empty, etc.)
10 Transfer roller Applies a voltage to transfer toner on the OPC drum to paper.
11 Separation electrode The electrode to separate paper from the OPC drum by the potential difference.
12 Drum separation pawl The pawl to separate paper from the OPC drum mechanically.
13 Cleaning blade Made of silicon rubber. Removes remaining toner from the OPC drum. Always in contact with the
drum.
14 High voltage resistor PWB Prevents a high voltage from leaking through the paper guide at a high humidity. 200MΩ each.
15 Resist roller Bends paper to adjust the paper feed timing to the process section.
16 Paper dust cleaner Removes paper dust from the resist roller to reduce mixing of paper dusts into the process section.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 5

[OPC drum section]
A. General
In this section, laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface
which was negatively charged, making electrostatic latent images.

B. Major parts and signal functions

8FE-BT-VK-N
DSW-L 8
DSW-L 7
GND1 6
GND1 5
DM DM\ 4
DM-T 3
DMCLK\ 2
(NC) 1
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
2 PSPS\ 1
PSPS 1 +24V1 2

4
5

6
8
3

CN5
B8B-PH-K-S
CN15 GND2 1
1-84432-4 9604S-14F +5VCRU 2
SRA-21T-4L #187(RD) DSW-F 14 1 DSW-F CRUCLK 3
RD GND2 13 2 GND2 CRUSDA
MHV 4
GND2 12 3 GND2 PSPS\ 5
SRA-21T-3 #187(WH) DHVREM 11 4 DHVREM
WH +24V1 6
THV MHVREM\ 10 5 MHVREM\ (NC) 7
SRA-21T-4L THV+PWM\ 9 6 THV+PWM\ +24V1 8
#187(YL)
WH DHVPWM\ 8 7 DHVPWM\
GB HV GBPWM\ 7 8 GBPWM\ PCU PWB CN6
SRA-21T-3 9604S-08C
#187(BL) THV-PWM 6 9 THV-PWM\
RD DSW-F 1
DHV DVREM 5 10 DVREM\
DSW-F 2
DVPWM\ 4 11 DVPWM\
#187(GR) GND2 3
THVREM\ 3 12 THVREM\
BIAS DV GND2 4
MHV-T 2 13 MHV-T
DM\ 5
THin 1 14 THin
DM-T 6
DMCLK\ 7
(NC) 8

Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
DM DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section. DC brushless motor
PSPS PSPS Drum separation pawl solenoid Drives the OPC drum separation pawl Solenoid

No. Name Operation

1 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images by laser beams.
2 Drum separation pawl Separates paper from the drum.
3 Sub blade (Cleaning seal) Prevents against toner leakage from the cleaner section.
4 Screen grid Helps to charge the OPC drum evenly with electric charges provided from the main charger.
5 Saw-teeth charger Applies a high voltage to charge the OPC drum.
6 Separation pawl oscillation shaft Moves in the front and rear frame direction to install the separation pawl.
7 Cleaning blade Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum.
8 Waste toner transport pipe Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner box in the toner cartridge front section.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 6

C. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. cleaning blade.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.

Main corona unit Drum

High voltage unit

Screen grid

CTL
CGL

Aluminum
layer OPC drum

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- Residual toner removed from the OPC drum surface is trans-
age applied to the screen grid. ported to the recycle toner collection section in the toner car-
2) Laser are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser unit tridge by the waste toner transport screw.
to form latent electrostatic images. 4) All the surface of the OPC drum is discharged by laser beams.

Laser Laser

CLT CLT
CGL CGL
layer layer
Aluminum Aluminum
OPC drum
OPC drum After completion of the job, laser beams are radiated onto al
CTL the surface of the OPC drum.
CGL When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC
layer drum, positive and negative charges are generated.
Aluminum Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alu-
When laser are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative and
minum layer of the OPC drum.
positive charges are generated.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the
of the OPC drum.
OPC drum aluminum layer.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser are not radi-
ated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 7

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Drum peripheral 1 Drum ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Installed when shipping
2 DSD collar ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
3 Cleaner blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Side molt F ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
6 Side molt R ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Drum separation pawl unit ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Charger case (M/C) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
– Screen grid (❍)✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
– Charging plate (saw teeth) (❍)✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

2
8
1

3
7
5
2

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a. Drum cartridge

No. Unit Parts 1) Release the lock, and pull out the left door.
a Drum 1 Charger case (M/C) ❍ 2) Open the front door.
cartridge Charging plate (saw teeth) (❍)✕
Screen grid (❍)✕
2 Drum ▲
3 DSD collar ❍
4 Drum separation pawl unit ▲
5 Toner reception seal ▲
6 Cleaner blade ▲
7 Side molt F ▲
8 Side molt R ▲
b 1 Separation solenoid

b-1
a-8 3) Put down the DV guide handle. Loosen the screw, and remove
a-5 a the drum cartridge.
a-3
a-1
a-2

a-6
a-4
a-7
a-3

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 8

a-1. Charger case (M/C)/charging plate (saw teeth)/ a-2. Drum
screen grid
a-3. DSD collar
1) Remove the drum cartridge.
1) Remove the drum cartridge.
2) Check to confirm that the cleaning unit is inserted fully to the
2) Loosen the screw, and remove the drum boss mounting plate.
bottom.
3) Remove the drum, and remove the DSD collar.
3) Remove the pawl, and remove the charger case.
∗ When removing the drum, place the drum cartridge as shown in
the figure and remove the drum.

4) Remove the charging plate.

5) Remove the screen gird.

∗ When replacing the OPC drum, clear the following counters.

• Drum rotating time
• Drum counter
∗ When installing a new drum, apply starting powder.
∗ When installing, install the DSD collar R to the drum frame, then
install the drum and the DSD collar F. When installing the DSD
collar, engage the DSD collar boss with the drum frame hole.

6) Loosen the screw, and remove the main charger.

a-4. Drum separation pawl unit

1) Remove the drum cartridge.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the drum separation pawl
unit.
∗ When handling the separation pawl, be careful not to break or
scratch the tip of the separation pawl and keep it away from dirt.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 9

After installing the drum separation pawl unit, push the separation a-7. Side molt F
lever and check to confirm that the separation pawl operates nor-
a-8. Side molt R
mally.
1) Remove the drum cartridge.
2) Remove the drum and the DSD collar.
3) Remove the toner reception seal.
4) Remove the cleaner blade.
5) Remove the side molt F and R.

a-5. Toner reception seal

1) Remove the drum cartridge.
2) Remove the drum and the DSD collar.
3) Remove the drum separation pawl unit.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the toner reception seal.

(a) ∗ When attaching the side molts F/R, attach them to the attach-
ment reference as shown.
∗ When installing the toner reception seal, tighten the screw (a)
∗ After attaching the side molt F/R, push the both ends of the
on the positioning side for the first time. Check to confirm that
blade with your fingers to check to confirm that the red moquette
the process earth plate and the toner reception seal are conduc-
moves smoothly.
tive. (10Ω or less)
a-6. Cleaner blade 0.5mm 0.5mm
1) Remove the drum cartridge.
Reference Reference
2) Remove the drum and the DSD collar.
0mm 0mm
3) Pull it out until the cleaning unit stops.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the cleaner blade.
∗ When removing the drum blade, place the drum as shown in the Moquette R Moquette F
figure and remove the drum blade to prevent toner from dispers-
ing.
∗ Do not damage the cleaner blade. Do not touch the lead edge. 0.3mm 0mm 0.3mm 0mm
Reference Reference

∗ When installing the cleaner blade, pull the cleaner shaft fully
toward you.
∗ After installing the cleaner blade, insert the cleaner shaft fully to
the bottom.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 10

b-1. Separation solenoid 3) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the sepa-
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet. ration solenoid unit.

4) Remove the E-ring and the screw, and remove the separation
solenoid.

2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU
PWB unit.

[Transfer section]
A. General
In this section, toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to
paper.

B. Major parts and signal functions

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 11

 8FE-BT-VK-N
DSW-L 8
DM DSW-L 7
GND1 6
GND1 5
DM\ 4
DM-T 3
DMCLK\ 2
(NC) 1

4 5
3
6
2
4
1 3

CN15
1-84432-4 9604S-14F
SRA-21T-4L #187(RD) DSW-F 14 1 DSW-F
RD GND2 13 2 GND2 CN6
MHV
GND2 12 3 GND2 9604S-08C
SRA-21T-3 #187(WH) DHVREM 11 4 DHVREM DSW-F 1
WH
THV MHVREM\ 10 5 MHVREM\ DSW-F 2
SRA-21T-4L THV+PWM\ 9 6 THV+PWM\ GND2 3
#187(YL)
WH DHVPWM\ 8 7 DHVPWM\ GND2 4
GB HV GBPWM\ 7 8 GBPWM\ PCU PWB DM\ 5
SRA-21T-3 #187(BL) THV-PWM 6 9 THV-PWM\ DM-T 6
RD
DHV DVREM 5 10 DVREM\ DMCLK\ 7
DVPWM\ 4 11 DVPWM\ (NC) 8
#187(GR)
THVREM\ 3 12 THVREM\
BIAS DV
MHV-T 2 13 MHV-T
THin 1 14 THin

Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
DM DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section. DC brushless motor
THV THV Transfer high voltage High voltage for transfer
DHV DHV High separation voltage High voltage for separation of paper

No. Name Function

1 Transfer roller Transfers toner images from the OPC drum surface to paper.
2 Discharge plate (Separation electrode) Separates paper from the drum.
3 TR bearing (F/R) Transfer roller bearing
4 Transfer roller collar Transfer roller collar
5 After-transfer star ring Guides paper after transfer.
6 TR gear Transfer roller drive gear

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 12

C. Operational descriptions 2) Transfer roller cleaning
1) Toner image transfer After completion of the job, the applied voltage to the transfer
Toner images formed on the drum by the developing roller are roller is switched to negative in order to attract toner from the
transfer roller to the OPC drum, cleaning the drum with the
transferred to paper by the transfer roller.
cleaning blade.
Toner on the drum is negatively charged by stirring in the
developing unit. By applying a positive voltage to the transfer
roller, the transfer roller and paper on the transfer roller are
positively charged to transfer negatively charged toner images
to paper.
Separation electrode Separation electrode

-1.8KV -1.8KV

-800V -800V

25 A 42ppm 25 A 42ppm
19 A 31ppm 19 A 31ppm
MAX 5KV MAX 5KV
200M 200M

Separation operation The transfer cleaning voltage and the developing positive bias are
Since paper with toner images transferred on it is positively applied to the OPC drum at the timing shown below so that
charged, a high negative voltage is applied to the separation elec- remaining toner on the transfer roller is attracted again to the OPC
trode to separate the paper from the drum. drum, performing cleaning.
1) When the power is turned on:
Separation electrode
CLEANING READY CONDITION
-1.8KV
WARMING UP

∗ However, the cleaning voltage is not applied during warm up

after completion of SIM.
2) After completion of a print job
1sec
-800V
CLEANING

PRINTING Job
25 A 42ppm
19 A 31ppm
MAX 5KV 3) After printing 100 sheets (during 1 job)
200M 1sec 1sec
PRINTING (100 Sheets) CLEANING PRINTING (100 Sheets) CLEANING

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 13

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Transfer 1 Transfer roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Discharge plate ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 TR bearing (F/R) ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲
4 Transfer roller collar
5 After-transfer star ring ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲
6 TR gear ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲

4
5
3

2
4
3

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement 2) Remove the transfer lock pawl, and pull out the transfer roller
unit.
No. Unit Parts
a Transfer roller unit 1 After-transfer star ring ✕
2 Discharge plate ✕
3 Transfer roller ✕
4 Transfer roller collar
5 TR bearing (F/R) ✕
6 TR gear ✕

a-4
a-1
a-5
a-6

a-3

a a-2
a-4
a-1. After-transfer star ring
a-5
1) Remove the transfer roller unit.
2) Remove the transfer rear star ring.
a. Transfer roller unit
1) Pull out the left door.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 14

a-2. Discharge plate
1) Remove the transfer roller unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the discharge plate holder
and the discharge plate.

a-3. Transfer roller

a-4. Transfer roller collar
a-5. TR bearing (F/R)
a-6. TR gear
1) Remove the transfer roller unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the discharge plate holder
and the discharge plate.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 15

[Developing section]
A. General
In this section, toner is attached to electrostatic latent images
formed by laser beams on the OPC drum, making visible images.

B. Major parts and signal functions

CN6
9604S-08C
DM TM 1 DSW-F
2 DSW-F
3 GND2
4 GND2
5 DM\
6 DM-T
7 DMCLK\
8 (NC)

CN7
173981-2
INITIAL PWB BK
1 TMA
BK
2 TMB

1 CN5
3 TCS BR
B8B-PH-K-S
1 GND2
GY
2 +5VCRU
BL
3 CRUCLK
BR
4 CRUSDA
5 PSPS\
6 +24V1
1 2 3 3 7 (NC)
8 +24V1
CN8
QR/P8-12S-C(01) B11B-PH-K-S
BR BR
1 DVCH1 1 1 DVCH1
BR
2 DVCH2 2 2 DVCH2
BR
3 DVCH3 3 3 DVCH3
BR BR
53047-0410 4 PTH 4 4 PTH
GY GY
(NC) 1 5 GND2 5 5 GND2
GY
+24V1 2 6 GND2 6 6 GND2
BR BR
TCS 3 7 TCS 7 7 TCS
GY GY
GND2 4 8 GND2 8 8 GND2
RD RD
INITIAL PWB 9 +24V1 9
BL
9 +24V1
TCS BL
S4B-PH-K-S 10 +5V1 10 10 +5V1
BR BR
+5V1 1 11 DVCRU 11 11 DVCRU\
RD RD
DVCRU 2 12 DVBias 12
PTH 3
#187
GND2 4 Bias

Bias PCU PWB

Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
HUS-DV HUS-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section peripheral humidity Humidity sensor Analog detector
detection
INITIAL PWB – Developing temperature Temperature detection around the Thermistor
thermistor developing unit
TCS TCS Toner density sensor Toner density detection Magnetic sensor Analog detector
DM DM Drum motor Drives the drum/developing section. DC brushless motor
TM TM Toner motor Drives the toner hopper. Synchronous motor
Bias Bias Developing bias High voltage for developing bias

No. Name Operation

1 Developing roller Forms magnetic brush with developer and put toner on the OPC drum.
2 DV doctor Keeps the height of the magnetic brush on the developing roller at a fixed level.
3 Mixing roller (MX roller) Mixes developer (carrier and toner) and charges toner negatively.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 16

C. Operational descriptions
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum by the LED
(writing) unit (LED image light) are converted into visible images
by toner.

layer
Aluminum CGL
CTL
Drum

-500V

Toner in the developing unit is stirred by the mixing roller.

When toner is stirred, it is negatively charged by mechanical fric-
tion.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the develop-
ing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted and attached to the area on
the OPC drum where negative voltage is reduced by exposure.
On the other hand, the negative voltage at an area where expo-
sure is not made is higher than the developing bias voltage, and
toner is not attached.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 17

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Developing section 1 Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Supplied when installing
2 DV blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 DV side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 DV side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Toner cartridge Attached when installing./
EX Japan: 814g,
user replacement for every 27K.

4 5

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a. DV cartridge

1) Release the lock, and pull out the left door.
No. Unit Parts
a DV cartridge 1 Developer ▲ 2) Open the front door.
2 DV blade ▲
3 DV side seal F ▲
4 DV side seal R ▲
5 Toner density sensor
6 Process thermistor
b 1 Toner cartridge
2 Toner motor

b-2
a-6
a-4
a-1 3) Put down the DV guide handle, release the lock, and remove
the DV cartridge.

a-5
b-1
a
a-3
a-2

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 18

a-1. Developer ∗ When attaching the DV blade, attach to the attachment refer-
1) Remove the DV cartridge. ence shown in the figure below.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.

0mm

Reference
(Step)
0.5mm
0mm 0.5mm
Reference

a-3. DV side seal F

a-4. DV side seal R
1) Remove the DV cartridge.
2) Remove the DV side seal F and the DV side seal R.

3) Remove old developer.

∗ Use a metal scale or a minus screwdriver for easy operation.

4) Supply new developer.

∗ When attaching the SV side seals F and R, attach them to the

attachment reference shown in the figure below.

0.5mm 0.5mm

Reference Reference

0mm 0mm
0mm 0.5mm 0.5mm 0mm
Reference Reference

a-2. DV blade
1) Remove the DV cartridge.
2) Remove the DV blade.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 19

a-5. Toner density sensor a-8. Toner motor
a-6. Process thermistor 1) Remove the toner cartridge.
1) Remove the DV cartridge. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the bottom cover.

3) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the toner
density sensor. 2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU
PWB unit.

4) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the pro-
cess thermistor.

3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the toner
motor unit.

a-7. Toner cartridge

1) Open the left door and the front door.
2) Release the lock and remove the toner cartridge. 4) Remove the coupling and the spring from the toner motor.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 20

2. Fusing section A. General
This section fused toner (which is transferred onto paper in the
transfer section) onto paper by heat and pressure of the fusing
roller.

Paper
Copy Fusing
exit

Fusing roller Fusing roller Cleaning

(Heating) (Pressing) roller

Paper exit Main Heater lamps

roller motor (2 pcs.)

Power/
Reactor PWB

B. Major parts and signal functions

09R-RWZV-K2GGP4+CZHR-05V-S

B-4 SMP-04V-NC+SMR-04V-N
B-1
B-3 BR BR
B-2 1 RTH1 1
B-2 GY GY

B-1
B-3
BR
2 GND2 2
BR
PCU
B-4 3 RTH2 3
GY
4 GND2 4
GY PWB
CN14
VLP-03V+VLR-03V CN2
WH WH B14B-PHDSS-B
BR
1 1
WH
1 HL1 1
BR AC/DC B7B-PH-K-S
RD
1 FW
2 2 2 HL2 2
BK BK +24VPR 1 2 +24VPR
3 3 3 L2 3 BR
4 4
GY PWB HLPR2\ 2
BR
3 GND2
HLPR 3 4 HLPR\
BR
SRA-51T-4 HLCNT1 4 5 HLCNT1
BR
HLCNT2 5 6 HLCNT2
BR
MSW MON 6 7 Rth1
CN2 CN1 GY
B03P-VL B03P-VL DC CNT 7 8 GND2
WH BR
HL1 HL1 1 1 HL1 9 Rth2
WH GY
HL2 2 2 HL2 10 GND2
HL2 BK
L 3 3 L2 11 +24V1
L CN5
CN1 12 MSWPR
B12P-HL-A BR
B2P4-VH #187 RD 13 MSW MON
WH +24V1 1
L2 1 L2 RD 14 (NC)
(NC) 2 +24V2 2
RD
(NC) 3 #187 +24V3 3
WH BL
L2R 4 L2R +5V1 4
BL
+5V1 5 CN17
REACTOR PWB OR
+3.3V 6 B5P-VH
OR RD
+3.3V 7 1 +24V1
GY RD
GND2 8 2 +24V2
* 200V only GY RD
GND2 9 3 +24V3
GY GY
GND2 10 4 GND2
GY GY
GND2 11 5 GND2
BR
FW 12 CN18
B6P-VH
BL
1 +5V1
BL
2 +5V1
OR
3 +3.3V
MM OR
7 GY
4
5
+3.3V
GND2
GY
6 GND2

Rth1 8 CN9
9604S-08F
1 DSW-F
2 DSW-F
3 GND2
Rth2 4 GND2

HLTS HL2 5 +5V1

6 5 2 7,8 6 GND2
7 MM\
8FE-ST-VK-N
8 MM-T
DSW-L 8 HL1 9 MMCLK\
DSW-L 7 10 (NC)
GND1 6
GND1 5
+5V1 4
GND2 3
MM\ 2
MM-T 1

9 4 3 1

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 21

 Signal Active
Code Name Type Function/Operation Note
name condition
RTH1 RTH1 Fusing temperature Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller Analog input
sensor (1) (heating). (Center section)
RTH2 RTH2 Fusing temperature Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller Analog input
sensor (2) (heating). (Edge section)
HL1 HL1 Heater lamp (1) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
HL2 HL2 Heater lamp (2) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
MM MM Main motor Drives the fusing unit.

1 Heater lamp 1 Generates heat and transmits heat to the heat roller. The temperature is controlled by the
thermistor. (Temperature control is made mainly on the center.)
2 Heater lamp 2 Generates heat and transmits heat to the heat roller. The temperature is controlled by the
thermistor. (Temperature control is made mainly on both sides.)
3 Upper heat roller Transmits heat to melt toner on paper and fuse toner by means of a pressure with the lower heat
roller.
4 Lower heat roller Fuses toner on paper by means of a pressure with the upper heat roller.
To improve fusing capability, the diameter is greater than the conventional ones.
(ø30mm→ø40mm)
5 Fusing upper separation pawl Prevents winding of paper around the upper heat roller.
6 Fusing lower separation pawl Prevents winding of paper around the lower heat roller.
7 Thermistor (Center) Detects the surface temperature of the upper heat roller.
(On/off of heater lamp 1 is controlled according to the detected temperature.)
8 Thermistor (Side) Detects the surface temperature of the upper heat roller.
(On/off of heater lamp 2 is controlled according to the detected temperature.)
9 Cleaning roller Cleans toner on the lower heat roller. Made of metal.

C. Operational descriptions (3) Fusing operation

(1) Fusing unit drive Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat
roller.
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (MM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor DC brushless motor is driven according to the
control signal sent from the PCU.

PCU MM

(2) Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU.
When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive
circuit in the sub power PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and
the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off. Fusing roller (Heating)
HL2 HL1

---------
Paper exit

Fusing roller (Pressing)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 22

The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with two heater lamps, (5) Cleaning roller
which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto paper. The fusing section cleaning roller of this machine is made of metal.
The fusing rollers (pressing) are of silicon rubber because of the 1) Remaining toner attaches to the upper heat roller.
following reasons and purpose. 2) Due to coating and the temperature characteristics of the
1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heating) is upper heat roller, toner is not attached to the upper heat roller
of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is deformed to but to the lower heat roller.
separate paper upward.)
3) Remaining toner on the lower heat roller is further attached to
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for the cleaning roller due to the temperature characteristics and
paper.
the difference in roughness of surfaces of the rollers.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without 4) Remaining toner attached to the cleaning roller is accumulated
deformation. until the roller is replaced.
(4) Fusing temperature control
The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the fusing
roller (heating).
The roller temperature is detected by the installed temperature
sensor, and the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature
is maintained at the specified level.
In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the
kind of paper.
Fusing roller
Mode
AR-M312U AR-M420U
Ready condition Plain paper 190°C 190°C
print mode Heavy Paper 190°C 190°C
Postcard 190°C 190°C
Envelope 190°C 190°C
Pre-heat 150°C 150°C

D. Maintenance and parts replacement

(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Fusing section 1 Upper heat roller ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
2 Lower heat roller ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
3 Upper separation pawl ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
4 Lower separation pawl ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
5 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean and remove paper dust.
6 Upper heat roller gear ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
7 Cleaning roller ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
8 CL roller collar ▲ ▲
9 Paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
10 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

2
8 5
7

4
8
5

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 23

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement 3) Pull the fusing lever, and remove the fusing unit.

No. Unit Parts

a Fusing unit 1 Lower separation pawl ✕
2 Upper separation pawl ✕
3 Thermistor ✕
4 Lower heat roller ❍
5 Cleaning roller ✕
6 CL roller collar ▲
7 Heater lamp
8 Upper heat roller ❍
9 Upper heat roller gear ✕

a a-2
a-9
a-8
a-4
a-6
a-1

a-1 a-1. Lower separation pawl

a-3
a-5 a-7 1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Open the fusing rear lower PG, and remove the lower separa-
a-6 tion pawl.
a-3

a. Fusing unit
1) Pull out the left door.

a-2. Upper separation pawl

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the stopper R. 2) Remove the rear upper PG, and remove the upper separation
pawl.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 24

a-3. Thermistor a-5. Cleaning roller
1) Remove the fusing unit. a-6. CL roller collar
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing drawer. Remove 1) Remove the fusing unit.
the connector.
2) Remove the lower heat roller.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.
3) Remove the CL roller, and remove the CL roller collar.

a-7. Heater lamp

1) Remove the fusing unit.
a-4. Lower heat roller
2) Open the fusing unit.
1) Remove the fusing unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the heater lamp.
2) Release pressure with the pressure adjustment lever.
∗ Be careful not to mistake the installing position of the heater
3) Remove the screw, and open the fusing unit. lamp.

4) Open the fusing rear lower PG.

5) Remove the lower heat roller, and remove the lower heat roller
bearing.

∗ When installing, loosen the screws on the front side (drawer

ON side) then the screws on the rear side (gear side) in this
sequence.
∗ Check to confirm again that the screws are tighten securely. (If
any screw is loosened, a bad contact may cause heating.)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 25

a-8. Upper heat roller 3. Paper feed section
a-9. Upper heat roller gear
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Open the fusing unit.
3) Remove the fusing rear upper PG.
4) Remove the heater lamp.
5) Remove the upper heat roller, the roller stopper. The upper
heat roller gear, and the upper heat roller bearing.

A. General
This section picks up paper in the cassette and feed it to the trans-
port roller section.
The capacity of the paper feed tray is 550 sheets for 64g/m2 or
500 sheets for 80g/m2.
There are three kinds of the paper feed desk: 1-stage paper feed
desk (AR-D29). For details, refer to the AR-D29 Service Manual.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 26

B. Major parts and signal functions
CN2
173979-2 173979-2 CSS PWB CN1
S4B-PH-K-S
OR 1 BR
LUMB 1 LUMB CSS 1
LUMA 2
OR 2
LUMA CSS GND2 2
GY
BR
LUMB 3
BR
LUMA 4

LUM 179228-3(AMP)
+5V1 1
LUD 2
GND2 3

179228-3(AMP)
+5V1 1
PED 2
MM CPFC GND2 3

LUD
PED

2
3
1
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
BR
2 CPFC\ 1
RD
1 +24V1 2

CN13
PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H
B24B-PHDSS-B
GY
GND2 1 1 +5V2 9
RD
+24V1 2 2 PPD1 8
BR
PCU PWB PED 3
BR BL
3 GND2 7
BL
CPFC\ 4 4 +5V1 6
BL BR BR
+5V1 5 5 LUD 5
GY GY
+24V1 6 6 GND2 4
CN9 GY BL BL
9604S-08F GND2 7 7 +5V1 3
8FE-ST-VK-N BR BR
1 DSW-F RRC\ 8 8 PED 2
DSW-L 8 BR GY GY
2 DSW-F LUD 9 9 GND2 1
DSW-L 7
3 GND2 +24V1 10
GND1 6 BL
4 GND2 +5V1 11
GND1 5
5 +5V1 TRC\ 12
+5V1 4
6 GND2 (NC) 13
GND2 3 BR
7 MM\ CSS 14
MM\ 2
8 MM-T GND2 15
MM-T 1 GY
9 MMCLK\ GND2 16
10 (NC) PPD1 17
BR
LUMB 18
+5V1 19
BR
LUMA 20
CFM1\ 21
GND2 22
+24V1 23
2 1 4
GND2 24

3 6

Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
CPFC CPFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray section roller ON/ Electromagnetic clutch
OFF control
LUM LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed AC synchronous motor Selection of Rotation
tray. mode/ Brake mode
PED PED Defector Paper empty detection
LUD LUD Defector Paper tray upper limit detection

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 27

 Name Function Remark
1 Take-up roller Picks up paper and transports it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Feed paper in the machine.
3 Separation roller Rotates simultaneously with the paper feed roller to prevent against overlapped feed.
For the manual feed tray, the separation pad is used instead of the roller.
4 Paper upper limit sensor Detects the top surface of paper and stops paper at the feed position. Except for BPT
5 Paper sensor Detects paper presence.
(Paper empty, upper limit detection: ON / Paper presence detection: OFF)
6 Lift-up motor Lifts the paper feed base up to the paper feed position (upper limit detection position). Except for BPT

C. Operational descriptions [Paper size detection]

[Paper feed operation] (1) Paper width detection VR (MPT/BPT/Machine tray)
(1) Preliminary operation except for the manual feed Width detection is performed by calculating the voltage (A/D con-
version value) of the slide VR in linkage with the side guide plate.
tray
1) Load paper and insert the tray, and the tray sensor will be Paper width and paper size
turned on. (The range is set to Standard value ± 6 [mm].)
2) The lift-up motor rotates. Width detection Standard
Paper size Range (mm)
3) The upper limit sensor turns on. pattern value (mm)
(2) Paper feed operation A A3/A4 297.0 303.0- 291.0
B WLT/LT 279.4 285.4 - 273.4
1) The take-up roller descends.
C B4/B5 257.0 263.0 - 251.0
2) The take-up roller rotates to feed paper.
D LG/LTR/Foolscap 215.9 221.9 - 209.9
3) At the same time the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to E A4R 210.0 216.0 - 204.0
the transport section.
F Executive-R 184.1 190.1 - 178.1
4) At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent against G B5R 182.0 188.0 - 176.0
overlapped feed.
(2) Paper length sensor
(MPT/2nd and 3rd steps of 3-step paper feed desk)
Length detection is performed by combination of cassette size
sensors 1 - 4.

CSS1
CSS2

CSS4
CSS3

Paper length and paper size

Vertical size Detection SW status AB series Inch series Detection width Same range
detection pattern CSS1 CSS2 CSS3 CSS4 size size range size
1 ON ON OFF ON B5 EXTRA 147.0 - 198.0 Postcard
Monarch
2 OFF ON OFF ON A4 LT 198.0 - 237.0 DBL P/C
C5
DL
3 OFF ON ON ON B5R EX-R 237.0 - 274.0 COM-10
ISO-B5
4 OFF OFF ON ON A4R LTR 274.0 - 314.0
5 ON OFF ON ON Foolscap Extra 314.0 - 347.0
6 ON OFF ON OFF B4 LGL 347.0 - 389.0
7 ON ON ON OFF A3 WLT 389.0 - 432.8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Tray not installed

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 28

(3) Paper detection method of each tray
1) Machine 1st tray
Paper detection is performed by VR in linkage with both side
guides.
2) Multi-purpose tray
Paper detection is performed by VR in linkage with both side
guides and the detector in linkage with the rear edge plate.
Width detection Vertical detection
Paper size
pattern pattern
B5 C 1
A4 A 2
B5R G 3
A4R E 4
Foolscap D 5
B4 B 6
A3 A 7
LT B 2
EX-R F 3
LTR D 4
LGL D 6
WLT B 7
For the other than above, the paper size is considered as "Extra."
3) 2nd and 3rd steps of 3-step paper feed tray
Paper detection is performed by the detector in linkage with
the rear edge plate.

CSS1
CSS2

CSS4
CSS3

Paper size for automatic detection

Vertical size Detection SW status Detection width
AB series size Inch series size
detection pattern CSS1 CSS2 CSS3 CSS4 range
1 ON ON OFF ON B5 EXTRA 147.0 - 198.0
2 OFF ON OFF ON A4 LT 198.0 - 237.0
3 OFF ON ON ON B5R EX-R 237.0 - 274.0
4 OFF OFF ON ON A4R LTR 274.0 - 314.0
5 ON OFF ON ON Foolscap EXTRA 314.0 - 347.0
6 ON OFF ON OFF B4 LGL 347.0 - 389.0
7 ON ON ON OFF A3 WLT 389.0 - 432.8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Tray not installed

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 29

[Paper remaining quantity detection]
(1) Paper remaining quantity detection
Paper remaining quantity detection is common in each tray except for the manual feed tray. Remaining quantity is indicated in 3 steps plus
paper empty (4 steps in total).
(2) Detection method
Paper remaining quantity is detected by the number of times of changing of the remaining quantity sensor from when the tray starts lifting up
to when the upper limit sensor turns on.

(Remaining quantity sensor status change when the tray is moving up and remaining quantity)

Paper empty is detected by

the paper empty sensor.
MCPED
When paper empty is detected (Paper empty sensor)
Rotating plate
Paper remaining quantity
detection actuator
1/3 area
sensor logic LOW MCSPD
(Paper remaining quantity sensor)

Paper remaining quantity at 1/3

2/3 area
sensor logic HIGH

Paper remaining quantity at 2/3

3/3 area
sensor logic LOW

Paper remaining quantity at 3/3

Indication of remaining quantity Sensor status

Paper quantity: 100% Paper quantity sensor: OFF
Paper quantity: 66% Paper quantity sensor: ON
Paper quantity: 33% Paper quantity sensor: OFF (2nd time)
Paper quantity: 0% Paper sensor: OFF

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 30

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Paper feed section 1 Paper feed roller ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1
2 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Note 1

Note 1: Replacement reference: Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference.
Paper feed roller/Torque limiter section: 80K or 2 years

1
1
2
1

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a-1. Pick-up roller

No. Unit Parts a-2. Paper feed roller

a 1 Pick-up roller ❍ a-3. Separation roller
2 Paper feed roller ❍ a-4. Torque limiter
3 Separation roller ❍
1) Pull out No. 1 paper feed tray unit.
4 Torque limiter ✕
5 Paper feed cassette upper limit
detection
6 Paper feed cassette paper
empty detection
7 Cassette detection PWB
8 Lift-up motor

a-7
a-8 a-5
a-6
a-2 a-1 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper guide.

a-4 a-3

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 31

3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pickup roller and the a-7. Cassette detection PWB
paper feed roller. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the separation roller and the
torque limiter.
2) Remove the connector, and remove the cassette detection
PWB.

a-5. Paper feed cassette upper limit detection a-8. Lift-up motor
a-6. Paper feed cassette paper empty detection 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
1) Pull out No. 1 paper feed tray unit, and remove the paper
guide.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the pickup roller arm.
3) Remove the paper feed roller and each part.
4) Remove the pickup roller shaft, and remove the pickup roller
guide.
5) Remove the actuator.
6) Remove the connector, the paper feed cassette upper limit
detection, and the paper feed cassette paper empty detection.

2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the lift-up
motor unit.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 32

3) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the spring. 4. Transport section/Paper exit reverse
4) Remove the screw, and remove the lift-up motor.
section

A. General
In this paper transport section, paper fed from each paper feed
port is transported to the resist roller section, where the lead edge
of the paper is aligned with the lead edge of images on the OPC
drum. Images are transferred onto paper in the transfer section,
and the paper is discharged face-up or face-down through the fus-
ing section.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 33

B. Major parts and signal functions
SMR-06V+SMP-06V-NC
BR
1 POM0\ 1
BR
2 POM2\ 2
BR
3 POM1\ 3
BR
4 POM3\ 4
RD
5 +24V1 5
RD
6 +24V1 6
SMP-03V-BC+SMR-03V-B 179228-3
BR BL BL
1 POD1 1 1 +5V1
GY BR BR
2 GND2 2 2 POD1
BL GY GY
3 +5V2 3 3 GND2

179228-3
BL
1 +5V1
BR
2 POD2
GY
3 GND2

179228-3
BL
CN4 1 +5V1
BR
B32B-PHDSS-B 2 POD3
BR GY
POM0\ 1 3 GND2
BL
+5V1 2
BR RD
POM2\ 3
POD1 4
BR
BR RD
SFPS-41T-187 DSW-L
POM1\ 5
GND2 6
GY
BR
POD3
POM3\ 7 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
BL
+5V1
+24V1
8
9
RD
RD
BR
3 +24V1 1 POD2 5
POD2 10
BR
RD
GY
2 VFM2\
1 GND2
2
3
POM
+24V1 11
GND2 12
GY
POD1
GND2 13
BL
+5V1 14
CFM2\ 15 VFM2
BR
POD3 16
+24V1 17
GY
GND2 18
+24V1
CFM2\
19
20
MM
RD
+24V1 21
VFM2\
+24V1
22
23
RD RRC
GY
GND2 24
(NC) 25
GND2
DSW-L
26
27
RD 4
DSW-L 28
(NC) 29
(NC) 30 TRC
(NC)
DSW-F
31
32
2
CN9
GY HVR
PCU PWB 9604S-08F 8FE-ST-VK-N PWB
DSW-F 1 8 DSW-L
DSW-F 2 7 DSW-L
GND2 3 6 GND1
GND2 4 5 GND1
+5V1 5 4 +5V1 PPD1
GND2 6 3 GND2
MM\ 7 2 MM\
MM-T 8 1 MM-T
MMCLK\ 9
(NC) 10
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
1
CN13 BR
B24B-PHDSS-B 1 RRC\ 2
RD
GND2
+24V1
1 2 +24V1 1 4 5
2 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
PED 3 BR
CPFC\ 1 TRC1\ 3
4
+5V1 2 (NC) 2
5 RD
RD 3 +24V1 1
+24V1 6
GND2 7
BR PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 179228-3(AMP)
RRC\ 8
BL BL BL
LUD 9 1 +5V1 9 1 +5V1 3 1 +5V1
RD BR BR BR
+24V1 10 2 PPD1 8 2 PPD1 2 2 PPD1
GY GY GY
+5V1 11 3 GND2 7 3 GND2 1 3 GND2
TRC\ 12
BR
4 +5V1 6 3
(NC) 13 5 LUD 5
CSS 14
GY
6 GND2 4 GY HVR
GND2
GND2
15
16
7 +5V1
8 PED
3
2
PWB
BR
PPD1
LUMB
17
18
9 GND2 1 CFM1
BL
+5V1 19
LUMA 20
BR
CFM1\ 21
GY
GND2 22
RD PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
+24V1 23 TSR-04V-K PHR-3
GY GY RD RD
GND2 24 1 GND2 +24V1 1 3 +24V1 1
RD DRAWER CFM1\ 2 BR BR
2 +24V1 2 CFM1\ 2
GY GY GY
3 GND2 PWB GND2 3 1 GND2 3
BR
4 CFM1\

Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
POD1 POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Paper exit detection from fusing Transmission Paper transport system sensor
type
POD2 POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Paper pass detection from paper exit Transmission Paper transport system sensor
type
POD3 POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Paper exit detection to upper section Transmission Paper transport system sensor
paper exit tray (Full detection) type
POM POM Paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller. Stepping Selection of Normal speed/
motor High speed/ Reverse rotation
VFM2 VFM2 Fusing cooling fan motor Discharges heat generated in the DC brushless PWM control
fusing section. motor
CFM1 CFM1 Fusing cooling fan motor Discharges heat generated in the DC brushless PWM control
fusing section to cool it. motor

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 34

 Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
RRC RRC Resist roller clutch Resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
TRC TRC Paper transport roller clutch Paper transport roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
MM MM Main motor Drives the paper transport and resist roller DC brushless Paper pass
motor

No. Name Function

1 Transport roller 15 Transports paper to the transport resist roller.
2 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of paper to adjust the
relationship between images and paper.
4 Paper exit and transport roller Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller.
5 Paper exit roller Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. / Switchbacks paper.

C. Operational descriptions
[Paper transport path and paper exit]
Paper transport path with an option installed
1.

Option Model name

Desk AR-D29
Duplex unit AR-DU4
Finisher AR-FN6

2.

Option Model name

Desk AR-D29
Duplex unit AR-DU3
Finisher AR-FN7
Male bin stacker AR-MS1
Punch unit AR-PN1

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 35

3. Paper transport in duplex printing (with AR-DU3/DU4 installed)
(1) Switchback operation and paper exit to the left tray
1) Paper transported from the fusing section is sent to the paper exit section of the machine.
2) When the male bin stacker (AR-MS1) or the finisher (AR-FN5) is installed, the paper entry gate solenoid (FGS) selects the paper entry
gate to discharge paper outside the machine.
3) The paper exit sensor (POD2) detects the rear edge of paper, and the paper exit motor (POM) is rotated reversely.

4) Paper is taken into the machine again, passed over the reverse gate, and transported to the duplex unit.
5) When duplex printing is made, the ADU gate solenoid switches to the upper side of the ADU paper exit gate to switch the paper path to
the ADU.

6) When paper is discharged to the left tray or when paper is transported to the console finisher (AR-FN7), the ADU gate solenoid
switches to the upper side of the ADU paper exit gate to switch the paper path to the ADU.

(2) Paper transport speed in duplex printing

The transport speed may be doubled in duplex printing depending on the paper position.
The positions of double speed are as follows:
1) From when the rear edge of paper passes the fusing section to when switchback operation is started.
2) From switchback operation, after the lead edge of paper passes APPD1, until a certain amount is transported.
3) After that, paper is stopped at the ADU paper feed position, and fed to the laser printer again.
4. Transport with AR-FN6 installed
The AR-FN6 is provided with the decurler to improve alignment capability of finishing.
The decurler makes decurling against curling of paper by means of the difference in rigidity of the upper roller (metal) and the lower roller
(sponge).

Metal

Sponge

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 36

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Transport section 1 PS follower roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper exit reverse 2 Transport rollers ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
section 3 Transport paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
4 Paper dust remover ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Paper transport detection

2
4

1
2
5

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement

No. Unit Parts
a 1 Paper dust remover ▲ a-1
b Resist roller unit 1 PS follower roller ❍
2 Paper transport roller
3 Paper transport detection
4 High voltage resistor PWB
c Left door unit 1 Suction fan motor
2 High voltage resistor PWB
3 Drawer PWB
d Paper exit 1 Paper exit detection 1 d-6
reverse unit 2 Paper exit motor d-5
3 Left door open/close d-2
detection d-3
4 Exhaust heat fan motor d-1
5 Paper exit detection 2 d-4
6 Paper exit full detection d-8
7 After-fusing roller d
8 Paper exit roller
d-7
b-4
c-2
c-1 b
b-1
c-3
b-2
b-3
c

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 37

a-1. Paper dust remover unit b-1. Resist roller
1) Open the front door. 1) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
2) Remove the resist roller unit.
3) Remove the parts, and remove the resist roller.
4) Remove the gear, the parallel pin, and the E-ring.

2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.

b-2. Paper transport roller

1) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
2) Remove the resist roller unit.
3) Remove the parts, and remove the paper transport roller.

b. Resist roller unit

1) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the resist roller unit. Discon-
nect the connector.

b-3. Paper transport detection

b-4. High voltage resistor PWB
1) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
2) Remove the resist roller unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper dust cleaner guide.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 38

4) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the paper 3) Remove the connector, the screw, and the washer, and
transport detector. remove the suction fan motor.
5) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the high 4) Remove the screw, and remove the high voltage resistor
voltage resistor PWB. PWB.

∗ When installing the fan, check the left door indication arrow and
c. Left door unit note the fan direction.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the left door unit. c-3. Drawer PWB
1) Remove the left door unit.
2) Remove the left door transport paper guide.
3) Remove the screw, and the reverse gate unit and remove the
angle.

c-1. Suction fan motor

c-2. High voltage resistor PWB
1) Remove the left door unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the transfer lock pawl.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the left door transport paper
guide.

4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle.

5) Remove the connector, the screw, and remove the drawer
PWB.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 39

d. Paper exit reverse unit 6) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
1) Pull out the left door. 7) Remove the screw, and remove the front right upper cabinet.
8) Remove the front door.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

9) Remove the E-ring and the parts.

10) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the paper
exit reverse unit.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit upper cabinet.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear cabinet.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the front left upper cabinet.

d-1. Paper exit detection 1

1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit.
2) Remove the actuator. Remove the connector, and remove the
paper exit detection 1.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 40

d-2. Paper exit motor 4) Remove the connector, the exhaust heat fan, the paper exit
1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit. detection 2, the paper exit full detection.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the paper
exit motor.

∗ When installing the fan, check the indication arrow and note the
d-3. Left door open/close detection
fan direction.
1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit.
d-7. After-fusing roller
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the left
1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit.
door open/close detection.
2) Remove the E-ring and the parts.
3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the paper
exit drive frame.

d-4. Exhaust heat fan motor

d-5. Paper exit detection 2
d-6. Paper exit full detection
1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the exhaust duct.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit upper paper 4) Remove the bearing, the E-ring, and the parts.
guide reinforcement plate.
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the fusing rear roller. Remove
the bearing.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 41

d-8. Paper exit roller
1) Remove the paper exit reverse unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit upper paper
guide unit.

3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper exit roller. Remove
the bearing, the gear, and the parallel pin.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 42

5. Laser scanner section A. General
Image data sent from the MFP (image process circuit) through the
mother board and PCU are converted into laser beams to radiate
onto the drum surface.

B. Major parts and signal functions

5 1
2
6
10

BD PM

PCU 3
PWB 4 8
MFP MOTHER
CN2
9604S-28F
7
CONTROL BOARD 1 +24V1 CN16 CN101
2 FM2\
3 PCU_RXD GND2
S30B-PHDSS-B
1
GY
S30B-PHDSS-B
30 GND2
9
PWB PWB 4 GND2
5 PCU_TXD
SYNC\
GND2
2
3
BR
GY
29
28
SYNC\
GND2
CN102
S11B-PH-K-S PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
6 GND2 GY
GND2 4 27 GND2 RD RD
7 PCU_DSR +24V1 11 3 +24V1 1
GY BR BR
8 GND2 GND2 5 26 GND2
9 PCU_DTR LSU S/H 6
BR
25 LSU S/H
VFM1\ 10
GY
2 VFM1\ 2
GY VFM1
BR GND2 9 1 GND2 3
10 GND2 VRB 7 24 VRB RD
11 PCU_RES
GND2 8
GY
23 GND2
+24V1 8
BR Power source
12 GND2
GND2 9
GY
22 GND2
VFM1\ 7
GY
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
RD
section
13 VIDEOin+ BR GND2 6 3 +24V1 1
TEST(TEST\) 10 21 TEST(TEST\) RD BR
CN3 CN2 14 VIDEOin- +24V1 5
15 GND2 VIDEO 11
BR
20 VIDEO
PMCLK\ 4
BR 2 VFM1\ 2
GY VFM1
BR BR 1 GND2 3
16 HSYNC VIDEO\ 12 19 VIDEO\
BR READY(READY\) 3
17 GND2 LDON\ 13 18 LDON\ BR
GY START\ 2
18 GND2 GND2 14 17 GND2 GY
19 PAGE GY GND2 1
GND2 15 16 GND2 PHR-5
20 GND2 BL
+5V1 16 15 +5V1 1 PMCLK
21 MSW_MON GY
22 FWP-PCU GND2 17 14 GND2 2 READY
BL
23 POF\ +5V1 18 13 +5V1 3 START\
RD
24 +5V1 +24V1 19 12 +24V1 4 GND2
25 +5V1 RD
+24V1 20 11 +24V1 5 +24V1
26 +5V1 BR
VFM1\ 21 10 VFM1\ CN103
27 +5V1 GY
GND2 22 9 GND2 S4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-K-S
28 +5V1 BR BR
START\ 23 8 START\ GND2 1 4 GND2
BR LB
VFM1\ 24 7 VFM1\ SYNC\ 2 3 SYNC\
BR BR
PMCLK\ 25 6 PMCLK\ GND2 3 2 GND2
BR BL
READY(READY\) 26 5 READY(READY\) +5V1 4 1 +5V1
GY
GND2 27 4 GND2
GY
GND2 28 3 GND2
BL
+5V LD 29 2 +5V LD
GY
GND2 30 1 GND2

Signal
Code Name Type Function/Operation NOTE
name
PM PM Polygon mirror (motor) Reflects laser beams at the constant rotation speed.
BD BD PWB Detects the laser scan start timing. This device is used
to detect a laser trouble.

No. Name Code, signal name Function

RW Control signal +5VLD 5V power for laser diode
RW Control signal /READY Polygon mirror motor READY signal ("L" in the constant speed rotation)
RW Control signal /PMCLK Clock signal for driving the polygon mirror motor
RW Control signal /START Polygon mirror motor drive start signal
RW Control signal /VIDEO VIDEO (Image signal)
RW Control signal /SYNC Sync signal (SYNC) from BD, sync signal for 1 line

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 43

 No. Name Function
1 Laser control PWB Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 Incidence reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams.
4 No. 1 mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams.
5 fθ lens 1 Deflects laser beams so that the laser scan speeds on the both ends of the drum and that at the
6 fθ lens 2 center of the drum are the same.
7 BD PWB Detects the timing of laser scan start. This device is used to detect a laser trouble.
8 No. 2 mirror Converges laser beams to focus.
9 Plane lens Assures the optical path for laser beams.
10 Convergence lens for BD Converges laser beams onto the BD PWB.

C. Operational descriptions a-1. LSU

1) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet.
[Laser optical path]
∗ The LSU must not be disassembled in the market.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the right noise cover.

(1) Polygon motor

Number
Model RPM Bearing
of mirrors
31PPM 14 17000RPM OIL Superior in
silence.
42PPM 14 22000RPM OIL
(2) Outline of LSU specifications
Effective scan width: 297mm
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 60 - 85 µm 3) Remove the connector, and remove the screw.
Sub scan = 75 - 110 µm
Laser power: 0.23±0.01mW (42 PPM)
0.19±0.01mW (31 PPM)
LD wave length: 770 - 795nm

D. Maintenance and parts replacement

No. Unit Parts
a 1 LSU

a-1

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 44

4) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet. 8) Remove the screw, and remove the main switch mounting
plate.

9) Remove the power unit.

5) Remove the connector, the screw, and the angle. Remove the
snap band.
∗ Do not disconnect the LSU side.

1)

10) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the duct
holding cover.

6) Pull out the No. 1 paper feed tray unit, and push up and
remove the front door.

11) Remove the screw, and remove the LSU.

7) Release the lock, and pull out the left door. Remove the
screw, and remove the front cover right.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 45

6. Scanner section A. General
There are following three methods of scanning documents in this
machine.
a. Place a document on the table glass. The copy lamp unit is
operated to radiate copy lamp light onto the document, scan-
ning the document with the CCD.
b. The DPSF feeds a document. The copy lamp light is radiated
onto the document which is stopped at the specified position
and the document is scanned by the CCD.
c. The DPSF feed a document. The LED light of the CIS unit
which is attached to the DPSF is radiated to the back of the
document, and the document is scanned by the CIS.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 46

B. Major parts and signal functions

11

MIM

6
2
1 CCD1

3
4
CL1
5

MHPS

10

CN5 CN1 CN16

30FMZ-BT TX25-80P-LT-H1 TX24-80R-LT-H1 CN6
S5B-PH
1 GND2
MIMA 1
2 1_CLK+ MIMB 2
3 1_CLK- /MIMA 3
4 1_DATA0+ /MIMB 4
5 1_DATA0- +24V 5
6 GND2
7 1_DATA1+
8 1_DATA1-
9 /1_DBL+
10 /1_DBL-
11 GND2
12 FRM_CCD1
13 PAGE1
14 CLK_CCD1
15 ADD_CCD1
16 TXD_CCD1
17 RXD_CCD1
18 RES_CCD
19 GND2
20 +3.3V
SCN SCN
21 +3.3V
22 GND2
23 +5V
24 +5V
JNT PWB
25 GND2
26 +5V
27 +5V
28 GND2
PWB
29 +12V
30 +12V

CN7
FFC-5Pin 9604S-05C
GND2 5 1 GND2
GND2 4 2 GND2
/CL1 3 3 /CL1 CN10
+24V 2 4 +24V S3B-PH 53053-0310(MOLEX)
+24V MHPS LB
1 5 +24V 1 1 MHPS
GND2 GY
2 2 GND2
+5V BL
3 3 +5V

10 4 12 9 7 8 11

5 3 1 6

Code Signal name Name Function/Operation Type Note

MIM MIM Scanner (reading) motor Drives the scanner (reading) section. Stepping motor
MHPS MHPS Scanner home position Scanner home position detection Transmission type Sensor
sensor detector
CL1 CL1 Copy lamp Document exposure lamp
CCD1 CCD PWB Front document image scan (Document table/
DPSF mode)
Converts the document images (optical
signals) into electrical signals.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 47

 No. Name Function
1 Copy lamp unit Lights up to radiate documents. A xenon lamp (operating on 3.15KV) is employed.
2 Reflector This mirror converges lights on documents.
3 No. 1 mirror Secures the optical path between a document and No. 2 mirror.
4 No. 2 mirror Secures the optical path between No. 1 mirror and No. 3 mirror.
5 No. 3 mirror Secures the optical path between No. 2 mirror and the CCD.
6 CCD/Lens unit The reduction optical type CCD (Charge Coupled Device) of 7,450 pixels is employed. The scan resolution
is 600dpi. Converts photo energy reflected by the mirrors into electric energy.
7 White balance sheet Serves as the reference sheet of white for scanning with the CCD/Lens unit. If dust or dirt is attached to
this sheet, white streaks may be produced.
8 Table glass A document is set on this glass. The glass surface is coated for protection against static electricity.
A document is set to the top left corner.
9 DPSF scan glass The copy lamp unit is fixed, and a document is moved over this glass to scan line by line. The glass
surface is coated for protection against static electricity. If dust or dirt is attached to this sheet, black
streaks may be produced.
10 Mirror home position Detects the home position of the mirror base unit.
sensor (MHPS)
11 Scan motor Drives the mirror base and the copy lamp unit.
12 DSPF white balance Serves as the reference sheet of white for scanning with the CIS unit.
sheet If dust or dirt is attached to this sheet, white streaks may be produced.

C. Operational descriptions
(1) CCD/lens unit
This machine employs the reduction optical-type line CCD (Charge Coupled Device) of scan resolution of 600dpi and 7450 pixels.
CCD scan is performed by shifting the scan positions sequentially by the carriage unit (lamp and mirror) scan or moving the document with
the DPSF.
Lights reflected by the document are reflected by each mirror to form images on CCD elements through the reduction-type lens. The CCD
converts the optical energy into electrical energy (analog). (Photoelectric conversion)
(2) CIS unit
The image sensor which scans back document images is attached to the DPSF. The close-contact type image sensor (Contact Image Sen-
sor) with scan resolution of 600dpi and 7196 pixels is employed.
For the CIS to scan documents, the scan position is sequentially shifted by shifting the document by the DPSF, and the LED light in the unit
is radiated to the back of the document, and photo energy is converted into electric energy (analog signal).

CIS

Auto-focus lens
Lens center line

LED PWB
Glass
CIS UNI

Focus point

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 48

(3) Image signal flow (4) Carriage (lamp unit) shift (scan) speed
The image signal converted into electric energy (analog signal) is The carriage scan speed depends on the copy magnification ratio.
A-D converted on the CCD PWB. Image processes such as white Speed up to 171% = 110mm/s
balance and shading correction are performed on the scanner
Speed of 172% - 400% = 55mm/s
control PWB. The image signal is then sent through the mother
board to the MFP control PWB. (5) Timing chart
In the MFP control PWB, image process is performed according to Platen timing chart
the setting content of the operation panel. The image data are
converted into laser lighting signals (VIDEO signals), and sent MM
through the mother PWB and the PCU to the LSU (Laser Scan Feed Return
Unit). MIMD
Home position Home position
In the LSU, the VIDEO signals are converted into laser beams, MHPS
which are radiated onto the drum. Scan
CCD
PSW

DPSF duplex timing chart

SPFM
1030mS
SRRC
SPPD4
94mS
SPOD
55mS
181mS
CCD
CIS

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 49

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Scanner section 1 Mirror/Lens/Reflector/Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
2 Table glass/OC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
3 White reference sheet ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
5 Drive belt/Drive wire/Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

2 1

5
2

5
4

3
4

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement

No. Unit Parts
a Scanner unit 1 OC ❍
2 Dust-proof glass ❍ a-1
3 Table glass ❍
4 White reference sheet ❍
a-2
5 Mirror ❍
6 Rails ✩
a-3
7 Drive wire ✕
8 Pulley ✕ c-1
9 Drive belt ✕ b
a-6 b-1
10 Scan motor a-4 b-2
11 OC open sensor a-5
12 Mirror home position sensor a-6

13 Scanner control PWB

14 Scanner interface PWB
b Lamp unit 1 Reflector ❍ a-9
2 Mirror ❍ a-10
a-8
a-11 a-7
3 Lamp
4 Inverter PWB a-13
c
c CCD lens 1 CCD lens a-8
a-12 b-4
PWB unit
b-3
a-14
a-7

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 50

a. Scanner unit a-6. Rails
a-1. OC 1) Remove the table glass.
1) Remove the OC cover. 2) Grease up the rails.

2)
1)

1)
3)
4)

3)

a-7. Drive wire

a-8. Pulley
a-2. Dust-proof glass
a-9. Drive belt
a-3. Table glass
1) Remove the table glass.
a-4. White reference glass
2) Check the drive wire, pulley and drive belt.
1) Remove the table glass holder and the white reference glass
holder, and remove the table glass and the white reference
glass.

4)

6) 5)
4) 1)
1)
3)

2)

a-10. Scan motor

1) Remove the scanner rear cabinet and the rear lower cabinet.

a-5. Mirror
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Clean mirror.

3) 4)

3)
2)
1)
1)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 51

2) Pull out the harness from the scanner control PWB. a-14. Scanner interface PWB
3) Remove the scan motor. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the PWB cover and the harness cover.

3)

2)
1)

a-11. OC open sensor 3) Remove the scanner interface PWB.

1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the OC open sensor.

2)

1)
3)

a-12. Mirror home position sensor b. Lamp unit

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the mirror home position sensor. 2) Remove the scan lamp unit.

4) 1)

3)
1)
2)

3) 1)

a-13. Scanner control PWB

1) Remove the scanner rear lower cabinet. 2)
2) Disconnect the connector and earth band, and pull out the
scanner control PWB.

2)

5)
2)
2)
1) 4)
3)
1)

∗ When the scanner control PWB is replaced, the EEPROM must

be replaced.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 52

b-1. Reflector b-4. Inverter PWB
b-1. Mirror 1) Remove the table glass.
1) Remove the table glass. 2) Hold with your hand and remove the screw. Remove the con-
2) Clean the reflector and the mirror. nector and remove the inverter PWB.

b-3. Lamp
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Slide the lamp unit base to the notch section.

c. CCD lens PWB unit

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark-box cover.

1) 1)
2)

1) 1)

1)

3) Flip the notch section Mylar and remove the screw. Slide the
lamp holder to the front side, and remove it upward from the
rear side. Remove the connector.

3) Remove the CCD lens PWB unit.

Note: The CCD lens PWB unit is factory-adjusted before
shipping.
Since these adjustments cannot be performed in the
market.
Never touch the screws other than screw 2) of the CCD
lens PWB unit.

2)

1)

3)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 53

 4) Clean the CCD lens and the CCD.
Note for CCD lens PWB unit installation
<1> Adjust the CCD unit adjustment value listed in the table
below with the scribed line on the lens base.

CCD unit adjustment value

(+) direction

Reference line

(-) direction
1 scale: 1.4mm

7. DSPF section

CCD adjustment value

+4 scales 5.0~
+3 scales 3.6~4.9
+2 scales 2.2~3.5
+1 scale 0.8~2.1
Reference -0.6~0.7
-1 scale -2.0~ -0.7
-2 scales -3.4~ -2.1
-3 scales -4.8~ -3.5
-4 scales ~ -4.9
<2> Make a sample copy at the above position, and measure
the magnification ratio. A. General
<3> Change the installing position in the horizontal direction to Sheet documents are automatically fed and transported for contin-
adjust the magnification ratio. uous scanning.
• When the copy image is longer than the original, shift to the The DSPF (AR-EF6) supports duplex sheet to scan both of the
positive (+) direction. front and the back surfaces at a time.
• When the copy image is shorter than the original, shift to the
negative (-) direction.
∗ 1 scale of the scribed line corresponds to 0.3% of magnifica-
tion ratio.
∗ If this adjustment is not satisfactory, make a fine adjustment
with SIM 48-1.
(Refer to the adjustment described below.)

c-1. CCD lens

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark-box cover.
3) Remove the lens cover.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 54

B. Major parts and signal functions

SCOV
OCSW
SDSS SPLS2
4
SPED
SPLS1

SPFS 7
SPF SPPD SPFVR
MOTOR 3
SPFC
9 SRRC
8
10
5
2

12
SPOD
CIS unit
SOCD
11
1

CN16 CN1
TX24-80R-LT-H1 TX25-80P-LT-H1

CND CNC CN13

PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H B26B-PHDSS-B CN1
B6B-PH-K-S S26B-PHDSS
9604S-35F
6 /B 1 2 /B SPFA 1 1 SPFA
VLED 35
5 +24V 2 4 +24V /SPFA 2 2 /SPFA
DGND 34
4 B 3 1 B /SPFMO0 3 3 /SPFMO0
VAS 33
3 A 4 3 A +5V 4 4 +5V
DGND 32
2 +24V 5 5 +24V GND2 5 5 GND2
VDS 31
1 /A 6 6 /A GND2
+24V
6
7
6 GND2
7 +24V
SCN DGND
SCN
30
29
179228-3 +24V 8 8 +24V
DGND 28
+5V 1 GND2 9 9 GND2
SPED
GND2
2
3
GND2
/SPFB
10
11
10 GND2
11 /SPFB
JNT LGATE
DGND
CLK
27
26
25
179228-3 SDSS 12 12 SDSS
CNB DGND 24
+5V
SCOV
1
2
PHNR-11-H+BU11P-TR-P-H
1 +5V 11
B22B-PHDSS-B
5 +5V
SPFB
SRRC
/SPFSET
13
14
15
13 SPFB
14 SRRC
15 /SPFSET
PWB CIS DATA
DGND
23
22
GND2 3 2 SPED 10 16 SPED LD 21
3 GND2 9 GND2 SPFS 16 16 SPFS DGND
179228-3 1 20
+5V
SPPD
1
2
4
5
6
+5V
SCOV
GND2
8
7
6
7
18
+5V
SCOV
VAREF
SPFC
SPPD
17
18
19
17 VAREF
18 SPFC
19 SPPD
cnt SCLK
DGND
19
18
GND2 2 GND2 /LST 17
3 SPLS2 20 20 SOCD
7 +5V 5 8 +5V DGND 16
SPED 21 21 SPED
SMP-02V-NC+SMR-02V-N
1 +24V 1
8
9
10
SPPD
GND2
+24V
4
3
2
14
3
11
SPPD
GND2
+24V
SPLS1
SCOV
22
23
22 SPLS2
23 SCOV
PWB SD0
DGND
SD1
15
14
13
2 /SDSS 2 11 /SDSS 1 15 /SDSS SPWS 24 24 SPLS1 DGND 12
9 +5V(POD) SPOD 25 25 SPOD SD2 11
4 GND2 SOCD 26 26 SPWS DGND 10
PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H 20 SPOD SD3 9
PHR-3
1 6 +5V(POD) 1 10 +5V DGND 8
+5V(POD)
GND2 2 5 GND2 2 22 SOCD SD4 7
CN12 CN2
SPOD 3 4 SPOD 3 6 GND2 S28B-PHDSS B26B-PHDSS DGND 6
3 +5V 4 12 +24V 1 /2_DBL- /2_DBL- 1 SD5 5
179228-3
2 SOCD 5 19 /SPFC 2 /2_DBL+ /2_DBL+ 2 DGND 4
+5V 1 13 +24V
1 GND2 6 3 2_DATA1- 2_DATA1- 3 SD6 3
SOCD 2 17 /SRRC 4 2_DATA1+ 2_DATA1+ 4 DGND 2
GND2 3 21 (NC)
5 2_DATA0- 2_DATA0- 5 SD7 1
PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H 2_DATA0+ 6
2 +24V
1 /SPFC
1
2
SPF 6
7
8
2_DATA0+
2_CLK-
2_CLK+
2_CLK-
2_CLK+
7
8
9 GND2 GND2(DGND) 9
PHNR-3-H+BU3P-TR-P-H
10 FRM_CCD2 FRM_CCD2 10
3 +24V
2 (NC)
1 /SRRC
1
2
3
PWB 11
12
CLK_CCD2
PAGE2
CLK_CCD2
PAGE2
ADD_CCD2
11
12
13
13 ADD_CCD2
14 TXD_CCD2 TXD_CCD2 14
SMR-03V-NC+SMP-03V-N 15 RES_CIS RES_CIS 15
RXD_CCD2 16
16 RXD_CCD2
1 VAREF 1 +3.3V 17
17 +3.3V
2 SPWS 2 +3.3V 18
CNA 18 +3.3V
3 GND2 3 +24V 19
B12B-PHDSS-B 19 +24V
179228-3 GND2(AGND) 20
1 VAREF 20 GND2
+12V 21
+5V 1 2 SPWS 21 +12V
GND2(AGND) 22
SPLS1 2 9 GND2 22 GND2
+5V 23
GND2 3 5 +5V 23 +5V
GND2(AGND) 24
4 SPLS1 24 GND2
+5V 25
179228-3 12 GND2 25 +5V
/CISSET 26
+5V 1 7 +5V 26 /CISSET
SPLS2 2 6 SPLS2 27 (NC)
GND2 3 10 GND2 28 (NC)
11 +24V
PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H
2 +24V
1 /SPFS
1
2
3 /SPFS
SCN
GY
SRA-21T-4

SRA-21T-4
GY GY
FG
PWB
SRA-21T-4
CN7
H3P-SHF-AA+B3P-SHF-1AA S6B-PH
+5V 1 1 +5V
GND2 2 2 GND2
OCSW 3 3 OCSW
4 +24V
5 /LED0
6 /LED1

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 55

 4
9 2 3 6 7

12

1 5 10 8
11

Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
SCOV SCOV DPSF cover switch DPSF cover open/close detection Transmission type Sensor
SPF – DPSF paper feed motor, paper Drives the paper feed roller and the Stepping motor
MOTOR transport motor transport roller. (DPSF)
SPFC SPFC DPSF paper feed clutch DPSF paper feed section roller ON/OFF Electromagnetic clutch
control
SRRC SRRC DPSF resist roller clutch DPSF resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic clutch
SPED SPED DPSF document set detector DPSF document presence detection Transmission type Sensor
SPPD SPPD DPSF document paper pass DPSF document paper pass detection 1 Transmission type Sensor
detector
SPFS SPFS DPSF document pickup solenoid DPSF document pickup Solenoid
SPLS1 SPLS1 DPSF document length detector 1 DPSF document length detection (Short) Transmission type Sensor
SPLS2 SPLS2 DPSF document length detector 2 DPSF document length detection (Long) Transmission type Sensor
SPFVR SPFVR DPSF document size (Width) DPSF document size (Width) detection Volume resistor Other
detection analog data detector detector
SOCD SOCD DPSF open/close detector DPSF unit open/close detection Transmission type Sensor
SPOD SPOD DPSF paper exit detector DPSF paper exit detection Transmission type Sensor

No. Name Function

1 CIS unit This is an image sensor unit to scan the back of a document. An image sensor (CIS: Contact
(AR-EF6 only) Image Sensor) of 7,196 pixels is employed. The scan resolution is 600dppi. Laser in the unit
are reflected onto the document. Lights reflected from the document are passed through the
lens to form images on the photoelectric conversion elements.
The photo energy is converted into electric energy.
2 Document resist roller This roller makes synchronization between the document lead edge and the scan start
position.
3 Document resist front sensor Detects that a document reaches the resist roller.
(SPPD)
4 Document set sensor Detects that a document is set on the tray.
5 Document feed roller Feeds documents.
6 Separation plate The rubber plate prevents against duplicated feed of documents.
7 Document length sensor Detects the document length to detect the document size.
(SPLS1/SPLS2)
8 Document width detection volume Detects the document width to detect the document guide.
9 DPSF motor Transports a document in the DPSF.
10 Document take-up roller Picks up a document and transport it to the document feed roller.
11 Document exit roller Discharges a document.
12 Document exit sensor (SPOD) Detects document exit.

C. Operational descriptions Document

Scan mode Magnification ratio
(1) Document feed, transport, scan, paper exit, and transport speed
operating speed Single surface scan/ 100% or above 220mm/sec
Duplex scan
The document fed by the take-up roller is sent through the paper
Single surface scan/ 101% or above 110mm/sec
feed roller and the transport roller to the resist roller section.
Duplex scan High image quality 110mm/sec
In the resist roller section, the document lead edge and the scan
start position are synchronized. The document is transported to
the scan section. After being scanned, the document discharged
to the document exit tray by the paper exit roller.
The document transport speed varies depending on the scan
mode and the scan magnification ratio as shown below.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 56

D. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
DSPF section 1 Take-up roller ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Note 1
2 Paper feed roller ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Note 1
3 Separation mylar lower
4 Separation pad ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Note 1
5 PS roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
6 Paper feed roller DPSF ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
7 Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ For cleaning, blow air.
Note 1: Replacement reference: Same as above or 2 years.

7
7

4
1
3
2
6
5

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement

No. Unit Parts
a DPSF unit 1 DPSF document stopper
solenoid a-4
2 DPSF document resist front a-3 a-8
sensor a-2 a-7
3 DPSF paper feed cover sensor a-6
a-21
4 DPSF document set sensor a-9
a-22
5 DPSF control PWB a-15 a-10
6 DPSF original length sensor 1 a-17
a-14
7 DPSF original length sensor 2 a-13
8 DPSF original width detection
volume PWB
9 Take-up roller ❍
10 Paper feed roller ❍
11 CIS unit a-5
12 CIS control PWB a-20
13 DPSF open sensor a-18 a-1
14 DPSF original exit sensor a-16 a-19
15 Paper feed roller DPSF ❍ a-11
16 DPSF motor
a-12
17 Resist roller
18 Resist roller clutch
19 DPSF original paper feed
solenoid
20 DPSF original paper feed clutch
21 Separation mylar lower
22 Separation pad ❍

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 57

a. DPSF unit 2) Remove the stopper solenoid.
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the scanner section.
2) Disconnect the connector.
3) Disconnect the grounding wire.

2)
1)

5) 1)

5)
3) 4) a-2. DPSF document resist front sensor
5)
a-3. DPSF paper feed cover sensor

3) AR-EF6 a-4. DPSF document set sensor

2) 1) Remove the upper transport unit cover.
1)
7) 2) Remove the sensors.
1)
6)
1)
4) Slide the DPSF unit to the bottom, then remove it.

3)
4)
2)
4) 4)
3)
3)
4)
1) 3)

2)
a-5. DPSF control PWB
2)
1) Remove the DPSF PWB, and remove the DPSF control PWB.

1)
2)

3)
a-1. DPSF document stopper solenoid 3) 4)
1) Remove the upper transport unit cover. 3)
4)

4)
2) 5)

1)

1)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 58

a-6. DPSF original length sensor 1 (DPSF original width detection volume installation)
a-7. DPSF original length sensor 2 <1> Extend the original guide to the maximum position.
1) Remove the OC cover. <2> Adjust so that the mark on the width detection pinion gear is
fitted with the mark on the volume mounting plate.

2)
1)

1)
3)
4)

3)

2) Remove the original length sensor cover, and remove the sen-
sor.

1)

2)
1)

4) <3> Fix the mounting plate with the screw.

∗ When the rotational volume sensor is replaced, the sensor value
must be adjusted to the paper size (mark on the tray).
4)
(Refer to the SIM 53-6 or 53-7.)
3)
a-9. Pick-up roller
a-10. Paper feed roller
3)
1) Remove the upper transport unit cover.
2) Remove the paper feed roller cover.
3) Remove the hook of each roller, and remove each roller.
a-8. DPSF original width detection volume PWB
1) Remove the OC cover. 1) 2)
2) Remove the original length sensor cover.
3) Remove the volume cover and remove the volume.

1)
2) 4)

1)

3)
4)

3)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 59

a-11. CIS unit a-13. DPSF open sensor
a-12. CIS control PWB 1) Remove the open sensor.
1) Remove the upper transport unit cover.
2) Remove the CIS unit.

1)

2)

a-14. DPSF original exit sensor

1) Remove the paper exit sensor.

1)
2)

∗ When the CIS unit is replaced, the CIS shading adjustment

must be performed. (Refer to the descriptions of ADJUST-
MENTS.)
3) Remove the harness, the cover, the earth wire, and remove
the CIS control PWB.
a-15. Paper exit roller
1) Remove the original paper feed unit.
2) Remove the paper exit roller gear.

5)

4)
2) 3)

For easy installation of the cover, slide the earth line to the con- 1)
nector side when attaching.
3) Remove the paper exit frame, and remove the paper exit
Note: The CIS unit is factory-adjusted before shipping.
roller.
Since these adjustments cannot be performed in the
market, never touch the following screws of the CIS unit. 5)
6)
a a a
3)

7)

2)
1)

3)
4)

3)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 60

a-16. DPSF motor 5) Remove the DPSF motor.
1) Remove the OC cover.
2)
2) Remove the DPSF lower cover. 1)

1) 1)
1) 3)
1) 1) 1)

2)
3)

1)

4)

a-17. Resist roller

a-18. Resist roller clutch
1) Remove the DPSF resist roller unit.
3) Remove the original paper feed unit.

2)
1) 2)
2)
2)
3)

2)

2)

2)

2) Remove the DPSF resist roller and the DPSF resist roller
2) clutch.

2)

4) Remove the DPSF drive unit.

1)
2)

3)

1)

2)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 61

a-19. DPSF original paper feed solenoid a-21. Separation mylar lower
a-20. DPSF original paper feed clutch a-22. Separation pad
1) Remove the DPSF paper feed unit. 1) Remove the upper transport unit.
2) Remove the DPSF paper guide. 2) Loosen the screw, and remove the separation pad unit.

1)

1)

2)

3) Remove the screw, and remove the separation plate and the
front separation plate.
3) Remove the DPSF pickup unit.
4) Remove the separation Mylar lower, and the separation pad.

2)

1)
1) 1)

4) Remove the original paper feed solenoid and the DPSF origi- 8. Operation panel section
nal paper feed clutch.

3)

2) 4)

1)

A. General
This section describes various types of settings, display and oper-
ation.
The LCD display section is controlled by the MFP CONTROL
PWB.
The touch panel, operation keys and LED display are controlled by
the SCANNER CONTROL PWB.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 62

B. Major parts and signal functions

ORSLED
OCSW

2
ORS PD
/CCFT
TOUCH

LCD

1
CN1 CN16
TX25-80P-LT-H1 BOARD TO BOARD TX24-80R-LT-H1
+24V 1 1 +24V
GND2 2 2 GND2
+12V 3 3 +12V
GND2 4 4 GND2
+5V 5 5 +5V
+5V 6 6 +5V SCN
SCN GND2
+3.3V
7
8
7 GND2
8 +3.3V
GND2
GND2
9
10
9 GND2
10 GND2 PWB
JNT RES_CCD
TXD_CCD1
11
12
11 RES_CCD
12 TXD_CCD1
CLK_CCD1 13 13 CLK_CCD1
CN4
20FLS-SM1-GB-TB
PWB FRM_CCD1
/1_DBL+
14
15
14 FRM_CCD1
15 /1_DBL+
1 GND2(Vss) 1_DATA1+ 16 16 1_DATA1+
2 (NC) CN1 1_DATA0+ 17 17 1_DATA0+
CN1
3 (NC) 30FMZ-BT 30FMN-BT 1_CLK+ 18 18 1_CLK+
4 (NC) XH 30 1 XH PDSEL1 19 19 PDSEL1
5 (NC) /YL 29 2 /YL PD 20 20 PD
6 GND2(Vss) /XL 28 3 /XL SEG0 21 21 SEG0
7 LCD D3 YH SEG2 22 22 SEG2
27 4 YH
8 LCD D2 /CCFT /F1 23 23 /F1
26 5 /CCFT
9 LCD D1 /F3 24 24 /F3
+24V 25 6 +24V
TH 25 25 TH
10 LCD D0 INVERTER GND2 24 7 GND2
/CCFT 26 26 /CCFT
11 GND2(Vss) TH 23 8 TH
lcdS- 27 27 lcdS-
12 LCD-VEE GND2 22 9 GND2
13 LCD-VCC
-LVDS lcdM- 28 28 lcdM-
LcdD3- 21 10 LcdD3-
lcdCP1- 29 29 lcdCP1-
14 Lcd DIS LcdD3+ 20 11 LcdD3+
15 GND2(Vss)
PWB LcdD2- 19 12 LcdD2-
lcdCP2- 30 30 lcdCP2-
(NC) 31 31 (NC)
16 CP2 LcdD2+ 18 13 LcdD2+
LCD-VEE 32 32 LCD-VEE
17 GND2(Vss) LcdD1- 17 14 LcdD1-
LcdD0- 33 33 LcdD0-
18 CP1 LcdD1+ 16 15 LcdD1+
lcdD1- 34 34 lcdD1-
19 LCD M LcdD0- 15 16 LcdD0-
LcdD2- 35 35 LcdD2-
20 LCD S LcdD0+ 14 17 LcdD0+
LcdD3- 36 36 LcdD3-
LVD-VEE 13 18 LVD-VEE
GND2 37 37 GND2
LCD-VCC 12 19 LCD-VCC
/XL 38 38 /XL
CN2 LcdDIS 11 20 LcdDIS
FFC-4PIN 04FM-1.0ST XH 39 39 XH
GND2 10 21 GND2 /STMPS 40 40 /STMPS
/XL 4 1 /YL LcdCP2- 9 22 LcdCP2- +24V 41 41 +24V
XH CN7
3 2 XH LcdCP2+ 8 23 LcdCP2+
YH 2 GND2 42 42 GND2 S6B-PH H3P-SHF-AA+B3P-SHF-1AA
3 YH GND2 7 24 GND2 BL BL
+12V 43 43 +12V +5V 1 1 +5V
/XL 1 4 /XL GY GY
LcdCP1- 6 25 LcdCP1- GND2 44 44 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
LB LB
LcdCP1+ 5 26 LcdCP1+ OCSW 3 3 OCSW
+5V 45 45 +5V RD
LcdM- 4 27 LcdM- +24V 4
CN3 +5V 46 46 +5V BR RD
/LED0 5
S02(8.0)B-BHS-L LcdM+ 3 28 LcdM+ GND2 47 47 GND2 LB BR
/LED1 6
1 /CCFT LcdS- 2 29 LcdS- +3.3V 48 48 +3.3V LB
2 HV LcdS+ 1 30 LcdS+ GND2 49 49 GND2
GND2 50 50 GND2
/CL1 51 51 /CL1
RXD_CCD1 52 52 RXD_CCD1
CN1 CN3 ADD_CCD1 53 53 ADD_CCD1
T24FAZ-SMT-TF 24FMN-BTK
PAGE1 54 54 PAGE1
(NC) 24 1 (NC)
CN2 /1_DBL- 55 55 /1_DBL-
PHR-6 (NC) 23 2 (NC)
B6B-PH-SM3-TB 1_DATA1- 56 56 1_DATA1-
BR /BZR 22 3 /BZR
PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0 1_DATA0- 57 57 1_DATA0-
LB (NC) 21 4 (NC)
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1 FRDY 20 5 FRDY 1_CLK- 58 58 1_CLK-
PL
PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2 GND2 19 6 GND2 PDSEL0 59 59 PDSEL0
BL
+5V 4 4 +5V GND2 18 7 GND2 PDSEL2 60 60 PDSEL2
BR
PD 5 5 PD GND2 17 8 GND2 /KEYIN 61 61 /KEYIN
GY
GND2 6 6 GND2 /F3 16 9 /F3 SEG1 62 62 SEG1
/F2 15 10 /F2 /F0 63 63 /F0
/F1 14 11 /F1 /F2 64 64 /F2
MFP /F0 13 12 /F0 FRDY 65 65 FRDY
OPE SEG2 12 13 SEG2 /BZR 66 66 /BZR
SEG1 11 14 SEG1 67 lcdS+
lcdS+ 67
SEG0 10 15 SEG0
PWB /KEYIN 9 16 /KEYIN
LcdM+ 68 68 LcdM+
LcdCP1+ 69 69 LcdCP1+
+5V 8 17 +5V
+5V 18 +5V LcdCP2+ 70 70 LcdCP2+
7
GND2 6 19 GND2 lcdDIS 71 71 lcdDIS
PD 5 20 PD LCD-VCC 72 72 LCD-VCC
+5V 4 21 +5V lcdD0+ 73 73 lcdD0+
PDSEL2 3 22 PDSEL2 lcdD1+ 74 74 lcdD1+
PDSEL1 2 23 PDSEL1 lcdD2+ 75 75 lcdD2+
PDSEL0 1 24 PDSEL0 lcdD3+ 76 76 lcdD3+
GND2 77 77 GND2
YH 78 78 YH
/YL 79 79 /YL
/STSET 80 80 /STSET

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 63

 Signal
Code Name Function/Operation Type Note
name
LCD LCD unit Display the each memu and the information.
TOUCH Touch panel Various adjustments and setting operation are
performed.
ORSLED Document size detection light Generates the document size detection signal.
emitting PWB
ORSPD Document size detection light Generates the document size detection signal.
receiving PWB
OCSW OCSW DPSF open/close detector Document size detection trigger Transmission type Sensor
/CCFT /CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight CCFT cool CRT

No. Name Function

1 LVDS/INV PWB Generates the LCD display signal and a high voltage for the backlight.
2 Operation control PWB Controls the display operation panel.

C. Maintenance and parts replacement 3) Remove the document size detection PWB (Light emitting
side)
No. Unit Parts
a Original detection 1 Original size detection PWB 1)
1)
unit (Light emitting side) 1)
2 Original size detection PWB
(Light receiving side)
b Operation panel 1 LVDS PWB
unit 2 MFP operation PWB
2)
3)

a-1
a-2

b-2

b-1
a-2. Original size detection PWB (Light receiving side)
b 1) Remove the operation panel lower cabinet.
2) Remove the original size detection PWB (Light receiving side)
a. Original detection unit
a-1. Original size detection PWB (Light emitting side)
2)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2)
1)
2) Remove the original detection unit (Light emitting side). 2)

3)
3) 2)

b. Operation panel unit

4)
1) Remove the original exit tray.

1)
2)

1)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 64

2) Remove the scanner left cabinet. b-1. LVDS PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the LVDS
PWB.

2)
1)
1)

3) Remove the scanner right cabinet.

b-2. MFP operation PWB

2) 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
1) 2) Remove the MFP operation PWB

1) 2)
1)
4) Remove the operation panel lower cabinet. 1)
2)
2)

2)
2)

3)

1)
2)
1)
1)

5) Remove the harnesses.

1)

1)

2)
1)

6) Remove the operation panel unit.

1)

2)
1)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 65

9. Filter
A. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Filters 1 Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement

No. Unit Parts
a 1 Ozone filter ▲
a-1. Ozone filter
1) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet cover, and remove the
ozone filter.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 66

10. Drive section
A. Maintenance and parts replacement
(1) Maintenance list
✕ Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) ❍ Clean ▲ Replace ∆ Adjust ✩ Lubricate ❏ Move position

When
Unit name No. Part name 100K 200K 300K 400K Remark
calling
Drive section 1 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)

(2) Maintenance and parts replacement a. Drive unit

No. Unit Parts 1) Remove the screw, and remove the left door.
a Drive unit 1 Gears ✩
2 Paper cassette paper feed clutch
3 Paper transport clutch
4 Resist roller clutch
b 1 Drum motor
2 Main motor

a-1

a-1

a-1

2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

a-4
b-1
a-3

b-2
a-2

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 67

3) Remove the screw, and remove the slide rail. ∗ Remove the resist roller unit, and apply grease to the bottom
section of the PS front roller section brake.

PS front roller
section

Apply grease FLOIL G484

4) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the main
a-2. Paper cassette paper feed clutch
drive unit.
a-3. Paper transport clutch
a-4. Resist roller clutch
1) Remove the main drive unit.
2) Remove the parts.

a-1. Gears
1) Remove the main drive unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the drive cover.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the drive cover.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 68

4) Remove the connector, the paper cassette paper feed clutch 11. Power section
unit, the paper transport clutch unit, and the resist roller clutch
unit. A. Maintenance and parts replacement
No. Unit Parts
a Power unit 1 Reactor PWB (200V only)
2 Power PWB
b 1 Main switch
2 Cooling fan motor
3 Fuse PWB
4 High voltage PWB

5) Remove the parts. b-2

b-4

a-1
b-3
b-1
a-2
a

a. Power unit
1) Remove the main switch mounting plate.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
b-1. Drum motor
b-2. Main motor
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet.

2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the drum
motor and the main motor.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 69

4) Remove the connectors. a-2. Power PWB
1) Remove the power unit.
1) 1) 2) Remove the connector, the screw, and the PWB supporter,
and remove the power PWB.

1)

1)

5) Remove the screw, and remove the right noise cover. Remove
the connector and the screw, and remove the power unir.

3)
b-1. Main switch
1) 2) 1) Pull out the No. 1 paper feed tray unit, and push up and
4) remove the front door.

2)
1)
2)

2)
2)
2)

a-1. Reactor PWB (200V only)

1) Remove the power unit.
2) Release the lock, and pull out the left door. Remove the
2) Remove the connector and the PWB supporter, and remove screw, and remove the front cover right.
the reactor PWB.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 70

3) Remove the screw, and remove the main switch mounting b-3. Fuse PWB
plate. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

4) Remove the connector, and remove the main switch.

2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the inlet
mounting plate.

1)
1)

4)
3)

b-2. Cooling fan motor

1) Remove the power unit. 2)
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the duct
holding cover. 3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the fuse
PWB.

2)

1)

1)

b-4. High voltage PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU
PWB unit.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the cooling fan motor.

∗ When installing the fan, check the indication arrow and note the
fan direction.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 71

3) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the high a-2. PCU PWB
voltage PWB. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

1)

3)
1)
2)

1)

1)

12. PWB
A. Maintenance and parts replacement
2) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the PCU
No. Unit Parts PWB.
a 1 MFP controller PWB
∗ When replacing the PCU PWB, replace the EEPROM on the
2 PCU PWB PCU PWB which is to be replaced.
3 Mother PWB

1)
1) 2)
1)
3)
1)
a-1 1) 1)
2) 1)
a-2 a-3
1) 1)

1)
1)
1)
1) 2)
2)
a-3. Mother PWB

3) 2)
a-1. MFP controller PWB 1)
1) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP controller PWB unit.
5) 6)
5)
4)
3) 6)
5) 5) 5)
7)
5) 5)

1) 5)
2) 8) 5)

1)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MAINTENANCE AND DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 7 - 72

[8] ADJUSTMENTS 8) After completion of the job, apply screw lock.

No. Section Adjustment item

1 Process A Doctor gap adjustment
section B MG roller main pole position adjustment
C High voltage output adjustment
2 Image A Adjustments <1> LSU right angle
check, on the engine adjustment
adjustment side <2> Print off-center 20 50mm
adjustment
<3> Each tray resist 20 50mm
amount setting
<4> Front/rear and left/right
void amount setting
B Adjustment <1> OC scan distortion
on the adjustment
scanner side <2> SPF height adjustment
<3> SPF scan distortion
adjustment
<4> OC scan magnification
ratio adjustment
<5> SPF scan
magnification ratio
<6> OC scan lead edge
adjustment
<7> SPF scan lead edge
adjustment
<8> Original off-center <Adjustment specification>
adjustment Ambient
3 Scanner A OC scan distortion adjustment Specification
temperature
section B Vertical image distortion balance Both sides Position at 20 - 50mm 0.45±0.03mm 5 - 30°C
adjustment
C Vertical image distortion balance B. MG roller main pole position adjustment
adjustment This adjustment is performed in the following cases:
D Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion • When developer is scattered.
adjustment
• When an uneven image is produced.
E Height adjustment of original detection light
1) Remove the developer cartridge and the developing unit from
emitting unit
the machine.
F Original size detection photo sensor check
2) Remove the DV cover and the developer from the developing
G Original size detection photo sensor
unit.
adjustment
H Image density adjustment 3) Remove the DVF handle and put the developing unit on a flat
surface.
I DSPF width detection adjustment
4) Bind a string to a needle.
1. Process section 5) Hold the string and move the needle toward the MG roller.
(Since the MG roller diameter is small, use of a clip cannot
A. Doctor gap adjustment make an accurate adjustment.)
This adjustment is performed in the following cases: 6) With the needle tip 2 - 3 mm apart from the MG roller surface,
• When developer is scattered. mark the point on the MG roller in the elongated line of the
• When an uneven image is produced. needle.
(Keep the needle and the MG roller apart from each other.)
1) Remove the developer cartridge and the developing unit from
the machine. 7) Measure the distance from the marking position to the P sur-
face of the developing unit, and check that the distance is
2) Remove the DV cover and the developer from the developing
within the specified range.
unit.
If the distance is not within the specified range, perform the adjust-
3) Remove the DVR cover, the DVF handle, the idle correction
ment in the following procedures.
plate assembly, and the HG gear 22T, insert a thickness
gauge (0.46mm) as shown in the figure below, and check that 8) Loosen the fixing screw of the main pole fixing plate.
the clearance is within the specified range.
If the clearance is not within the specified range, adjust the doctor
gap in the following procedures.
4) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.
5) Insert the thickness gauge (0.46mm) again as shown in the
figure below.
6) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction and tighten
the fixing screw.
7) Check the developing doctor gap. If the clearance is within the
specified range, fix the screw with screw lock.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 1

9) Move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction and adjust. C. High voltage output adjustment
(1) Developing bias output check and setup
1) Remove the rear cabinet to allow checking of the high voltage
monitor output pin.
2) Execute the simulation of the target high voltage.
(See the table below.)
3) Select the mode to be set with 10-key, and press START key.
4) Enter the set value with 10-key and press START key. The set
value is outputted for 30 sec.
5) Apply a high voltage tester between the measurement pin and
the frame.
Note: Take care not to short the measuring pin and the frame.
6) The unit stops after 30 sec of output.

<Adjustment specification>
Specification
Marking position Measure from 54.2mm
the P surface above.

Default Set range Measurement High voltage

Monitor output Set value pin probe
voltage impedance
MC grid MAIN GRID (SIM 8-2) AUTO AE mode -650V±5V 645 200~900 CN2-7 100MΩ
CHARACTER Text mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
MIX Text/Photo mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
PHOTO Photo mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
PRINTER Printer mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
FAX Fax mode -650V±5V 645 200~900
Transfer current FRONT Front 42PPM : 267 0~620
(THV+ (SIM 8-6) 31PPM : 220
BACK Back 42PPM : 310 0~620
31PPM : 267
Developing bias DV BIAS AUTO AE mode -500V±5V 485 0~745 CN2-1 100MΩ
(SIM 8-1) CHARACTER Text mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
MIX Text/Photo mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
PHOTO Photo mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
PRINTER Printer mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
FAX Fax mode -500V±5V 485 0~745
PLUS Positive bias +150V±5V 150 0~255
Separation voltage SHV FRONT Front +1.25V±0.1V 42PPM : 160 0~375 CN2-3 10MΩ
(SIM 8-17) 31PPM : 120
BACK Rear +1.25V±0.1V 42PPM : 160 0~375
31PPM : 120
Transfer voltage THV -800V±10V 780 0~1250 CN2-5 10GΩ
(SIM 8-17)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 2

2. Image check, adjustment A. Adjustments on the engine side
(1) Copy image check <1> LSU right angle adjustment
1) Place a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the reference posi- Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
tion of the OC, and make a copy. ment.
2) Place a test chart (made as shown below) face-down on the • Nothing special
(D)SPF, set the document guide, and make a copy. (Single → Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
Single) ment.
3) Place a test chart (made as shown below) face-up on the • Print off-center adjustment
DSPF, set the document guide, and make a copy. (Duplex → • Print lead edge adjustment
Single) • Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
Making of SFP test chart 1) Execute SIM64-1.
a. Use standard paper of A3. 2) The print pattern "71" is printed.
b. Mark to the full width of the paper so that each void/image 3) Check the output print.
loss can be checked. 4) Loosen two fixing screws of the LSU unit
c. At that time, mark so that the front /rear and the top/bottom (M4 screws which are fixing the LSU and the top plate).
can be identified. 5) Adjust the LSU fixing position with the adjustment memory as
d. Draw a center line in the paper transport direction to identify the reference.
the off center. 6) Tighten two fixing screws of the LSU unit.
7) Print again in the grid pattern and check the print.
8) Repeat procedures 4) to 7) until the specification is satisfied.
SIMULATION 64-1
Center line SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
0.TRAY SELECT :1 1.PRINT START
2.PRINT PATTERN : 87 3.DENSITY : 1
4.MULTI
6.LEVEL
:1
:1
5.MODE :1
7.DUPLEX : 1
1
Standard paper of A3

4) Check each output copy.

(Image distortion/ each void/ lead edge position/ Off-center/
Magnification ratio/ Density/ Dirt, etc.)
5) If there is no problem in copy images, the image check is com-
pleted.
(2) Division of adjustment positions
1) If there is any problem in checked images, perform self-print
and the adjustment positions (scanner side/ engine side) are
divided.
*: If there is any problem in the copy image and no problem in
the self print, an adjustment on the scanner side is required.
If there is any problem on the copy image and any problem in
the self print, an adjustment on the engine side is required.
(3) Adjustment procedures <Right angle check method>
Perform the adjustment procedures as described below. <1> Make self-print of pattern 71.
1 LSU right angle adjustment SIM64-1: Pattern “71” <2> Draw a line perpendicular to the sub scan direction (paper
2 Print off-center adjustment SIM50-10 transport direction) with a square.
3 Each tray resist amount setting SIM51-2 The point of intersection of the perpendicular line and the
4 Front/rear and left/right void SIM50-1 horizontal line is regarded as the starting point.
amount setting <3> Measure distance A (between the self-printed line and the
5 OC scan distortion adjustment perpendicular line drawn with a square) at a position of
6 SPF height adjustment 220mm from the starting point.
7 SPF scan distortion SIM51-2 <4> Check that distance A satisfies the following specification.
adjustment
8 Scan magnification ratio SIM48-1 A
A
9 SPF/DSPF scan magnification SIM48-1
ratio
Print
10 OC scan lead edge adjustment SIM50-1 lead edge 220mm
11 SPF scan lead edge SIM50-6
adjustment
12 Original off-center adjustment SIM50-12

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 3

 <2> Print off-center adjustment
Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
a b ment.
• LSU right angle adjustment (If there is no distortion in self print,
Print lead edge the adjustment is not required.)
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
ment.
• Each tray resist amount setting
• Print lead edge adjustment
<Specification> • Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
Measuring 1) Execute SIM50-10.
Specification Set value
point 2) Set the paper feed tray and the magnification ratio for the
Print Self print θ = 90° ± 0.13° θ changes about 0.25 adjustment.
distortion pattern 71 degrees for 1 scale of 3) After entering the adjustment values, press START key, and
adjustment adjustment. (A shifts printing is started.
about 1mm.) 4) Check the off-center (distance from the paper edge) of the
printed copy. Repeat procedure 2) until the specification is
satisfied.

SIMULATION 50-10
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 100
3. TRAY1
6. TRAY4
50 4. TRAY2
50 7. BPT
50
50
5.TRAY3
8.ADU
50
50
2

Measurement Set value

Adjustment position Specification
reference Default Range
Tray 1 Tray 1 Output pattern 0±1.5mm 50 0 - 99 Set value 1: 0.1mm shift
Tray 2 Tray 2 center line
Tray 3 Tray 3
Tray 4 Tray 4
BPT Manual feed
ADU Duplex
• For the duplex mode (Single → Duplex), add 10 to the above set value.
• When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center, decrease the value.
• When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center, increase the value.

Print lead edge

b

<3> Each tray resist amount setting 3) Press [START] key.

When [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
∗ This adjustment is executed when there is any lead edge vari-
ation or skew for each tray. paper feed and copying are performed.
4) Adjust the resist quantity so that paper is transferred stably.
Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
ment. SIMULATION 51-2
• LSU right angle adjustment (If there is no distortion in self print, RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START.
the adjustment is not required.) 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
2. TRAY1 50 3. TRAY2 50 4. DESK 50
• Print off-center adjustment
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
5. BPT 50 6. ADU 50
7. SPF(HIGH) 50 8. SPF(LOW) 50
1
ment.
• Print lead edge adjustment
• Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
1) Execute SIM 51-2.
2) Enter the resist adjustment value with 10-key.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 4

 Default (Front/rear frame direction void area adjustment)
Set
Item AR- AR- Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is
range
M312U M420U 7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and
2 TRAY1 Tray 1 resist 0 - 99 65 60 press [START] key.)
adjustment value Front frame void area = 3.5mm Rear frame void area = 3.5mm
3 TRAY2 Tray 2 resist 55 50 If, as shown above, the front and the rear void areas are not even,
adjustment value use SIM 50-5 to adjust the image off-center position.
4 DESK Desk resist 55 50
adjustment value SIMULATION 50-1
5 BPT Manual tray resist 60 55 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START.
adjustment value 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 100
6 ADU ADU resist 55 50
adjustment value
3. RRCA 50 4. RRCB
6. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD) 15
50 5. DENB 30
7. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE) 20
2
8. DENA 50 9. FR_VOID 30
When the set value is increased, the warp amount of paper is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
<Specification>
amount of paper is decreased.
Set
<4> Front/rear and left/right void amount setting Set position Specification
value
Items which must have been completed before this adjust- Lead edge void Output pattern A = 4.0mm or Shift of
ment.
adjustment “71” print void less 0.1mm
• LSU right angle adjustment (If there is no distortion in self print, “LEAD EDGE quantity A (A and B total: for set
the adjustment is not required.) VOID (DENA)” 8.0mm or less) value 1.
• Print off-center adjustment Rear edge void Output pattern B = 4.0mm or
• Resist amount adjustment adjustment “71” print void less
• Print lead edge adjustment “TAIL EDGE VOID quantity B (A and B total:
(DENB)” 8.0mm or less)
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
ment. Side edge void Output pattern C and D total:
adjustment “71” print void 8.0mm or less
• OC scan lead edge adjustment
“FRONT/REAR” quantity C + D
• SPF scan lead edge adjustment
1) Execute SIM 50-1.
(Lead edge image loss/void area adjustment)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment value (LEAD EDGE)
and the paper lead edge void adjustment value (DENA) as fol-
lows. Print
(Standard set value) lead edge

Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEDA: 15)

Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35)
∗ Set LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the adjustment value of LEAD,
and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
∗ Set DENA to 35. (Enter 35 as the adjustment value of
DENA, and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
B. Adjustment on the scanner side
2) Make a copy at the normal ratio (100%) and check the lead <1> OC scan distortion adjustment
edge void area and the image loss. (Enter 100 as the set value Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
of the copy magnification ratio (MAGNIFICATION), and press ment.
[START] key.) • Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
3) If the adjustment result is not satisfactory, perform the follow- print, no need to adjust.)
ing procedures. Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
∗ If the lead edge void are is not 3.5mm: ment.
Change the adjustment value of RRCB and perform the • OC scan off-center
adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCB and
• OC scan lead edge adjustment
press [START] key.) (1msec/step)
1) Make a test chart as shown below. (Make a self-print pattern
∗ If the lead edge image loss is not 1.5mm:
71.)
Change the adjustment value of RRCA and perform the
adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCA and
press [START] key.)
(Shift for the adjustment value change: 0.2mm/step)
(Rear edge void area adjustment)
Adjust so that the rear edge void area is 3.5mm. (Change the
adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment) 2) Make a copy from the table glass, and check it.
Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust- At that time, set the test chart correctly. If it is set in a distorted
ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.) position, the adjustment cannot be made correctly.
When the adjustment value is changed, the image position is 3) If the output value is not in the specified range, perform the fol-
shifted in the front/rear frame direction. lowing adjustment.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 5

4) Adjust the distortion.
Use a level gauge to check that the scanner is installed hori-
zontally.
Make a copy and check it. If there is any distortion as shown in
Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, loosen the scanner fixing screw (M4 x 8) and
the cam A fixing screw (M3 x 12) and adjust.

Fixing screw
(M4 x 8)

[Fig. 1] [Fig. 2] b
First copy image First copy image a

Image Image
a
Paper Paper
Difference Difference a b

B b

<Specification>
A Adjustment
Specification
• In the case of Fig. 1 position
Shift cam A in the direction A by the difference in the copy image. Distance between 3-point contact Hinge
For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm. dove (Reference (Left front/Left rear/Right adjustment set
plate) and table front when viewed from screw
After shifting, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) of cam A and
glass the front)
make a copy again, and check the copy again to insure that there
is no distortion. <3> SPF scan distortion adjustment
• In the case of Fig. 2 Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
Shift cam A in the direction B by the difference in the copy image. ment.
For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm. • Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
print, no need to adjust.)
After shifting, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) of cam A and
make a copy again, and check the copy again to insure that there • OC scan distortion adjustment
is no distortion. • SPF height adjustment
After adjustment, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) and the scan- Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
ner fixing screw (M4 x 8). ment.
∗ If the above adjustment does not fix the problem, perform the • SPF off-center
MB rail adjustment. • SPF lead edge adjustment
∗ After the OC distortion adjustment, perform SIM53-8 SPF scan- • Front/rear and left/right void amount setting
ning position automatic adjustment. 1) Make a test chart as shown below. (Print a self-print pattern
<2> SPF height adjustment 71.)
Items which must have been completed before this adjust- 2) Make a copy with DSPF.
ment. 3) Check that it is in the specified range.
• Nothing special
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
ment.
• Nothing special
1) Close the (D)SPF.
2) Check to confirm that the dove and the reference plate in the
figure below are in contact with the table glass (point a) and
the side guide (point b). (Place copy paper under the dove and
pull it out.) If they are not in contact, adjust with the set screw.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 6

4) Execute SIM51-2 to check the SPF set value.
SIMULATION 48-1
Change the set value of the SPF resist amount to the following
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START.
value. 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 100
7 SPF (HIGH) 60
8 SPF (LOW) 75
3. CCD(MAIN)
6. CIS(MAIN) 50
50 4. CCD(SUB) 50 5. SPF(SUB) 50 2

SIMULATION 51-2
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START. <Specification>
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
Adjustment Adjustment
2. TRAY1 50 3. TRAY2 50 4. DESK 50 Specification
position value
5. BPT 50 6. ADU 50
7. SPF(HIGH) 50 8. SPF(LOW) 50
1 Main scan direction ±0.5% SIM48-1 Set value 1:
5) Though the SPF resist amount is the above value, if there is magnification ratio (3, 4) 0.1% change
any distortion in SPF scan, adjust the SPF installing position in CCD (MAIN)
the following procedures. Sub scan direction
6) Loosen the nut which is fixing the adjustment set screw of the magnification ratio
hinge R, and adjust the adjustment set screw. CCD (SUB)
7) Make a copy again, and check again that the value is in the <5> SPF scan magnification ratio
specified range. Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
8) Tighten the nut to fix the adjustment screw. ment.
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
print, no need to adjust.)
• OC scan distortion adjustment
• SPF scan distortion adjustment
• OC scan magnification ratio
• SPF height adjustment
b Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
ment.
a • SPF scan lead edge adjustment
• Original off-center adjustment
1) Set a chart of print pattern 70 on SPF/DSPF.
2) Make a copy. (In the case of DSPF back copy, make a single
copy in the duplex mode.)
b
3) Check that the output paper satisfies the specifications.
4) If the value is not within the specified range, execute SIM48-1
a (item 5, 6).
5) Make a copy again, and check that the output paper satisfies
<Specification> the specifications.
Specification Adjustment position
Skew feed Within ±3mm Hinge R adjustment screw
∗ After the SPF distortion adjustment, perform SIM53-8 SPF
scanning position automatic adjustment.
<4> OC scan magnification ratio adjustment
Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
ment.
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
print, no need to adjust.)
• OC scan distortion adjustment
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
ment.
• OC scan lead edge adjustment
• Original off-center adjustment
1) Place a print of self-print pattern (A3 or WLT) 70 or a scale on
the table glass.
2) Close the original cover, and make a copy.
3) Check that the value is within the specification.
4) If the value is not within the specified range, execute SIM48-1
(item 3, 4).
5) Make a copy again and check again that the value is within the
specification.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 7

 6) Select "5: DEN-B" so that the white spot in the latter half of
SIMULATION 48-1 copy (rear edge void) is within 4.0mm. Change the value with
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START. 10-key and perform the copy adjustment.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 100 (The rear void adjustment is changed by the step of 0.1mm.)
3. CCD(MAIN)
6. CIS(MAIN) 50
50 4. CCD(SUB) 50 5. SPF(SUB) 50 2 • When the rear edge void is too small, increase the value.
• When the rear edge void is too great, decrease the value.
Select other than 0 - 2, 7) Select "3: RRC-A," change the value with 10-key, and adjust
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
and press [START] key. the document scan start position.
8) Press [CA] key to cancel the simulation.
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
SIMULATION 50-1
3. CCD(MAIN)
50 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
Select 1, and 2. MAGNIFICATION 100
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.
3. RRCA 50 4. RRCB
6. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD) 15
50 5. DENB 30
7. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE) 20
2
8. DENA 50 9. FR_VOID 30
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
<Specification>
Select 0, and Press [START] key or Item Content Default Set range
press [START] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
3 RRCA Document scan start 50 0 ~ 99
SIMULATION 48-1 position adjustment
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
4 RRCB Resist roller clutch 50 0 ~ 99
(FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1 ON timing adjustment
5. BPT value
(ABOVE +10 : DUPLEX MODE)
5 DENB Rear edge void 35 0 ~ 99
Select 2, and
Press [START] key or quantity adjustment
press [START] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
value
SIMULATION 48-1 6 IMAGE LOSS Lead edge image 15 0 ~ 99
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT.
(MAGNIFICATION)
(LEAD) loss quantity set
INPUT 25-400(%) 100 value
7 IMAGE LOSS Side image loss 20 0 ~ 99
(SIDE) quantity set value
<Specifications> 8 DENA Lead edge void 35 0 ~ 99
Adjustment Adjustment quantity set value
Specifications
position value 9 FR_VOIDFR Void quantity 35 0 ~ 99
SPF sub scan direction ±0.5% SIM 48-1 Set value 1: adjustment value
magnification ratio (5, 6) 0.1% change
SPF (SUB) Output result
<Document>
DSPF main scan Rear edge void Lead edge void
Document set reference
(back) direction
magnification ratio Adjust
CIS (MAIN) Adjust
with
RRCA.
with
∗ The SPF main scan direction magnification ratio is common with RRCB.
Image loss
OC. FR void
(SIDE)

<6> OC scan lead edge adjustment

Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
ment.
• Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
Paper transport direction Image loss
print, no need to adjust.) (LEAD)

• OC scan distortion adjustment *: For output, select the right side tray.

• SPF scan distortion adjustment <7> SPF scan lead edge adjustment
• OC scan magnification ratio adjustment Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust- ment.
ment. • Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
• SPF scan lead edge adjustment print, no need to adjust.)
• Original off-center adjustment • SPF scan distortion adjustment
1) Set an original on the original table. • SPF scan lead edge adjustment
2) Enter SIM 50-1. • SPF magnification ratio adjustment
3) Make a copy.
4) Select the number to be set on the right of the LCD, and per-
form the adjustment of each item.
5) Select "4: RRC-B" so that the distance between the paper lead
edge and the copy image lead edge is within 4.0mm. Change
the value with 10-key and perform the copy adjustment.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 8

Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust- <8> Original off-center adjustment
ment. Items which must have been completed before this adjust-
• SPF/DSPF off-center adjustment ment.
1) Make a copy of a chart which indicates the image loss amount • Adjustment on the engine side (If there is no problem in self
of each side with SPF/DSPF. print, no need to adjust.)
2) Execute SIM50-6 and change the values. • OC scan distortion adjustment
• SPF scan distortion adjustment
SIMULATION 50-6
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS START. • OC scan magnification ratio
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START • SPF scan lead edge adjustment
2. MAGNIFICATION 100
3. SIDE1 50 4. SIDE2 50 Items which must be executed after completion of this adjust-
5. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE1 15 2 ment.
6. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE1 20
7. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE2 15 • Nothing special
8. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE2 20 1) Set an original on the original table.
9. REAR LOSS SIDE1 0 10. REAR LOSS SIDE2 0
2) Execute SIM 50-12.
<Set values 1> 3) Select the paper feed tray and the magnification ratio.
4) After entering the adjustment value, pres START key, and
Item Content Defauult Set range
printing is started.
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray - 1~5
selection 5) Check the off-center (distance from the paper lead edge) of
the printed copy. Repeat procedure 2 until the printed copy
1 COPY START Copy start (Initial - -
satisfies the specifications.
value)
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification - 25 ~ 200
a
ratio setup
(25 - 400%)
3 SIDE 1 Document front 50 0 ~ 99 Print lead edge
scan start position b
adjustment
4 SIDE 2 Document back 50 0 ~ 99
scan start position
adjustment
5 IMAGE LOSS Front lead edge 15 0 ~ 99
(LEAD) SIDE 1 image loss set value
Specification ± 1.5mm
6 IMAGE LOSS Front side image 20 0 ~ 99
(SIDE) SIDE 1 loss set value SIMULATION 50-12
7 IMAGE LOSS Back lead edge 15 0 ~ 99 ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START.
(LEAD) SIDE 2 image loss set value 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 100
8 IMAGE LOSS Back side image 20 0 ~ 99
(SIDE) SIDE 2 loss set value
3. PLATEN 50 4. SPF SIDE1 50 5. SPF SIDE2 50
2
9 REAR LOSS Front rear edge 0 0 ~ 20 Measurem Set value
SIDE1 image loss set value Adjustment position ent Specification
Default Range
10 REAR LOSS Back rear edge 0 0 ~ 20 reference
SIDE2 image loss set value Original PLATEN OC mode Copy As shone in 50 0 – 99 Set value
off-center SPF SPF front output the table 1: 0.1mm
<Display values 1> SIM50-12 SIDE1 surface center line below. shift
Normal display NOW COPYING adjustment
SPF SPF back
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
SIDE2 surface
Jam JAM adjustment
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. • For the duplex mode (Single → Duplex), add 10 to the above set
<Set values 2> value.
• When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center,
1 TRAY1
decrease the value.
2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 • When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center,
increase the value.
4 TRAY4
5 Manual feed <Specifications>

∗ With the above + 10, the SPF enters the duplex mode (DD), Machine (OC mode) Single ±1.5mm
making duplex copy. Duplex ±1.7mm
<Set values 3> Overall (DSPF) Single S - S ±2.8mm
Single D - S ±3.5mm
Set range 25 - 200%
Duplex S - D ±3.0mm
Duplex D - D ±3.5mm

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 9

3. Scanner section B. Vertical image distortion balance adjustment
(Copy lamp unit installing position
A. OC scan distortion adjustment
adjustment)
(MB-B rail height adjustment)
1) Insert the front/rear mirror base drive wire into the frame
• This adjustment requires a high-level preciseness. groove and press and fix it with the wire holder. At that time,
It is easier to perform the scanner unit distortion adjustment pre- do not tighten the wire fixing screw. Change the direction of
viously described. the lamp positioning plate. (F and R)
Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustment must 2) Push the copy lamp unit onto the positioning plate, and tighten
have been completed. the wire fixing screw.
• LSU right angle adjustment
1) Make a test chart as shown below. (Print a self-print pattern
71.)

2) Make a copy from the table glass, and check it.

At that time, set the test chart correctly. If it is set in a distorted
position, the adjustment cannot be made correctly.
3) If the output value is not in the specified range, perform the fol-
lowing adjustment.
4) Remove the front cabinet in front of the scanner, and check
that installing position of the MB rail.
5) Loosen the screw at the right of the MB rail to adjust.

<Note for assembling the copy lamp unit>

After fixing, manually shift the copy lamp unit a few times to check
that it moves smoothly.

C. Vertical image distortion balance adjustment

(No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing position
adjustment)
This adjustment is to adjust the parallelism of the mirror base to
the OPC drum surface and the original surface.
1) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley to bring mirror base
B into contact with mirror base positioning plate.
If, at that time, the front frame side and the frame side of mirror
<Specifications> base B are brought into contact with the mirror base position-
ing plate simultaneously, the parallelism is correct and there is
Measurement
Specification Set value no need for adjustment.
point
OC scan Angle θ in the θ = 90°±0.13° 1 scale = about
distortion above figure 0.25°shift in θ
adjustment

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 10

D. Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion 4) Loosen the fixing screw of the front or the rear frame mirror
adjustment [Winding pulley position base drive pulley.
adjustment] •If La < Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in
This adjustment is executed in the following cases: direction B.
• When the mirror base drive wire is replaced. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
•If La > Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in
• When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced.
direction A.
• When a copy shown below is made.
(Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)

La Lb Rear side
A
Paper
exit
direction B
Original Copy

1) Set A3 white paper on the original table as shown below.

Adjust screw
Front side

5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.

6) Perform procedures 1) through 3).
7) If La is not equal to Lb, perform procedures 4) and 5).
A3 white paper If La = Lb, the adjustment is completed.
Repeat procedures 1) through 6) until La = Lb.

E. Height adjustment of original detection light

emitting unit
1) Execute SIM 41-3.
Glass holding plate 2) Open the original cover. Press the original detection light-emit-
Fit the paper edge and
the glass holding plate edge
ting unit gradually with your finger to check the height at which
OCSW display on the LCD is highlighted.
2) With the original cover open, make a normal (X 1.0) copy.
3) Measure the black distance at the lead edge and the rear
edge of the copy paper.

32±0.5mm

Paper exit direction

La : Lead edge black background section
Lb : Rear edge black background section
3) Open the original detection light-emitting unit gradually to
If La = Lb, the procedures 4) through 7) are not required.
check the height at which OCSW display turns to the normal
state.
4) If the heights are out of the specified range in procedures 2)
and 3), adjust the height of the original detection light emitting
unit by shifting the adjustment screw.
SIMULATION 41-3
PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY.
OCSW
PD1[128]: 200 PD2[128]: 200
PD3[128]: 50 PD4[128]: 52
PD5[128]: 51 PD6[128]: 50
PD7[128]: 52

5) After completion of adjustment, press the original detection

light emitting unit fully downward with your finger and release
it. Check that the original detection light-emitting unit moves
up smoothly.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 11

<Specification> H. Image density adjustment
Specification Adjustment position The image density adjustment is required for the following copy
Original size 32±0.5mm Height adjustment SIM 41-3 quality mode by using the simulation.
detection position screw There are two methods; the collective adjustment and the individ-
ual adjustment of the copy quality mode.
F. Original size detection photo sensor check
• Copy mode
1) Execute SIM 41-1.
Individual
2) Put A3 (or WLT) paper on the table glass, and check that all Copy quality mode Collective Adjustment
adjustment
the sensor displays (except for OCSW) on the LCD are high-
lighted. Binary Auto mode SIM46-2
value Character mode SIM46-9
3) Gradually move the unit to the left, and check that the high-
mode Character/Photo mode SIM46-10
lighted sensor displays turn off one by one sequentially.
Photo mode SIM46-11
SIMULATION 41-1
PD SENSOR CHECK.. (1) Copy mode
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
a. Test chart setting
(The detected sensors are highlighted.)
1) Place a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table as
shown below.
G. Original size detection photo sensor 2) Place several sheets of A3 (11 x 17) white paper
adjustment (Sharp’s specified paper) on the test chart at the rear refer-
1) Execute SIM 41-2. ence.
∗ At that time, check that the scanner mirror base is at the
home position.
2) Open the document cover. Select 1 without placing paper on
the table glass, and press START.
3) When COMPLETE is displayed on the LCD, press CUSTOM
SETTING to return to the initial screen.
4) Place A3 (or WLT) paper on the table glass, select 2 and
press START.
When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is normally
completed.
∗ If ERROR is displayed, the error PD sensor is displayed.
SIMULATION 41-2 UKOG-0162FCZZ
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START.
(PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.)
1. NO ORIGINAL
2. A3 ORIGINAL
1
Select 1 and press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 41-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
NO ORIGINAL ... COMPLETE (or " ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
A3 ORIGINAL ... INCOMPLETE

Test chart comparison

Select 1 and press [START] key.

UKOG- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
0162FCZZ
(In case of an error)
DENSITY No.
SIMULATION 41-2
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
UKOG- 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
NO ORIGINAL ... COMPLETE 0089CSZZ
A3 ORIGINAL ... COMPLETE (or " ERROR at PD1 PD2...") DENSITY No.
KODAK GRAY 1 2 3 4 19 A
SCALE
<Specification> SHARP
Specification Adjustment CORPORATION
Document size detection photo COMPLETE SIM 41-2 MADE IN JAPAN
sensor adjustment

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 12

 b. Density adjustment procedure <2> Individual adjustment of each copy quality mode
<1> Collective adjustment of two or more copy quality modes This adjustment is used when a different density level for different
Normally this adjustment is performed with SIM 46-2. In this copy quality mode is required. SIM 46-5 to -7 and SIM 46-9 to -11
are used.
method, two or more copy density adjustments in different modes
can be adjusted collectively. 1) Execute the simulation corresponding to the copy quality
1) Execute SIM 46-2. mode to be adjusted.

(Binary value mode) SIMULATION 46-9

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
Quality mode Linked simulation data 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. EXP LEVEL 1
AE3.0 (AE) 3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1
CH3.0 (Character) SIM46-9 6. 2.5. 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50
MIX3.0 (Character/Photo) SIM46-10
PH3.0 (Photo) SIM46-11 Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START. SIMULATION 46-9
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
2. EXP LEVEL 1 3. 1. 0
3. AE 3.0 50 4. CH 3.0 50
1 50
5. MIX 3.0 50 6. PHOTO 3.0 50
Select 1, and
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Select other than 0 - 2, Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.

SIMULATION 46-9
SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). NOW COPYING.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
3. AE 3.0
50 Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
Select 1, and press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
SIMULATION 46-9
Or copying is terminated.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). NOW COPYING.
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
5. MFT

Select 0, and Press [START] key or Select 2, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key. press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 46-2 SIMULATION 46-9

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 3-11, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY) (EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1 3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 1
5. MFT 6. 2.5. 7. 3.0 8. 3.5
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0
Select 2, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key. 2) Press the COPY button to make a copy
Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below. If not,
SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 3-6, AND PRESS START.
change the adjustment value.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) For the auto mode, there is only one adjustment value. For the
3. AE 3.0 4. CH 3.0 1 other modes, the adjustment value for each density level must be
5. MIX 3.0 6. PHOTO 3.0
adjusted.

I. DSPF width detection adjustment

2) Press the COPY button to make a copy.
Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below. (1) When replacing DSPF unit
If not, change the adjustment value. 1) Use SIM53-7 to enter the value indicated on the side of the
right hinge of the DSPF unit.
• Adjustment spec
SIMULATION 53-7
Chart Adjustment Chart Adjustment SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
Mode EXP. 1. MAX. POSITION: 66
No. level No. level
2. POSITION 1: 456
Character 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied 3. POSITION 2: 713 1
Character/ 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied 4. MIN. POSITION: 791
Photo
Photo 3 3 Copied 2 Not copied Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Auto 3 Copied 2 Not copied
If the copy density is too light, increase the adjustment value. SIMULATION 53-7
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND
If the copy density is too dark, decrease the adjustment value. PRESS START.
Adjustment range: 30 - 170 1. MAX. POSITION
66

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 13

 (2) When replacing the original width detection
volume.
Execute SIM53-6 to perform the machine DSPF original tray size
adjustment.
1) Extend the guide to MAX. position, select 1, and press
START. When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM
SETTING to return to the initial screen.
2) Move the guide to A4R position, select 2, and press START.
When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to
return to the initial screen.
3) Move the guide to A5R position, select 3, and press START.
When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to
return to the initial screen.
4) Move the guide to MIN. position, select 4, and press START.
When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is completed.
If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) - 4), repeat the adjustment
again.

SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION
2. POSITION 1
3. POSITION 2
4. MIN. POSITION
1
Select 1, and
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MAX. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR")

Select 2, and
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR")

Select 3, and
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR")

Select 4, and
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MIN. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR")

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ADJUSTMENTS 8 - 14

[9] SIMULATIONS
1. Entering the simulation mode
Enter the copy mode and perform the following procedures.
[P] [*] [C] [*] [Main code] [START] [Sub code] [START]

A. Switching the simulation mode

Press [CUSTOM SETTINGS] to return to the code entry screen.

B. Canceling the simulation mode

Press CA key to cancel the simulation mode.

C. Simulation list
Code Code
Function (Content) Function (Content)
Main Sub Main Sub
1 1 Used to check the operations of the scanner 8 1 Used to check and adjust the developing bias
(reading) unit and its control circuit. voltage in each print mode and its control circuit.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and 2 Used to check and adjust the main charger grid
detectors in the scanner (reading) unit and their voltage in each print mode and its control circuit.
control circuits. 6 Used to check and adjust the transfer charger
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic current and its control circuit.
document feeder unit and its control circuit.
17 Used to set and check the transfer roller output.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and
9 1 Used to check the operation under load (clutches
detectors in the automatic document feeder unit and
and solenoids) in the duplex section and their control
their control circuits.
circuits.
3 Used to check the operation under load in the
2 Used to check the sensors and detectors in the
automatic document feeder unit and their control
duplex section and their control circuits.
circuits.
10 0 Used to check the operation of the toner motor and
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and
its control circuit.
detectors in the finisher and their control circuits.
(Note)
3 Used to check the operation under load in the
Do not execute this simulation with toner in the toner
finisher and their control circuits.
hopper.
6 Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the finisher. If executed, toner will enter the developing section,
(Used to adjust the alignment plate (jogger) stop causing an overtoner trouble. Be sure to remove
position in the finisher paper width direction. The toner motor from the toner hopper before execution.
adjustment is made by changing the alignment plate
14 0 Used to cancel the self diag "U2/PF" troubles.
home position in the paper width direction by
software.) 16 0 Used to cancel the self diag "U2" trouble.
10 Used to adjust the console finisher (AR-FN7). 17 0 Used to cancel the self diag "PF" trouble (when copy
is inhibited by the host computer).
20 Used to check the mail bin stacker (AR-MS1) sensor.
21 Used to check the operations of the mail bin stacker 21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
loads. 22 1 Used to check the print count in each section and in
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and each operation mode.
detectors in the paper feed section (desk paper feed) (Used to check the maintenance timing.)
and their control circuits. 2 Used to check the number of total misfeed and
3 Used to check the operation under load in the paper troubles. (If the number of misfeed is considerably
feed section (desk paper feed) and their control great, the machine must be repaired. The misfeed
circuits. rate is obtained by dividing this count by the total
counter value.)
5 1 Used to check the operations of the lamps and LCD
on the operation panel and their control circuits. 3 Used to check the misfeed position and the number
2 Used to check the operations of the heater lamp and of misfeed at that position.
its control circuit. (If the number of misfeed is considerably great, the
machine must be repaired.)
3 Used to check the operations of the copy lamp and
its control circuit. 4 Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
6 1 Used to check the operation under load (clutches 5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit
and solenoids) in the paper transport system and (section).
their control circuits. 6 Used to print the list of adjustments and setup data
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and (simulations, counters).
its control circuit. 7 Used to display the key operator code.
7 1 Used to set the aging conditions. (Used when the customer has forgotten the key
6 Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. operator code.)
8 Used to set Enable/Disable of warm-up time display.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 1

 Code Code
Function (Content) Function (Content)
Main Sub Main Sub
22 8 Used to check the number of use of the staple, 26 41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio
DSPF, and scanner (reading) unit. auto selection function (AMS) in the pamphlet copy
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of mode.
each paper feed section. 52 Used to set Enable/Disable of count-up when white
10 Used to check the system configuration paper is discharged. (White paper means the index
(option, internal hardware). paper (without copying) in the OHP index paper
12 Used to check the misfeed position and the number insertion mode, the front/rear covers (without
of misfeed at that position. copying) in the cover insertion mode, and white
paper in the duplex exit mode (CA, etc.).)
(If the number of misfeed is considerably great, the
machine must be repaired.) 27 1 Used to set the operation specifications when a
13 Used to display the process cartridge data. communication trouble occurs between the host
computer and MODEM (machine side).
24 1 Used to clear the misfeed counter, misfeed history,
(When a communication trouble occurs between the
trouble counter, and trouble history.
host computer and MODEM (machine side), self
(After completion of maintenance, these counters
diag display (U7-00) is displayed and setup is made
must be cleared.)
to inhibit or allow printing.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (print quantity) of
5 Used to enter the machine tag No.
each paper feed section.
(This function allows to check the machine tag No.
3 Used to clear the number of use of the staple, DSPF, from the computer.)
and the scanner (reading) unit.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and
4 Used to reset the maintenance counter. detectors in the paper feed, paper transport, and
5 Used to reset the developer counter. (The developer paper exit sections and their control circuits.
counter of the DV unit installed is reset.) 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and
6 Used to reset the copy counter. detectors in the paper feed section and their control
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter and the toner circuits. (The operations of the sensors and
cartridge counter. detectors in the paper feed section can be monitored
(Perform when the OPC drum is replaced.) on the LCD display.)
9 Used to clear the printer print counter. 40 1 Used to check the operations of the manual paper
(After completion of maintenance, this counter must feed tray paper size detectors and their control
be cleared.) circuit.
(The operations of the manual paper feed tray paper
11 Used to reset the drum rotation time, toner motor
size detectors can be monitored on the LCD display.)
rotation time, and developer rotation time counters.
The developer counter of the DV unit installed is 2 Used to adjust the detection level of the manual
reset. paper feed tray paper width detector.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the main drive 7 Used to enter the adjustment value of the manual
section (excluding the scanner (reading) section) paper feed tray width detection level.
and the toner density sensor. 11 Used to check the width detection level of the multi
(The toner density sensor output can be monitored.) purpose tray paper width detector.
2 Used to initialize the toner density when replacing 12 Used to adjust the width detection level of the multi
developer. (Auto adjustment) purpose tray paper width detector.
26 3 Used to set the specification mode of the auditor. 41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size
Setup must be made according to the use condition sensor and the related circuit.
of the auditor. (The operation of the document size sensor can be
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and monitored on the LCD display.)
the maintenance counter. 2 Used to adjust the detection level of the document
6 Used to set the specification according to the size sensor.
destination. 3 Used to check the operations of the document size
18 Used to set Enable/Disable of toner save operation. sensor and the related circuit.
(This simulation is enabled only in Japan and UK (The output level of the document size sensor can be
versions. (Depends on SIM 26-6 (Destination) monitored on the LCD display.)
setup). For the other destinations, user program P22 43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation
allows to make the similar setup.) mode.
30 Used to set the operation mode conforming to the 44 1 Used to set Enable/Disable of each correction
CE mark (Europe standards). operation in the image forming (process) section.
(For flickers when driving the fusing heater lamp.) 4 Used to set the target image (reference) density level
35 Used to set whether the trouble history of SIM 22-4 is in the developing bias voltage correction.
displayed as one-time trouble or continuous troubles 9 Used to check the result (main charger grid voltage
when two or more number of a same trouble developing bias voltage, laser power, etc.) of
occurred. correction (process correction) in the image forming
38 Used to stop printing when developer life is expired. section. (By this simulation, the correction operation
can be checked.)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 2

 Code Code
Function (Content) Function (Content)
Main Sub Main Sub
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode 63 1 Used to check the shading correction result.
(binary, auto, text, text/photo, photo mode). (The shading correction data are displayed.)
An adjustment with this simulation affects all the 2 Used to execute shading.
copy density adjustment values. 7 Used to adjust the white plate scan start position in
9 Used to adjust the print density for each density level shading white correction.
(display value) in the copy mode (binary-Text mode).
64 1 Used to check the operations of the printer section
A desired print density can be set for each density (self printing).
level (display value). (The print pattern, paper feed mode, print mode,
10 Used to adjust the print density for each density level print quantity, density can be changed optionally.)
(display value) in the copy mode (binary-Text/Photo
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section)
mode). A desired print density can be set for each detecting position.
density level (display value).
2 Used to check the result of the touch panel (LCD
11 Used to adjust the print density for each density level
display section) detecting position adjustment.
(display value) in the copy mode (binary-Photo
(The coordinates are displayed.)
mode). A desired print density can be set for each
density level (display value). 67 2 Used to check the parallel I/F operation of the
printer.
17 Used to adjust the CCD/CIS shading reference
(This simulation is made only in the production site
value.
and not in the market. It requires a special tool.)
18 Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in each
11 Used to set Enable/Disable of the parallel I/F select
copy mode.
signal of the printer.
19 Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in the auto
copy mode and to set the density detection area, and D. Details of simulations
to set the image process mode.
20 Used to adjust the copy density correction in the Main code 1
SPF/DSPF copy mode for the document table copy
mode. This adjustment is made so that the copy 1-1
density becomes the same as that in the document
Purpose Operation test, check
table copy mode.
Function Used to check the operations of the scanner
48 1 Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio (main
(Content) (reading) unit and its control circuit.
scan direction, sub scan direction).
Section Scanner (reading)
5 Used to adjust the scan motor speed.
Item Operation
50 1 Used to adjust the document scan position, the Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad.
image print position, and the void area (image loss). Procedure
(A similar adjustment can be made with SIM 50-2
(simple method).)
SIMULATION 1-1
2 Used to adjust the document scan position, the SCANNER CHECK. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
image print position, and the void area (image loss). 1. HIGH SPEED
(This simulation allows simple procedure of the 2. MIDDLE SPEED

similar adjustment to SIM 50-1.)

3. LOW SPEED
4. TOP SPEED
1
6 Document scan position adjustment. (DSPF)
7 Document scan position adjustment Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
(Simple method) (DSPF) Stops when scan is completed.
10 Used to adjust the print image center position.
SIMULATION 1-1
(Adjusted for each paper feed section.) SCANNER CHECK. EXECUTING...
12 Used to adjust the reading image center position. 1. HIGH SPEED
2. MIDDLE SPEED
(Adjusted for each document mode.)
3. LOW SPEED 1
51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on the 4. TOP SPEED
resist roller in each section (machine paper feed,
duplex paper feed, SPF paper feed).
<List of set values>
(This adjustment is required when the print image
position varies or when paper jam occurs frequently.) 1 High speed operation 168mm / sec
53 6 Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level. 2 Middle speed operation 110mm / sec
7 Used to enter the adjustment value of SPF width 3 Low speed operation 55mm / sec
detection. 4 Top speed operation 220mm / sec
60 1 Used to check the ICU (DRAM) operation (read/
write). (SIMM memory, Onboard memory)
61 1 Used to check the operations of the LSU unit.
2 Used to adjust laser power (absolute value) in the
copy mode.
4 Used to adjust laser power (absolute value) in the
printer mode.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 3

1-2 <List of display values>

Purpose Operation test, check SSET SPF sensor

SOCD Open sensor
Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
(Content) detectors in the scanner (reading) unit and their SCOV Paper feed cover sensor
control circuits. SDD Document set sensor
Section Scanner (reading) SPSD Document resist front sensor
Item Operation SPCD Document exit sensor
Operation/ The sensor display is highlighted when it is SWDn Document width sensor
Procedure detected. (n 1 (Inside) – 6 (Outside))
SLDn Document length sensor
SIMULATION 1-2 (n 1 (Inside) – 2 (Outside))
SCANNER SENSOR CHECK.. OSSET OS installation sensor
MHPS
STSET Stamp unit installation sensor
SWD_LEN SPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SWD_AD SPF document width detection volume output AD
<List of display value> value

MHPS Optical system home position

2-3
Main code 2 Purpose Operation test, check
Function Used to check the operation under load in the
2-1 (Content) automatic document feeder unit and their control
circuits.
Purpose Operation test, check
Section DSPF
Function Used to check the operations of the automatic
Item Operation
(Content) document feeder unit and its control circuit.
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad.
Section DSPF
Procedure
Item Operation
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad.
Procedure SIMULATION 2-3
SPF LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START.
1. MOTOR(H) 2. MOTOR(L)
SIMULATION 2-1 3. SDSS 4. SPFS 5. SPFC 6. SPSC 7. STMPS 2
SPF AGING TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
1. HIGH SPEED
Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
2. LOW SPEED 2
SIMULATION 2-3
Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop. SPF LOAD TEST. EXECUTING...
1. MOTOR(H) 2. MOTOR(L)
3. SDSS 4. SPFS 5. SPFC 6. SPSC 7. STMPS
2
SIMULATION 2-1
SPF AGING TEST. EXECUTING...
1. HIGH SPEED <List of set values>
2. LOW SPEED 2
1 Motor high speed rotation
2 Motor low speed rotation
<List of set values> 3 Document stopper solenoid
4 Document feed solenoid
1 High speed operation
5 Document feed clutch
2 Low speed operation
6 Document resist clutch
7 Stamp solenoid
2-2
Purpose Operation test, check
Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
(Content) detectors in the automatic document feeder unit
and their control circuits.
Section DSPF
Item Operation
Operation/ The sensor display is highlighted when it is
Procedure detected.

SIMULATION 2-2
SPF SENSOR CHECK.
SSET SOCD SCOV SDD
SDD
SPSD
SPSD SPOD
SPOD SWD6 SWD5
SWD5
SWD4
SWD4 SWD3
SWD3 SWD2
SWD2 SWD1
SWD1
SLD2
SLD2 SLD1
SLD1 CISSET STSET
STSET
SWD_LEN:
SWD_LEN: 2100 SWD_AD:
SWD_AD: 600

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 4

 Main code 3 FLE Lift lock sensor
FLLLS Lift lower limit sensor
3-2 FULS Lift upper limit sensor
FFE Bookbinding clock sensor
Purpose Operation test, check
FFES Bookbinding paper sensor
Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
(Content) detectors in the finisher and their control circuits. FFRHPS Bookbinding roller HP sensor
FFHPS Bookbinding HP sensor
Section Finisher
FFPS Bookbinding position sensor
Item Operation
FSLS Paper surface sensor
Operation/ The display is highlighted when detected.
Procedure FBES Tray paper sensor
FOBHPS Paper exit belt HP sensor
Finisher (AR-FN6) FAS Alignment tray sensor
SIMULATION 3-2
FRJHPS Alignment HP sensor R
FINISHER SENSOR CHECK. FFJHPS Alignment HP sensor F
PID SCID SCID2 PPD FARHPS Bundle roller HP sensor
SCPD POD T1PF T2UP
T2DN T2PD STSP STLS
FPHPS Paddle HP sensor
STNC STHP JFHP JRHP FES Entry port sensor
PSHP STUHP XXXX STTHP1
STTHP2 DOPD DSW1 DSW2 • The following units are added when the punch unit is installed to
24VM MMLK the console finisher:
Console finisher (AR-FN7) FPE Punch motor encoder
SIMULATION 3-2 FPSHPS Punch side register HP
FINISHER SENSOR CHECK. FPUC Punch connection detection
FSSS FJS FFDSW FTCS FFDS
FSPS FSUC FSS FSTHPS FSHPS FLE FLLLS
FPDS Punch dust sensor
FULS FFE FFES FFRHPS FFHPS FFPS FSLS FPDSS4 Punch side register sensor 4
FBES FOBHPS FAS FRJHPS FFJHPS FARHPS FPHPS FPDSS3 Punch side register sensor 3
FES
(FPE) (FPSHPS) (FPUC) (FPDS) (FPDSS4) (FPDSS3) (FPDSS2)
FPDSS2 Punch side register sensor 2
(FPDSS1) (FPTS) Devices in ( ) are added when the punch unit is installed. FPDSS1 Punch side register sensor 1
FPTS Punch timing sensor
<List of display values>
Finisher 3-3
STHP Stapler HP detection
Purpose Operation test, check
POD Tray 2 paper exit detection
Function Used to check the operation under load in the
SCID Staple compiler paper entry detection
(Content) finisher and their control circuits.
PID Paper entry detection
Section Finisher
T2PD Tray 2 paper empty detection
Item Operation
T2DN Tray 2 lower limit detection
Operation/ The display is highlighted when detected.
T2UP Tray 2 upper limit detection
Procedure
JRHP Jogger R HP
JFHP Jogger (F) HP
SCID2 Staple compiler paper entry detection 2 SIMULATION 3-3
FINISHER LOAD TEST. SELECT 1- , AND PRESS START.
STTHP2 Staple rotation HP detection 2
STTHP1 Staple rotation HP detection 1 2
STUHP Staple shift HP detection
PSHP Pusher HP detection Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
PPD Paper hold return detection
DSW2 Staple replacement door open detection
SIMULATION 3-3
DSW1 Compiler jam cancel door open detection FINISHER LOAD TEST. EXECUTING...
24VM 24V power supply 2
T1PF Tray 1 full detection
STSP Stapling ready detection
<List of display values>
STLS Cartridge inside spare staple empty detection
STNC Cartridge empty detection Finisher
DOPD Interface unit door open detection 1 T2S Tray 2 solenoid
MMLK Main drive motor lock detection 2 T2OM Paper exit motor
SCPD Staple compiler paper empty detection 3 SPS Stopper solenoid
Console finisher 4 SCRS Roller pressure release solenoid
FSSS Stapler safety switch 5 PPS Rear edge h folding solenoid
FJS Joint switch 6 SCGS Compiler gate solenoid
FFDSW Front door switch 7 STTM Staple rotation motor
FTCS Upper cover sensor 8 STUM Stapler shift motor
FFDS Front door sensor 9 MM Main drive motor
FSPS Self prime sensor 10 EVM Elevator motor
FSUC Stapler connection detection 11 STM Staple motor
FSS Staple sensor 12 JRM Jogger motor rear
FSTHPS Stapler HP sensor 13 JFM Jogger motor front
FSHPS Slide HP sensor 14 PSM Pusher motor

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 5

 Console finisher <List of set values>
1 FFC Folding clutch Initial
Adjustment content Range 1STEP
2 FPSM Puncher side register motor value
3 FPNM Punch motor 1 Saddle binding position 0~400 200 0.0707mm
4 FLM Shift motor adjustment
5 FFSM Stapler motor 2 Saddle folding position 0~400 200 0.0525mm
6 FSM Slide motor adjustment
7 FRJM Alignment motor R 3 Front alignment position 0~20 10 0.367mm
8 FFJM Alignment motor F adjustment
9 FAM Bundle exit motor 4 Rear alignment position 0~20 10 0.367mm
10 FPM Paddle motor adjustment
11 FFM Transport motor 5 Staple rear one-position 0~200 100 0.04374mm
binding position adjustment
6 Staple front one-position 0~200 100 0.04374mm
3-6 binding position adjustment
Purpose Adjustment 7 Staple 2-position binding 0~200 100 0.04374mm
Function Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the finisher center adjustment
(Content) (AR-FN6). (Used to adjust the alignment plate 8 Staple 2-position binding pitch 0~99 50 0.04374mm
(jogger) stop position in the finisher paper width adjustment
direction. The adjustment is made by changing the 9 Punch center adjustment (Slide 47~53 50 1mm
alignment plate home position in the paper width direction)
direction by software.) 10 Punch hole position adjustment 0~99 50 0.105mm
Section Finisher (Paper feed direction)
Item Operation (Values stored in EEPROM)
Operation/ Enter the adjustment value with 10 digit key pad
Procedure and press START key. The jogger moves to LT
position (Inch series) or A4 position (AB series) 3-20
according to the entered value, and stops there.
Purpose Operation test, check
SIMULATION 3-6 Function Used to check the mail bin stacker (AR-MS1)
FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 40-60, AND PRESS START. (Content) sensor.
Section Mail bin stacker
50 Item Operation
Operation/ The display is highlighted when detected.
Procedure
Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
Stops when the operation is terminated.
SIMULATION 3-20
SIMULATION 3-6 MAIL BOX SENSOR CHECK.
FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT. MOVING... MPFD1
MPFD1 MPFD2 MPFD3 MPFD4 MPFD5 MPFD6 MPFD7
MPFD8 MPID MPPD1 MPPD2 MPPD3 MPPD4 MPPD5
M24VM MDD1 MDOPD

50
<List of display values>
(Stored on PCU PWB)
MPFD1 Tray 1 paper full detection
MPFD2 Tray 2 paper full detection
3-10 MPFD3 Tray 3 paper full detection
MPFD4 Tray 4 paper full detection
Purpose Adjustment
MPFD5 Tray 5 paper full detection
Function Used to adjust the console finisher (AR-FN7).
(Content) MPFD6 Tray 6 paper full detection
Section Finisher MPFD7 Tray 7 paper full detection
Item Operation MPFD8 Tray 8 paper full detection
Operation/ Setting of the console finisher is performed. MPID Interface unit paper entry detection
Procedure MPPD1 Paper transport sensor 1
MPPD2 Paper transport sensor 2
SIMULATION 3-10 MPPD3 Paper transport sensor 3
CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING. SELECT 1-10, AND PRESS START. MPPD4 Paper transport sensor 4
1. SADDLE POSITION 2. FOLDING POSITION MPPD5 Paper transport sensor 5
3. FRONT ADJUST
4. REAR ADJUST 5. STAPLE REAR M24VM 24V power supply
6. STAPLE FRONT 7. STAPLE BOTH MDD1 Jam cancel door
8. STAPLE PITCH 9. PUNCH CENTER
10. PUNCH HOLE
1 MDOPD Interface unit door

Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.

SIMULATION 3-10
CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1. FOLDING POSITION
200

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 6

3-21 <List of display values>

Purpose Operation test, check 1-tray desk

DDRS Desk door sensor
Function Used to check the operations of the mail bin
(Content) stacker loads. DSPD2 Desk cassette 2 remaining paper quantity sensor
Section Mail bin stacker DSPD1 Desk cassette 1 remaining paper quantity sensor
Item Operation DCSS24 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 4
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. DCSS23 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 3
Procedure DCSS22 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 2
DCSS21 Desk cassette 2 paper rear edge sensor 1
SIMULATION 3-21 DLUD2 Desk cassette 2 upper limit sensor
MAIL BOX LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-8, AND PRESS START.
DPED2 Desk cassette 2 paper sensor
1.MM
2.GSOL1 2 DPFD3 Desk paper transport sensor 3
3.GSOL2 DCSS14 Desk cassette 1 paper rear edge sensor 4
4.GSOL3
5.GSOL4
DCSS13 Desk cassette 1 paper rear edge sensor 3
6.GSOL5 DCSS12 Desk cassette 1 paper rear edge sensor 2
7.GSOL6 DCSS11 Desk cassette 1 paper rear edge sensor 1
8.GSOL7
DLUD1 Desk cassette 1 upper limit sensor
DPED1 Desk cassette 1 paper sensor
Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
DPFD2 Desk paper transport sensor 2
MCSS4 MP tray size detection 4
SIMULATION 3-21
MAIL BOX LOAD TEST. EXECUTING... MCSS3 MP tray size detection 3
1.MM MCSS2 MP tray size detection 2
2.GSOL1 2 MCSS1 MP tray size detection 1
3.GSOL2
4.GSOL3 MCSPD MP tray remaining quantity detection
5.GSOL4 MCLUD MP tray upper limit detection
6.GSOL5
7.GSOL6
MCPED MP tray paper empty detection
8.GSOL7 DPFD1 MP tray transport detection

<List of set values>

4-3
1 Main motor
Purpose Operation test, check
2 Gate solenoid 1
Function Used to check the operation under load in the
3 Gate solenoid 2
(Content) paper feed section (desk paper feed) and their
4 Gate solenoid 3
control circuits.
5 Gate solenoid 4
Section Paper feed
6 Gate solenoid 5
Item Operation
7 Gate solenoid 6
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad.
8 Gate solenoid 7 Procedure

SIMULATION 4-3
Main code 4 DESK LOAD TEST. SELECT 1- , AND PRESS START.
1.
4-2 2. 2
Purpose Operation test, check
Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
(Content) detectors in the paper feed section (desk paper
feed) and their control circuits. SIMULATION 4-3
DESK LOAD TEST. EXECUTING...
Section Paper feed
1.
Item Operation 2.
2
Operation/ The display is highlighted when detected.
Procedure
<List of set values>

(1-tray desk) 1-tray desk

SIMULATION 4-2 1 DLUM2 Desk lift-up motor 2
DESK SENSOR CHECK. 2 DLUM1 Desk lift-up motor 1
DDRS DPFD1 DPFD2 DPFD3
3 MCLUM Desk multi lift-up motor
MCLUD DLUD1 DLUD2 MCSPD
DSPD1 DSPD2 MCPED DPED1 4 DPFCL Desk paper transport clutch
DPED2 MCSS1 MCSS2 MCSS3 5 DPCL2 Desk paper feed clutch 2
MCSS4 DCSS11 DCSS12 DCSS13
DCSS14 XXXXXX DCSS21 DCSS22
6 DPCL1 Desk paper feed clutch 1
DCSS23 DCSS24 XXXXXX 7 MCPCL Desk multi paper feed clutch
8 DMM Desk transport motor

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 7

 Main code 5
SIMULATION 5-3
COPY LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
5-1 1.COPY LAMP 1
2.CIS
Purpose Operation test, check
Function Used to check the operations of the lamps and
Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
(Content) LCD on the operation panel and their control
Stops after 10sec.
circuits.
Section Operation (display, operation) SIMULATION 5-3
COPY LAMP TEST. EXECUTING...
Item Operation
Operation/ All LEDs are ON. The LCD contrast changes Max/
1.COPY LAMP
2.CIS
1
Procedure Min every 2sec.

SIMULATION 5-1 Main code 6

6-1
Purpose Operation test, check
After 6.0 sec Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop. Function Used to check the operation under load (clutches
(Content) and solenoids) in the paper transport system and
their control circuits.
SIMULATION 5-1
Section Paper transport (paper exit, switchback, transport)
Item Operation
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad.
Procedure

SIMULATION 6-1
5-2 FEED OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1-17, AND PRESS START.
2.HLPR 3.DCPR 4.MM 5.DM 6.DSB_FW
Purpose Operation test, check 7.DSB_RV 8.CPFC 9.RRC 10.TRC 11.FGS_FIN
Function Used to check the operations of the heater lamp 12.LUM 13.TRC_DSK 14.PSPS
(Content) and its control circuit. 15.MCM 16.MCPCL 17.MCFCL 18.MCLUM 2
19.MPFS 20.MPFC 21.MSS
Section Fusing
Item Operation
Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. The lamp repeat ON/ Or stops after repeating
Procedure OFF every 500ms 5 times. the specified number of times.
SIMULATION 6-1
FEED OUTPUT CHECK. EXECUTING...
SIMULATION 5-2 2.HLPR 3.DCPR 4.MM 5. DM 6.DSB_FW
HEATER LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 7.DSB_RV 8.CPFC 9.RRC 10.TRC 11. FGS_FIN
1.HL1(LOWER) 2 12.LUM
15.MCM
13.TRC_DSK 14.PSPS
16.MCPCL 17.MCFCL 18.MCLUM 2
2.HL2(UPPER)
19.MPFS 20.MPFC 21.MSS

Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
Repeats specified times and stops. <List of set values>
SIMULATION 5-2 2 HLPR (Heater power relay)
HEATER LAMP TEST. EXECUTING... 3 DCPR (DC power relay)
1.HL1(LOWER)
2.HL2(UPPER)
2 4 MM (Main motor)
5 DM (Drum motor)
6 DSB_FW (Stepping motor forward rotation)
<List of set values>
7 DSB_RV (Stepping motor reverse rotation)
1 Heater lamp 1 (Lower) 8 CPFC (Paper feed clutch)
2 Heater lamp 2 (Upper) 9 RRC (Resist roller clutch)
10 TRC (Transport roller clutch)
11 FGS_FIN (Finisher gate solenoid)
5-3
12 LUM (Tray 1 lift-up motor)
Purpose Operation test, check 13 TRC_DSK (Desk clutch sync signal)
Function Used to check the operations of the copy lamp and 14 PSPS (Separation pawl solenoid)
(Content) its control circuit. 15*1 MCM (MP drive motor control signal)
Section Scanner (reading), DSPF (reading) 16*1 MCPCL (MP tray paper feed clutch signal)
Item Operation 17*1 MCFCL (MP tray transport clutch signal)
Operation/ The copy lamp or CIS is lighted for 10sec and 18*1 MCLUM (MP tray lift-up motor signal)
Procedure turned off. 19*2 MPFS (Manual paper feed solenoid signal)
∗ CIS is displayed only when DSPF is installed. 20*2 MPFC (Manual paper feed clutch signal)
21*2 MSS (Manual paper feed gate solenoid)
*1 Displayed when OPTION of multi-purpose only.
*2 Displayed when manual feed OPTION is added.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 8

6-2 7-6
Purpose Operation test, check Purpose Setup
Function Used to check the operations of each fan motor Function Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
(Content) and its control circuit. (Content)
Section Others Item Operation
Item Operation Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. Used to set the
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. Procedure intermittent aging cycle of Sim 7-1.
Procedure
SIMULATION 7-6
SIMULATION 6-2 INTERVAL AGING CYCLE SETUP. INPUT TIME AND PRESS START.
FAN MOTOR CHECK. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. (1-999, UNIT: sec)
10
1. FMHi
2. FMLo
2

Press [START] key to get started. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
7-8
SIMULATION 6-2
Purpose Setup
FAN MOTOR CHECK. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. Function Used to set Enable/Disable of warm-up time
1. FMHi
2. FMLo
2 (Content) display.
Item Operation
Operation/ The warm-up time is displayed in the unit of
<List of set values> Procedure second.
1 Fan motor high speed SIMULATION 7-8
2 Fan motor low speed WARM UP TIME DISPLAY.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO
1
Main code 7
Press [START] key to start measuring. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
7-1
Purpose Setup SIMULATION 7-8
Function Used to set the aging conditions. WARM UP TIME DISPLAY. WARMING UP,PLEASE WAIT.
(Content) (UNIT:sec)
30
Item Operation
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. Warm-up ends. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Procedure

SIMULATION 7-8
SIMULATION 7-1 WARM UP TIME DISPLAY. WARM UP COMPLETED.
AGING TEST SETTING. SELECT 0-36, AND PRESS START.
0. NO MISS FEED DETECTION
(UNIT:sec)
60
1. AGING 2
2. AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION.
3. AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION/
NO WARM UP/NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
4. NO WARM UP. Main code 8
5. AGING/INTERVAL.
6. AGING/INTERVAL/NO MISS FEED DETECTION.
+10 : NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK.
8-1
+20 : NO SHADING.
Purpose Adjustment
+30 : NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK/NO SHADING.
Function Used to check and adjust the developing bias
(Content) voltage in each print mode and its control circuit.
Press [START] key to register.
The operation mode is kept until the power is turned off or setting is made again.
Section Process
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Operation/ Enter the output value to be adjusted with 10 digit
<List of set values> Procedure key pad. The current set value is highlighted at the
0 No jam detection right of each item.
1 Aging mode After entering the value press START key.
10 digit key pad. The output is made for 30sec at
2 Aging mode without jam detection
the set value.
3 Aging mode without jam/without warm-up/without
Then the output is stopped.
fusing temperature control
4 Without warm-up
5 Intermittent aging mode
6 Intermittent aging mode without jam detection
Above +10 No process unit (including developing unit)
detection
Above +20 No shading
Above +30 No process unit detection/No shading

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 9

 <List of set values>
SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START. Default Set range
1.AUTO 485 2.CHARACTER 485 1 Auto mode 645 200 – 900
3.MIX 485
5.PRINTER 485
4.PHOTO
6.PLUS
485
150
1 2 Text mode
3 Text/Photo mode
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. 4 Photo mode
5 Printer mode
SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1 : AUTO (0-745)
485 8-6
Purpose Adjustment
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Function Used to check and adjust the transfer charger
Or after 30sec output (Content) current and its control circuit.
Section Process
SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. EXECUTING...
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
1 : AUTO
485 Operation/ Enter the output value to be adjusted with 10 digit
Procedure key pad. The current set value is highlighted at the
right of each item.
<List of set values> After entering the value with 10 digit key pad, press START key.
Default Set range The output is made for 30sec at the set value.
1 Auto mode 485 0 – 745 Then the output is stopped.
2 Text mode SIMULATION 8-6
3 Text/Photo mode THV+SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
1. FRONT 267
4 Photo mode
5 Printer mode
2. BACK 310 1
6 Reverse developing bias voltage 150 0 – 255
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

8-2 SIMULATION 8-6

THV+SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to check and adjust the main charger grid
1. FRONT(0-620)
267
(Content) voltage in each print mode and its control circuit.
Section Process Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) Or after 30sec output
Operation/ Enter the output value to be adjusted with 10 digit SIMULATION 8-6
Procedure key pad. The current set value is highlighted at the THV+SETTING. EXECUTING...
right of each item. 1. FRONT
267
After entering the value with 10 digit key pad, press START key.
The output is made for 30sec at the set value.
<List of set values>
Then the output is stopped.
Default Set range
SIMULATION 8-2
1 Cassette/manual paper feed 42PPM 267 0 – 620
MAIN GRID SETTING. SELECT 1- 5, AND PRESS START.
1. AUTO 645 2. CHARACTER 645 31PPM 220
3. MIX 645
5. PRINTER
4. PHOTO
645
645 1 2 Paper feed from ADU 42PPM 310
31PPM 267
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

8-17
SIMULATION 8-2
MAIN GRID SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. Purpose Operation test, check
1. AUTO (200-900)
645 Function Used to set and check the transfer roller output.
(Content)
Section Process
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Or after 30sec output
Item Operation
SIMULATION 8-2 Operation/ Enter the output value to be adjusted with 10 digit
MAIN GRID SETTING. EXECUTING...
Procedure key pad. The current set value is highlighted at the
1 : AUTO
645 right of each item.
After entering the value with 10 digit key pad, press START key.
The output is made for 30sec at the set value.
Then the output is stopped.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 10

 9-2
SIMULATION 8-17
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. Purpose Operation test, check
1. SHV FRONT 160
Function Used to check the sensors and detectors in the
2. SHV BACK 160
3. THV- 780
1 (Content) duplex section and their control circuits.
Section Duplex
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. Item Operation
Operation/ The display is highlighted when detected.
SIMULATION 8-17 Procedure
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1. FRONT (0-375)
160 SIMULATION 9-2
ADU SENSOR CHECK.
ADUSET DSW_D AINPD APOD APPD1 APPD2
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or after 30sec output

SIMULATION 8-17
<List of display values>
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. EXECUTING...
ADUSET ADU installation detection
1. FRONT (0-375)
160 DSW_D ADU cabinet open detection
AINPD ADU paper entry detection
APOD ADU paper exit detection
<List of set values>
APPD1 ADU paper detection 1
Default Set range APPD2 ADU paper detection 2
1 SHV front surface 160 (42PPM) 0 – 375
2 SHV back surface 120 (31PPM)
3 THV-output 780 0 – 1250 Main code 10

Purpose Operation test, check

Main code 9 Function Used to check the operation of the toner motor and
(Content) its control circuit.
9-1 Section Process (OPC drum/developing/transfer/cleaning)/
Developing toner
Purpose Operation test, check
Item Operation
Function Used to check the operation under load (clutches
(Content) and solenoids) in the duplex section and their Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. The toner motor
control circuits. Procedure rotates for 10sec.
Section Duplex Note: Never execute this simulation with toner in the toner
Item Operation hopper.
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. If executed, excessive toner will enter the developing
Procedure section, causing an overtoner trouble. Be sure to remove
the toner motor from the toner hopper before execution.
SIMULATION 9-1
ADU OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. SIMULATION 10
1. ADMEN1 TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION.
ARE YOU SURE ?
2. ADMEN2
3. DGS
1 1. YES 2
2. NO

Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or after 10sec execution
SIMULATION 9-1
ADU OUTPUT CHECK EXECUTING... SIMULATION 10
TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION. EXECUTING...
1. ADMEN1
2. ADMEN2
1 1
3. DGS

<List of set values>

<List of set values>
1 Toner motor rotation start
1 ADMEN1 (ADU motor 1 control signal)
2 Cancel (The display returns to the main code entry
2 ADMEN2 (ADU motor 2 control signal)
menu.)
3 DGS (ADU gate solenoid)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 11

 Main code 14 Main code 21

Purpose Cancel (in case of a trouble) 21-1

Function Used to cancel the self diag U2/PF troubles.
Purpose Setup
(Content)
Function Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Item Trouble
(Content)
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad
Item Spec
Procedure
Operation/ Used to set the maintenance cycle in an SRU
SIMULATION 14
Procedure machine.
TROUBLE CANCELLATION. (OTHERS)
ARE YOU SURE ?
1. YES
1 SIMULATION 21-1
MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP. SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START.
2. NO 0. DEFAULT 1. 40K 2. 50K 3. 80K
4. 100K 5. 120K 6.FREE 1
<List of set values>
1 After canceling a trouble other than U2 and PF the <List of set values>
display returns to the main code entry menu. 0 Maintenance display at the cycle of each control spec.
2 Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the 1 Maintenance display at 40K
main code entry menu. 2 Maintenance display at 50K
3 Maintenance display at 80K
4 Maintenance display at 100K
Main code 16 5 Maintenance display at 120K
6 No maintenance display
Purpose Cancel (incase of a trouble)
Function Used to cancel the self diag “U2” trouble.
(Content)
Item Trouble Main code 22
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. 22-1
Procedure
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
SIMULATION 16
(display)
U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
Function Used to check the print count in each section and
ARE YOU SURE ?
1. YES
1 (Content) in each operation mode.
2. NO (Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Item Counter
<List of set values> Operation/ Data of each counter are displayed.
Procedure
1 After canceling U2 trouble, the display returns to the
main code entry menu.
SIMULATION 22-1
2 Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
main code entry menu. TOTAL : ******** DRUM : ******** TONER : ********
DEVE : ******** MAINTENANCE : ********
TOTAL OUTPUT : ******** COPIES : ********
PRINTER : ********
Main code 17 RIGHT SIDE : ******** OTHERS : ********

Purpose Cancel (incase of a trouble)

Function Used to cancel the self diag “PF” trouble <List of display values>
(Content) (when copy is inhibited by the host computer). TOTAL Total counter
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) DRUM Drum cartridge counter
Item Trouble TONER Toner cartridge counter
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad. DEVE Developer cartridge counter
Procedure MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
TOTAL OUTPUT Total output quantity
SIMULATION 17
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
COPIES Copy effective paper counter
ARE YOU SURE ?
1 PRINTER Printer counter
1. YES RIIGHT SIDE OUTPUT Right side paper exit counter
2. NO
OTHERS Other print counter (List print, etc.)

<List of set values>

1 After canceling PF trouble, the display returns to the
main code entry menu.
2 Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the
main code entry menu.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 12

22-2 Code Description
PPD1NT2 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Machine tray 2 feed
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
paper)
(display)
PPD1ND1 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper)
Function Used to check the number of total misfeed and
(Content) troubles. (If the number of misfeed is considerably PPD1ND2 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper)
great, the machine must be repaired. The misfeed PPD1NTD PPD1 not-reaching jam (Tandem desk feed paper)
rate is obtained by dividing this count by the total PPD1NAD PPD1 not-reaching jam (ADU refeed paper)
counter value.) PPD1SMF PPD1 remaining jam (Manual feed tray feed
Item Trouble paper)
Operation/ The numbers of times of paper jam, SPF jam, and PPD1ST1 PPD1 remaining jam (Machine tray 1 feed paper)
Procedure troubles are displayed. PPD1ST2 PPD1 remaining jam (Machine tray 2 feed paper)
PPD1SD1 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper)
SIMULATION 22-2 PPD1SD2 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper)
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
PAPER JAM : ******** SPF JAM : ********
PPD1STD PPD1 remaining jam (Tandem desk feed paper)
TROUBLE : ******** PPD1SAD PPD1 remaining jam (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1PRI PPD1 jam (Image ready is not supplied from ICU.)
POD1N POD1 not-reaching jam
POD1S POD1 remaining jam
POD2N POD2 not-reaching jam
<List of display values> POD2SR POD2 remaining jam
PAPER JAM Number of times of paper jam (When discharging to the right side of machine.)
SPF JAM Number of times of SPF jam POD2SL POD2 remaining jam
(When discharging to the left side of machine.)
TROUBLE Number of times of troubles
AINPDN ADU paper entry sensor not-reaching jam
AINPDS ADU paper entry sensor remaining jam
22-3 APODN ADU paper exit sensor not-reaching jam
APODS ADU paper exit sensor remaining jam
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
APPD1N ADU transport sensor 1 not-reaching jam
(display)
APPD1S ADU transport sensor 1 remaining jam
Function Used to check the misfeed position and the
(Content) number of misfeed at that position. APPD2N ADU transport sensor 2 not-reaching jam
(If the number of misfeed is considerably great, the (When ADU transport)
machine must be repaired.) APPD2S ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam
Section Sections other than DSPF sections (When ADU transport)
Item Trouble BPT Manual feed tray paper feed jam (APPD2 not-
reaching)
Operation/ The history of the latest 50 paper jams is
Procedure displayed. (Refer to the jam codes below.) APPD2SM ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
DESK2 Desk tray 2 paper feed jam (DPFD3 not-reaching)
SIMULATION 22-3
PAPER JAM HISTORY. DPFD3S2 DPFD3 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper)
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* DESK1 Desk tray 1 paper feed jam (DPFD2 not-reaching)
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
DPFD2N2 DPFD2 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper)
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* DPFD2S1 DPFD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper)
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* DPFD2S2 DPFD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper)
...............
(10 lines x 80 digits = 800 characters)
TTRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed jam (TPFD3 not-
reaching)
<Jam codes> TPFD3S2 TPFD3 remaining jam (Tandem tray 2 feed paper)
TTRAY1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed jam (TPFD2 not-
Code Description reaching)
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed jam
TPFD2N2 TPFD2 not-reaching jam (Tandem tray 2 feed
(MCPPD not-reaching: When MU1 installed) paper)
(TPRD2 not-reaching: When D13 installed)
TPFD2S1 TPFD2 remaining jam (Tandem tray 1 feed paper)
(DPFD2 not-reaching: When D14 installed)
TPFD2S2 TPFD2 remaining jam (Tandem tray 2 feed paper)
MPFDND1 DTPF1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper)
FPID_N Built-in finisher PID not-reaching jam
MPFDND2 DTPF1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper)
FPID_S Built-in finisher PID remaining jam
MPFDNTD TPRD2 not-reaching jam (Tandem desk feed
FSCID_N Built-in finisher SCID not-reaching jam
paper)
FSCID_S Built-in finisher SCID remaining jam
MPFDST2 MCPPD remaining jam (Machine tray 2 feed
paper: When MU1 installed) FSCID2N Built-in finisher SCID2 not-reaching jam
TPRD2 remaining jam (Machine tray 2 feed paper: FSCID2S Built-in finisher SCID2 remaining jam
When D13 installed) FPPD_S Built-in finisher PPD remaining jam
DPFD1 remaining jam (Machine tray 2 feed paper: FSCPD_N Built-in finisher SCPD not-reaching jam
When D14 installed) FSCPD_S Built-in finisher SCPD remaining jam
MPFDSD1 DTPF1 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper) FPOD_N Built-in finisher POD not-reaching jam
MPFDSD2 DTPF1 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) FPOD_S Built-in finisher POD remaining jam
MPFDSTD TPRD2 remaining jam (Tandem desk feed paper) FES_N Console finisher entry port sensor (FES) not-
PPD1NMF PPD1 not-reaching jam (Manual feed tray paper) reaching jam
TRAY1 Tray 1 feed paper jam (PPD1 not-reaching)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 13

 Code Description <List of display values>
FES_S Console finisher entry port sensor (FES) S/N(MFP) Controller serial number
remaining jam S/N(ENGINE) Engine section serial number
FFPS_N Console finisher saddle not-reaching jam S/N(SCANNER) Scanner section serial number
(Not reaching the folding sensor (FFPS).) MFP MFP controller
FFPS_S Console finisher saddle remaining jam (LANGUAGE) (Language version)
(The folding sensor (FFPS) does not turn off.) BOOT MFP controller boot ROM
FSTPL Console finisher staple jam
PCU PCU controller
(The stapler does not complete clinching.)
SCANNER Scanner controller
FPNCH Console finisher punch jam
FINISHER Finisher controller
(The puncher does not complete punching.)
DESK Desk controller
FDOP Console finisher door open jam
MAIL BIN mail bin controller
(During/after paper passing, the front door, joint, or
upper cover is opened.) PUNCH UNIT Punch unit
PID_N mail bin PID not-reaching jam (Product key controlled by PCU PWB serial number.)
PID_S mail bin PID remaining jam
MPPD1_N mail bin MPPD1 not-reaching jam
22-6
MPPD1_S mail bin MPPD1 remaining jam
MPPD2_N mail bin MPPD2 not-reaching jam Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
MPPD2_S mail bin MPPD2 remaining jam (print)
MPPD3_N mail bin MPPD3 not-reaching jam Function Used to print the list of adjustments and setup data
MPPD3_S mail bin MPPD3 remaining jam (Content) (simulations, counters).
MPPD4_N mail bin MPPD4 not-reaching jam Item Data
MPPD4_S mail bin MPPD4 remaining jam Operation/ the selected data is displayed on the menu box.
Procedure
MPPD5_N mail bin MPPD5 not-reaching jam
MPPD5_S mail bin MPPD5 remaining jam
SIMULATION 22-6
DATA PRINT MODE, SELECT SETTING,AND PRESS START.
22-4 0. TRAY SELECT :AUTO ONLY
1. PRINT START 1
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
(display) When "1" is selected,
press [START] key.
Function Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
(Content)
SIMULATION 22-6
Item Trouble DATA PRINT MODE.. EXECUTING...
Operation/ The history of the latest 30 troubles is displayed. 0.TRAY SELECT :1
Procedure 0

SIMULATION 22-4
<List of display values>
TROUBLE HISTORY.
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-** 0 TRAY SELECT auto only (no selection)
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-** 1 PRINT START
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
...............
(10 lines x 80 digits = 800 characters) 22-7
Purpose User data output, check (display)
Function Used to display the key operator code.
22-5 (Content) (Used when the customer has forgotten the key
operator code.)
Purpose Other Item Data
Function Used to check the ROM version of each unit Operation/ The key operator code is displayed.
(Content) (section). Procedure
Item Software
Operation/ The version of each ROM is displayed.
SIMULATION 22-7
Procedure KEY OPERATOR CODE DISPLAY.
CODE: *****
SIMULATION 22-5
ROM VERSION DATA DISPLAY.
S/N(MFP) : 000000000 S/N(ENGINE) : 0000000000
S/N(SCANNER) : 000000000
MFP : 1.00 (LANGUAGE : 1.00)
PCU : 1.00 BOOT : 1.00
SCANNER : 1.00 FINISHER : 1.00
DESK : 1.00 MAIL BIN : 1.00
PUNCH UNIT : 1.00

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 14

22-8 <List of display value>

Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check MACHINE AR-P350/350LP , AR-P450/450LP,
(display) AR-M350/350M, AR-M450/450M,
AR-M312U/M420U
Function Used to check the number of use of the staple,
(Content) DSPF, and scanner (reading) unit. DSPF NONE/ (Model code)
Item Counter FINISHER NONE/ (Model code)
MAIL BIN NONE/ (Model code)
Operation/ The counter data below are displayed.
Procedure PUNCH NONE/ (Model code)
DESK NONE/ (Model code)
SIMULATION 22-8 ADU NONE/ (Model code)
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. SPEED Machine speed 31/42 (CPM)
SPF: ********
SCAN : ********
PROCESS TYPE Process control spec
STAPLER : ******** PUNCH : ******** (1, 2: AR machine 3: DM machine)
SYSTEM MEMORY Memory capacity (MB)
ICU PRINTER/MFP
<List of display value> <List of machine model codes>

SPF Number of times of document feed Item Display Content

SCAN Number of times of scan MACHINE AR-P350/350LP
STAPLER Number of times of stapling AR-P450/450LP
PUNCH Number of times of punching AR-M350/350M
AR-M450/450M
AR-M312U/
22-9 M420U
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check SPF — Document feed unit not installed
(display) AR-EF5 OC installed
Function Used to check the number of times (print quantity) AR-EF6 Duplex document feed unit
(Content) of each paper feed section. installed
Section Paper feed FINISHER — After-work unit not installed
Item Counter AR-FN6 Built-in finisher installed
Operation/ The counter data below are displayed. AR-FN7 Console finisher installed
Procedure MAIL BIN — Mail bin not installed
AR-MS1 Mail bin installed
SIMULATION 22-9 Punch unit — Punch unit not installed
PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. AR-PN1A Punch unit 2 holes
TRAY1: ******** TRAY2 : ********
AR-PN1B Punch unit 3 holes
TRAY3 : ******** TRAY4 : ********
BPT : ******** ADU : ******** AR-PN1C Punch unit 4 holes
AR-PN1D Punch unit 4 holes wide hole
ADU — Duplex module not installed
<List of display values> AR-DU3 Duplex module installed
TRAY1 Use quantity of tray 1 AR-DU4 Duplex module + manual feed
TRAY2 Use quantity of tray 2 (Multi purpose tray) unit installed
TRAY3 Use quantity of tray 3 (Desk) DESK — Paper feed desk not installed
TRAY4 Use quantity of tray 4 (Desk) AR-D29 Paper feed desk installed
BPT Use quantity of manual feed tray ICU PRINTER Printer board
ADU Use quantity of duplex paper feed MEMORY 0MB No expansion memory
***MB Expansion memory ***MB

22-10
22-12
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
(display) Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
Function Used to check the system configuration (display)
(Content) (option, internal hardware). Function Used to check the misfeed position and the
Item Spec (Content) number of misfeed at that position.
Operation/ The machine composition below is displayed. (If the number of misfeed is considerably great, the
Procedure machine must be repaired.)
Section DSPF
SIMULATION 22-10
Item Trouble
SYSTEM INFORMATION. Operation/ The history of the latest 50 paper jams is
MACHINE: ******* Procedure displayed. (Refer to the jam code table below.)
SPF: ******* XXXXXXXXXXX
FINISHER : ******* MAIL BIN : ******* PUNCH : ******
DESK: ******* ADU: ******* XXXXXXXXXXXX
PROCESS TYPE : *
SYSTEM MEMORY: **MB

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 15

 SIMULATION 22-12 SIMULATION 24-1
SPF JAM HISTORY. JAM/ TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.SELECT1-3,AND
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* PRESS START.
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* 1. PAPER JAM
2. SPF JAM
1
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,******* 3. TROUBLE
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
............... (10 lines x 80 digits = 800 characters)
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
or [START] key.
<Jam code table>
SIMULATION 24-1
Code Description PAPER JAM COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
SPSD_N SPSD not-reaching jam ARE YOU SURE ?
1. YES
1
SPSD_S SPSD remaining jam 2. NO
SPOD_N SPOD not-reaching jam
SPOD_S SPOD remaining jam <List of set values>
SPSDSCN Exposure start timer end
PAPER JAM Number of times of paper jam
SPF JAM Number of times of SPF jam
22-13 TROUBLE Number of times of troubles
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
(display) 24-2
Function Used to display the process cartridge data.
(Content) Purpose Data clear
Item Counter Function Used to clear the number of use (print quantity) of
Operation/ The counter data below are displayed. (Content) each paper feed section.
Procedure Section Paper feed
Item Counter
SIMULATION 22-13
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key.
PROCESS CARTRIDGE DATA DISPLAY. Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display
DRUM : ********(counts) **********(sec.) returns to the original state.
TONER : ********(counts) **********(sec.) 1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared
DEVE : *********(counts) **********(sec.)

SIMULATION 24-2
<List of display values> PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA CLEAR.SELECT1-6,AND PRESS START.
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2
DRUM Drum cartridge counter Count value (counts) 3. TRAY3
5. BPT
4. TRAY4
6. ADU
1
Rotating time (sec)
TONER Toner cartridge counter Count value (counts)
Rotating time (sec)
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
DEVE Developer cartridge counter Count value (counts) or [START] key.
Rotating time (sec)
SIMULATION 24-2
TRAY1 COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
1
Main code 24 2. NO

24-1
<List of set values>
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the misfeed counter, misfeed history, 1 Tray 1 use quantity
(Content) trouble counter, and trouble history. (After 2 Tray 2 use quantity
completion of maintenance, these counters must 3 Tray 3 use quantity
be cleared.) 4 Tray 4 use quantity
Item Counter 5 Manual feed tray use quantity
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key. 6 Duplex paper feed use quantity
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display
returns to the original state.
1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 24-3
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the number of use of the staple,
(Content) DSPF and the scanner (reading) unit.
Item Counter
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key.
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display
returns to the original state.
1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 16

 SIMULATION 24-3 SIMULATION 24-5
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.SELEC1-5, AND PRESS START. DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
1. SPF 1. DV CARTRIDGE
2. SCAN 1 1
3. STAPLER
4. PUNCH

Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key

Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key or [START] key.
or [START] key.
SIMULATION 24-5
SIMULATION 24-3 DV CARTRIDGE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
SPF COUNTER DATA CLEAR. ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
1
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
1 2. NO
2. NO

<List of set values> <List of set values>

1 SPF paper passing quantity 1 Developer cartridge counter

2 Number of times of document scan
3 Number of times of stapling 24-6
4 Number of times of punching
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to reset the copy counter.
24-4 (Content)
Item Counter
Purpose Data clear
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key.
Function Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display
(Content)
returns to the original state.
Item Counter
1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key.
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display
SIMULATION 24-6
returns to the original state.
COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 1. COPY
1
SIMULATION 24-4
MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.PRESS START.
1. MAINTENANCE Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
1 or [START] key.

SIMULATION 24-6
COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
or [START] key.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
1
2. NO
SIMULATION 24-4
MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
1 <List of set values>
2. NO 1 Copy effective paper counter

<List of set values>

24-7
1 Maintenance counter
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the OPC drum counter and the toner
24-5 (Content) cartridge counter.
(Perform when the OPC drum is replaced.)
Purpose Data clear
Section Process
Function Used to reset the developer counter. (The developer
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
(Content) counter of the DV unit installed is reset.)
Item Counter
Section Process
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key.
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display
Item Counter
returns to the original state.
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key. 1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display
returns to the original state.
1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 17

 SIMULATION 24-7 SIMULATION 24-11
DRUM/TONER COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT AND PRESS START. TIMER DATA CLEAR. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
1. DRUM CARTRIDGE 1. DRUM ROTATION (CARTRIDGE)
2. TONER CARTRIDGE 1 2. DV ROTATION (CARTRIDGE)
3. TONER SUPPLY (CARTRIDGE)
1

Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key

or [START] key.

SIMULATION 24-7
DRUM CARTRIDGE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
or [START] key.
ARE YOU SURE ?
1. YES
1
2. NO SIMULATION 24-11
DRUM ROTATION COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE ?
1. YES
1
<List of set values>
2. NO
1 Drum cartridge counter
2 Toner cartridge counter
<List of set values>
1 Drum rotating time (cartridge)
24-9 2 Developing unit rotating time (cartridge)
3 Toner supply time (cartridge)
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the printer print counter.
(Content) (After completion of maintenance, this counter
Main code 25
must be cleared.)
Section Printer 25-1
Item Counter
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key. Purpose Operation test, check
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display Function Used to check the operations of the main drive
returns to the original state. (Content) section (excluding the scanner (reading) section)
1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared and the toner density sensor. (The toner density
sensor output can be monitored.)
SIMULATION 24-9
Section Drive
PRINTER/OTHERS COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT 1-2, AND Item Operation
PRESS START. Operation/ The toner density control sensor value is
1. PRINTER
2. OTHERS
1 Procedure displayed. Press START key, and the main motor
will rotate to start monitoring the toner density
control sensor.
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
or [START] key.

SIMULATION 25-1
SIMULATION 24-9
DV MONITOR. PRESS START.
PRINTER COUNTER DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE ?
1. YES
1 128
2. NO

Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.

<List of set values> Or stop after 2min.

1 Printer counter SIMULATION 25-1

2 Other effective paper counter DV MONITOR. EXECUTING...

128
24-11
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to reset the drum rotation time, toner motor 25-2
(Content) rotation time, and developer rotation time counters. Purpose Setup
The developer counter of the DV unit installed is Function Used to initialize the toner density when replacing
reset. (Content) developer. (Auto adjustment)
Section Process Section Process
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) (OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Item Counter Operation/ The toner density control sensor value is
Operation/ Select with 10 digit key pad and press START key. Procedure displayed. Press START key, and the main motor
Procedure The procedure below is executed and the display will rotate. After stirring for 2 min, the toner density
returns to the original state. control sensor value is sampled 10 times and the
1: Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared average value is stored.
Note: Open front cover before entering SIM for Auto adjust.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 18

 26-6
SIMULATION 25-2
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. Purpose Setup
Function Used to set the specification according to the
128 (Content) destination.
Item Spec
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop. Operation/ After setting the destination, the power is turned
Or stop after 2min. Procedure off/on.
SIMULATION 25-2
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. EXECUTING... SIMULATION 26-6
DESTINATION SETUP. SELECT 1-10, AND PRESS START.
128 1. USA 2. CANADA 3. INCH
4. JAPAN 5.AB _B 1
6. EUROPE 7. UK 8. AUSTRALIA
9. AB_A 10. CHINA

Main code 26 <List of destinations>

26-3 1 United States of America

2 Canada
Purpose Setup
3 Inch series EX
Function Used to set the specification mode of the auditor.
4 Japan
(Content) Setup must be made according to the use
5 AB series B5
conditions under auditor.
6 Europe
Section Auditor
7 UK
Item Spec
8 Australia
Operation/ The auditor setting is performed. (Default: 1)
Procedure 9 AB series A5
10 China

SIMULATION 26-3
AUDITOR SETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
1. P10
26-18
2. VENDOR 1 Purpose Setup
3. OTHERS
Function Used to set Enable/Disable of toner save
(Content) operation.
(This simulation is enabled only in Japan and UK
26-5 versions. (Depends on SIM 26-6 (Destination)
setup). For the other destinations, user program
Purpose Setup
P22 allows to make the similar setup.)
Function Used to set the count mode of the total counter and
Item Spec
(Content) the maintenance counter.
Operation/ The toner mode setup is made. (Default: 1)
Item Spec
Procedure
Operation/ 1) Setting of the count-up number of A3/WLT
Procedure paper passing (1 or 2) is made.
SIMULATION 26-18
The current set value is highlighted on the right TONER SAVE MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
side of the item. 0. YES
2) Setting of the count-up number of the selected 1. NO 1
counter is made.
1: 1 count up <List of set values>
2: 2 counts up (Default : 2) 0 Toner save mode is enabled.
1 Toner save mode is disabled.
SIMULATION 26-5
A3(LEDGER) COUNT UP MODE SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS
START. 26-30
1. TOTAL COUNTER 1
2. MAINTENANCE(DRUM) COUNTER 1 1 Purpose Setup
3. DV CARTRIDGE COUNTER 1
Function Used to set the operation mode conforming to the
(Content) CE mark (Europe standards). (For flickers when
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. driving the fusing heater lamp.)
Item Spec
SIMULATION 26-5 Operation/
A3(LEDGER) COUNT UP MODE SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS Procedure
START.
1. TOTAL COUNTER 1 SIMULATION 26-30
(1 : 1COUNT UP 2 : 2COUNT UP)
CE MARK CONTROL SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
0. NO
<List of target counters>
1. YES 1
1 Total counter
<List of set values>
2 Maintenance counter/drum cartridge counter
0 No control of CE mark
3 Developer cartridge counter
1 Control of CE mark

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 19

26-35 26-52
Purpose Setup Purpose Setup
Function Used to set whether the trouble history of SIM 22-4 Function Used to set Enable/Disable of count-up when white
(Content) is displayed as one-time trouble or continuous (Content) paper is discharged. (White paper means the index
troubles when two or more number of a same paper (without copying) in the OHP index paper
trouble occurred. insertion mode, the front/rear covers (without
Item Spec copying) in the cover insertion mode, and white
Operation/ The trouble memory storing method is set. paper in the duplex exit mode (CA, etc.).)
Procedure (Default: 0) Section Paper transport (Paper exit, switchback, transport)
Operation/ Count-up setting of white paper exit mode is made.
SIMULATION 26-35 Procedure Press START key to save. (Default: 0 for Japan
TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS and Australia, 1 for the others)
START.
∗ The following counters are not counted up.
0. ONCE 1
1. ANY • Copies counter • Total counter
• Printer counter • Effective paper counter
<List of set values> • Department control counter

0 Only once (If same as the previous one, it is not stored.) SIMULATION 26-52
1 Any times (Though same as the previous one, it is stored.) BLANK PAPER COUNT UP SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
0. NO(NO COUNT UP)
1. YES (COUNT UP) 1
26-38
Purpose Setup
<List of set values>
Function Used to stop printing when developer life is
(Content) expired. 0 Count-up is not made.
Section Other 1 Count-up is made
Item Operation
Operation/ Print enable/disable is set when the developer
Procedure cartridge is expired in a DM machine. (Default: 1) Main code 27
∗ This simulation is ignored in the AR model, that is, the operation
is continued. 27-1
SIMULATION 26-38 Purpose Setup
DEVELOPER LIFE END SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START. Function Used to set the operation specifications when a
0. PRINT CONTINUE (Content) communication trouble occurs between the host
1. PRINT STOP 1 computer and MODEM (machine side).
(When a communication trouble occurs between
the host computer and MODEM (machine side),
<List of set values>
self diag display (U7-00) is displayed and setup is
0 Print continue made to inhibit or allow printing.)
1 Print stop Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item Spec
Operation/ Yes/No of communication trouble between PC/
26-41 Procedure MODEM is set. (Default: 0)
Purpose Setup (Japan only)
Function Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification
SIMULATION 27-1
(Content) ratio auto selection function (AMS) in the pamphlet DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
copy mode. 0. YES
Item Spec 1. NO 1
Operation/ Pamphlet mode AMS setting is enabled or
Procedure disabled. Press START key to save.
(Europe : 1, Others : 0) <List of set values>
0 U7-00 is not displayed in a communication trouble.
SIMULATION 26-41
PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
1 U7-00 is displayed in a communication trouble.
START.
0. NO 1
1. YES

<List of set values>

0 AMS setting disabled
1 AMS setting enabled

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 20

27-5 <List of display values>

Purpose Setup CSS1 Tray 1 insertion detection

PED Tray 1 paper empty detection
Function Used to enter the machine tag No.
(Content) (This function allows to check the machine tag No. LUD Tray 1 upper limit detection
from the computer.) MCSET MP unit detection
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) MCDRS MP unit side door open detection
Item Data MCPPD MP tray transport detection
Operation/ The tag number is set. The current value is MCLUD MP tray upper limit detection
Procedure displayed on PRESENT column. Enter a new tag MCPED MP tray paper empty detection
number with 10 digit key pad and press START to MCSPD MP tray remaining quantity detection
store. MCSS1 MP tray size detection 1
MCSS2 MP tray size detection 2
SIMULATION 27-5
MCSS3 MP tray size detection 3
TAG # SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
PRESENT : 00010000 MCSS4 MP tray size detection 4
NEW : 00009999 MP Tray size (The detection size of MP tray is displayed.)
MPFSET Manual feed tray detection
MPED Manual feed tray paper empty detection
MPLD Manual feed length detection
Main code 30 MPLS1 Manual feed pull-out sensor 1
MPLS2 Manual feed pull-out sensor 2
30-1 Bypass Tray size (The detection size of manual feed tray is
displayed.)
Purpose Operation test, check
Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and
(Content) detectors in the paper feed, paper transport, and
paper exit sections and their control circuits. Main code 40
Item Operation
Operation/ Then sensors of the machine are checked. 40-1
Procedure The sensor name is highlighted when it is Purpose Operation test, check
detected. Function Used to check the operations of the manual paper
(Content) feed tray paper size detectors and their control
SIMULATION 30-1 circuit. (The operations of the manual paper feed
SENSOR CHECK..
tray paper size detectors can be monitored on the
PPD1 POD1 POD2 POD3 DVCRUin PRCRUin DSWL
DSWF LCD display.)
Section Paper feed
Item Operation
<List of display values> Operation/ The sensors of the manual feed tray are checked.
Procedure The sensor name is highlighted when it is detected.
PPD1 Resist roller front paper detection
POD1 Fusing rear transport detection 1 SIMULATION 40-1
POD2 Fusing rear transport detection 2 BYPASS TRAY SENSOR CHECK.
POD3 Paper full detection
MPLD MPLS1 MPLS2
DVCRUin DV unit version detection (Bypass Tray width size: A4/A3)
PRCRUin Process unit version detection
DSWL Cabinet open detection
DSWF Machine front door
<List of display values>

30-2 MPLD Manual feed tray length detection

MPLS1 Manual feed pull-out sensor 1
Purpose Operation test, check
MPLS2 Manual feed pull-out sensor 2
Function Used to check the operations of the sensors and Bypass Tray (The detected width of manual feed tray is
(Content) detectors in the paper feed section and their
width size displayed.)
control circuits. (The operations of the sensors and A4/A3, 11x, B5/B4, 8.5x, A4R, B5R, A5R, 5.5x,
detectors in the paper feed section can be 7.25x, EXTRA
monitored on the LCD display.)
Section Paper feed
Item Operation
Operation/ Then sensors of the machine paper feed tray are
Procedure checked. The sensor name is highlighted when it is
detected.

SIMULATION 30-2
TRAY SENSOR CHECK..
CSS1 PED LUD
MCSET MCDRS MCPPD MCLUD MCPED MCSPD MCSS1 MCSS2
MCSS3 MCSS4 (MP Tray size: A4)
MPFSET MPED MPLD MPLS1 MPLS2
(Bypass Tray size: A3)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 21

40-2 40-7
Purpose Adjustment, setup Purpose Adjustment, setup
Function Used to adjust the detection level of the manual Function Used to enter the adjustment value of the manual
(Content) paper feed tray paper width volume. (Content) paper feed tray width detection level.
Section Paper feed Section Paper feed
Item Operation Item Operation
Operation/ The manual feed tray size is adjusted. Operation/ The adjustment value (Specified on the back of the
Procedure 1) Extend the guide to the MAX. position. Select 1 Procedure tray pull-out section) of the manual feed tray size is
and press START. When COMPLETE is dis- entered.
played, press CUSTOM SETTING to return to
the initial screen. SIMULATION 40-7
2) Move the guide to A4R position. Select 2 and press START. BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION : 72
When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOME SETTING 2. POSITION 1 : 380
to return to the initial screen. 3. POSITION 2 :
4. MIN. POSITION :
710
804
1
3) Move the guide to A5R position. Select 3 and press START.
When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOME SETTING
to return to the initial screen. Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

4) Move the guide to MIN. position in the initial screen. Select 4

and press START. When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjust- SIMULATION 40-7
ment is completed. BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION
If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) – 4), repeat the adjust- 72
ment again.
∗ This adjustment is performed only when the width detection vol-
ume is replaced. <List of set values>
Normally use SIM 40-7 for input.
1 Max. width (Max.)
SIMULATION 40-2
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
2 Adjustment point 1 (P1)
1.MAX. POSITION 3 Adjustment point 2 (P2)
2.POSITION 1
4 Min. width (Min.)
3.POSITION 2
4.MIN. POSITION
1
When "1" is selected,
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. 40-11
Purpose Operation test, check
SIMULATION 40-2
Function Used to check the width detection level of the
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MAX. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") (Content) multi-purpose tray paper width detector.
Section Paper feed
Item Operation
Operation/ The multi-purpose tray (MPT) sensors are
When "2" is selected,
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. Procedure checked. The sensor name is highlighted when it is
highlighted.
SIMULATION 40-2
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
SIMULATION 40-11
POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
MULTI PURPOSE TRAY SENSOR CHECK.

MCSS1 MCSS2 MCSS3 MCSS4

(Multi Purpose Tray width size: A4/A3)
When "3" is selected,
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
press [START] key.

SIMULATION 40-2
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") <List of display values>
MCSS1 Multi-purpose tray size detection 1
MCSS2 Multi-purpose tray size detection 2
When "4" is selected, MCSS3 Multi-purpose tray size detection 3
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
MCSS4 Multi-purpose tray size detection 4
SIMULATION 40-2 Multi Purpose (The detected size of MPT width is displayed.)
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. Tray width size A4/A3, 11x, B5/B4, 8.5x, A4R, B5R, A5R, 5.5x,
MIN. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
7.25x, EXTRA

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 22

40-12 41-2
Purpose Operation test, check Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the width detection level of the Function Used to adjust the detection level of the document
(Content) multi-purpose tray paper width detector. (Content) size sensor.
Section Paper feed Section Other
Item Operation Item Operation
Operation/ The multi-purpose tray size is adjusted. Operation/ The OC document sensor is adjusted.
Procedure 1) Extend the guide to the MAX. position. Procedure 1) Open the original cover. Press 1 without an
Select 1 and press START. original. Press START, and COMPLETE is dis-
When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUS- played. Press CUSTOM SETTING to return to
TOM SETTING to return to the initial screen. the initial screen.
2) Move the guide to MIN. position. 2) Place an A3 (or WLT) paper in the initial screen. Select 2 and
Select 2 and press START. press START.
When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is completed. When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is completed.
If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) – 2), repeat the adjust- If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) – 2), repeat the adjust-
ment again. ment again.

SIMULATION 40-12 SIMULATION 41-2

MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-2,AND PRESS PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START.
START. (PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.)
1.MAX POSITION 1 1. NO ORIGINAL
2. A3 ORIGINAL
1
2.MIN. POSITION
When "1" is selected, When "1" is selected,
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 40-12 SIMULATION 41-2

MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
MAX. POSITION... COMPLETE(or "ERROR") NO ORIGINAL ... COMPLETE (or " ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
A3 ORIGINAL ... INCOMPLETE

When "2" is selected,

When "2" is selected, press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
press [START] key.
(In case of an error)

SIMULATION 40-12 SIMULATION 41-2

MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
MIN. POSITION... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") NO ORIGINAL ... COMPLETE
A3 ORIGINAL ... COMPLETE (or " ERROR at PD1 PD2...")

41-3
Main code 41
Purpose Operation test, check
41-1 Function Used to check the operation of the document size
Purpose Operation test, check (Content) sensor and the related circuit.
(The output level of the document size sensor can
Function Used to check the operations of the document size
be monitored on the LCD display.)
(Content) sensor and the related circuit.
(The operation of the document size sensor can be Section Other
monitored on the LCD display.) Item Operation
Section Other Operation/ The OC document sensor detection level is
Item Operation Procedure displayed. (Real time display)
Operation/ The OC document sensor is checked.
Procedure SIMULATION 41-3
PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY.
OCSW
SIMULATION 41-1 PD1[128]: 200 PD2[128]: 200
PD SENSOR CHECK.. PD3[128]: 50 PD4[128]: 52
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PD5[128]: 51 PD6[128]: 50
PD7[128]: 52
(The detected sensor is highlighted.)

<List of display values>

<List of display values>
OCSW Original cover state
OCSW Original cover state
Open : Normal display
Open : Normal display
Close : Highlighted
Close : Highlighted
PD1 – 7 PD sensor detection level
PD1 – 7 Document sensor state
Figures in [ ] indicate the adjustment threshold
No document : Normal display values (41-2 adjustment value).
Document loaded : Highlighted

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 23

 Main code 43 44-4
Purpose Setup
43-1
Function Used to set the target image (reference) density
Purpose Setup (Content) level in the developing bias voltage correction.
Function Used to set the fusing temperature in each Section Process
(Content) operation mode. (OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Section Fusing, paper exit Item Data
Item Operation Operation/ The process correction value is set.
Operation/ The fusing control temperature is set. Procedure Select an item (1 – 9), and enter a value with 10
Procedure The current set value is highlighted on the right of digit key pad. Press SYTART to store the value.
each item. Select an item (1 – 6), and enter a set
value with 10 digit key pad. Press START key to SIMULATION 44-4
store the value. PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-8 AND PRESS
START.
1.PTH 00 2.S-WT 100
SIMULATION 43-1
FUSER TEMPERATURE SET. SELECT 1 - 6, AND PRESS START.
3.Vb1-1 50 4.Vb1-2 50 5.Vb1-3 50 1
6.Vb2-1 50 7.Vb2-2 50 8.Vb2-3 50
1. INSIDE NORMAL 190 5. INSIDE MPT 180
2. OUTSIDE NORMAL 190 6. OUTSIDE MPT 180
3. INSIDE PREHEAT 130
4. OUTSIDE PREHEAT 130
1
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 44-4
PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS
START.
SIMULATION 43-1
FUSER TEMPERATURE SET. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1.PTH 45
1. INSIDE NORMAL
190
(Enter the value with 10-key)
<List of display values>
1 PTH *1 Process Thermistor temperature forcible set
<List of display values>
value (0 – 99°C : Normal 0)
Default Set range 2 S_WT *2 Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) rising
1 Heater inside/Normal 190 165 – 210 correction wait time (0 – 180sec : Default 90)
2 Heater outside/Normal 190 165 – 210 3 Vb1-1 *3 Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction
3 Heater inside/Pre-heat (42PPM) 150 100 – 160 quantity (First rotation) 1 (0 – 150V : Default 50)
Heater inside/Pre-heat (31PPM) 145 100 – 160 4 Vb1-2 *3 Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction
4 Heater outside/Pre-heat (42PPM) 150 100 – 160 quantity (First rotation) 2 (0 – 150V : Default 50)
Heater outside/Pre-heat (31PPM) 145 100 – 160 5 Vb1-3 *3 Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction
5 Heater inside/Manual paper feed 190 165 – 210 quantity (First rotation) 3 (0 – 150V : Default 50)
used 6 Vb2-1 *4 Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction
6 Heater outside/Manual paper feed 190 165 – 210 quantity (Second rotation) 1 (0 – 50V : Default 15)
used 7 Vb2-2 *4 Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction
quantity (Second rotation) 2 (0 – 50V : Default 15)
8 Vb2-3 *4 Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction
quantity (Second rotation) 3 (0 – 50V : Default 15)
Main code 44
*1: Only when this value is 0, control is performed with the actual
44-1 measurement value of process Thermistor.
If it is not 0, control is forcibly performed.
Purpose Setup
Function Used to set Enable/Disable of each correction *2: When the drum motor standby time is greater than this value,
(Content) operation in the image forming (process) section. the correction of SIM 44-1 Vb1 is performed.
Section Process *3: This value is SIM 44-9 Vb1-1 correction value. The value cor-
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) responding to the drum rotating time is used.
Item Operation *4: This value is SIM 44-9 Vb1-2 correction value. The value cor-
Operation/ responding to the drum rotating time is used.
Procedure DRUM ROTATION TOME Vb1 correction value
42PPM 31PPM (X’ th rotation)
SIMULATION 44-1
0 – 40K (sec) 0 – 50K (sec) (X’ th rotation) -1
PROCESS CORRECTION VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE 0-127
AND PRESS START. 40 – 80K (sec) 50 – 95K (sec) (X’ th rotation) -2
BIT0:Vg1, BIT1:Vg2, BIT2:Vb1, BIT3:Vb2 80K – (sec) 95K – (sec) (X’ th rotation) -3
BIT4:Vb3, BIT5:LD1, BIT6:LD2
127

bit = 1 : Correction enabled

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LD2 LD1 Vb3 Vb2 Vb1 Vg2 Vg1

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 24

44-9 Main code 46
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
46-2
(display)
Function Used to check the result (main charger grid voltage Purpose Adjustment
(Content) developing bias voltage, laser power, etc.) of Function Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode
correction (process correction) in the image (Content) (binary, auto, text, text/photo, photo mode).
forming section. (By this simulation, the correction An adjustment with this simulation affects all the
operation can be checked.) reading density adjustment values.
Section Process Item Picture quality
(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) Operation/ The exposure mode to be set is selected.
Item Data Procedure (Auto adjustment)
Operation/ The process correction value is checked. 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
Procedure side of each item. In this screen, be sure to
select "1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
SIMULATION 44-9 2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad.
PROCESS CONTROL DATA DISPLAY. Press P to store the set value. (Default: 50, set range: 0 – 99)
DRUM ROTATION TIME: 01234567 (sec)
Vg1: 30 (V) Vg2: 30 (V) 3) Press START, and copying is started and the set value is
Vb1-1: 30 (V) Vb1-2: 30 (V) Vb2: 10 (V) stored. (Display value 1)
LD1: 0.05 (mW) LD2: 0.05 (mW)
4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2)
CONTROL: 1 DESTINATION: A PTH: 30 (deg)
TO: -5 T1: -5 T2: -3 5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3)
SIMULATION 46-2
<List of display values> EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
DRUM ROTATION TIME Drum rotation time 2. EXP LEVEL 1

Vg1 – Vg2 Grid voltage correction value

3. AE 3.0 50
5. MIX 3.0 5 0
4. CH 3.0
6. PHOTO 3.0
50
50
1
Vb1-1 *1 Vb (Developing bias correction value)
Select other than 0 - 2,
correction value (first rotation) Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
and press [START] key.
Vb1-2 *1 Vb (Developing bias correction value)
correction value (second rotation) SIMULATION 46-2
Vb2 Developing bias correction value EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
3. AE 3.0
Vb3 Developing bias correction value 50
LD1 Laser power correction value
Select 1, and
LD2 Laser power correction value press [START] key. Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
CONTROL CRUM control spec (1 – 3) Or copying is terminated.
DESTINATION CRUM destination (A – J)
SIMULATION 46-2
PTH *2 Process Thermistor temperature value EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). NOW COPYING.
T0 Toner control correction value
(Rotation time correction) (±100) Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
T1 Toner control correction value T1 press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
(Temperature correction) (±100)
SIMULATION 46-2
T2 Toner control correction value T2 EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(Temperature correction) (±100) (FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
*1: Vb1-1 and Vb1-2 are enabled or disabled by SIM 44-1 Vb1 5. BPT
setup.
Select 2, and Press [START] key or
*2: When PTH is set to 0 with SIM 44-4, the detected value in this press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
adjustment is displayed. If PTH is set to other than 0, the value
set with SIM 44-4 is displayed. SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 3-6, AND PRESS START.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. AE 3.0 4. CH 3.0 1
5. MIX 3.0 6. PHOTO 3.0

<List of set values 1>

0 Paper feed tray selection
1 Copy start (Default)
2 Exposure level selection
3 AE mode
4 Text mode 30
5 Text/Photo mode 30
6 Photo mode 30
<List of display values 1>
Normal display NOW COPYING
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Jam JAM
paper empty PAPER EMPTY.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 25

<List of set values 2> <List of set values 1>
1 TRAY1 0 Paper feed tray selection
2 TRAY2 1 Copy start (Default)
3 TRAY3 2 Exposure level selection
4 TRAY4 3 Exposure level 1.0
5 Manual feed 4 Exposure level 1.5
<List of set values 3> 5 Exposure level 2.0
6 Exposure level 2.5
3 AE mode 7 Exposure level 3.0
4 Text mode 30 8 Exposure level 3.5
5 Text/Photo mode 30
9 Exposure level 4.0
6 Photo mode 30 10 Exposure level 4.5
11 Exposure level 5.0
46-9 <List of display values 1>
Purpose Adjustment Normal display NOW COPYING
Function Used to adjust the print density for each density ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
(Content) level (display value) in the copy mode Jam JAM
(binary-Text mode). paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
A desired reading density can be set for each
density level (display value). <List of set values 2>
Item Picture quality 1 TRAY1
Operation/ The exposure mode to be set is selected. 2 TRAY2
Procedure (Text mode) 3 TRAY3
1) The current set value is highlighted on the right 4 TRAY4
side of each item. In this screen, be sure to 5 Manual feed
select "1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. <List of set values 3>
Press P to store the set value. (Default: 50, set range: 0 – 99) 3 Exposure level 1.0
3) Press START, and copying is started and the set value is 4 Exposure level 1.5
stored. (Display value 1) 5 Exposure level 2.0
4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 6 Exposure level 2.5
5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 7 Exposure level 3.0
8 Exposure level 3.5
SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START. 9 Exposure level 4.0
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START 10 Exposure level 4.5
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1 11 Exposure level 5.0
6. 2.5. 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50

Select other than 0 - 2,

46-10
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the print density for each density
SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. (Content) level (display value) in the copy mode
3. 1. 0 (binary-Text/Photo mode).
50 A desired reading density can be set for each
Select 1, and density level (display value).
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. Item Picture quality
Or copying is terminated.
Operation/ The exposure mode to be set is selected.
SIMULATION 46-9 Procedure (Text/Photo mode)
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). NOW COPYING.
1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
side of each item. In this screen, be sure to
Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
select "1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad.
SIMULATION 46-9 Press P to store the set value. (Default: 50, set range: 0 – 99)
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY) 3) Press START, and copying is started and the set value is
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1 stored. (Display value 1)
5. BPT
4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2)
Select 2, and Press [START] key or 5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3)
press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 3-11, AND PRESS START.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 1
6. 2.5. 7. 3.0 8. 3.5
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 26

 <List of set values 3>
SIMULATION 46-10
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
3 Exposure level 1.0
2. EXP LEVEL 1 4 Exposure level 1.5
3. 1.0
6. 2.5
50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
1 5 Exposure level 2.0
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50 6 Exposure level 2.5
7 Exposure level 3.0
Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. 8 Exposure level 3.5
9 Exposure level 4.0
SIMULATION 46-10 10 Exposure level 4.5
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 11 Exposure level 5.0
3. 1. 0
50
Select 1, and
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
46-11
Or copying is terminated.
Purpose Adjustment
SIMULATION 46-10 Function Used to adjust the print density for each density
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). NOW COPYING. (Content) level (display value) in the copy mode
(binary-Photo mode).
Select 0, and
press [START] key.
Press [START] key or A desired reading density can be set for each
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
density level (display value).
SIMULATION 46-10 Item Picture quality
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. Operation/ The exposure mode to be set is selected.
(FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1 Procedure (Photo mode)
5. BPT 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
side of each item. In this screen, be sure to
Select 2, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
select "1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad.
SIMULATION 46-10 Press P to store the set value. (Default: 50, set range: 0 – 99)
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 3-11, AND PRESS START.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3) Press START, and copying is started and the set value is
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 1 stored. (Display value 1)
6. 2.5. 7. 3.0 8. 3.5
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0 4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2)
5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3)
<List of set values 1> SIMULATION 46-11
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
0 Paper feed tray selection 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. EXP LEVEL 1
1 Copy start (Default)
2 Exposure level selection
3. 1.0
6. 2.5.
50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0
50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5
50
50
1
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50
3 Exposure level 1.0
4 Exposure level 1.5
Select other than 0 - 2,
5 Exposure level 2.0 and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

6 Exposure level 2.5

7 Exposure level 3.0 SIMULATION 46-11
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
8 Exposure level 3.5 1. 1.0
9 Exposure level 4.0 50
10 Exposure level 4.5 Select 1, and
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
11 Exposure level 5.0 Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.
<List of display values 1>
SIMULATION 46-11
Normal display NOW COPYING EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). NOW COPYING.

ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.

Select 0, and Press [START] key or
Jam JAM press [START] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
SIMULATION 46-11
<List of set values 2> EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
1 TRAY1 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
2 TRAY2 5. BPT

3 TRAY3 Select 2, and Press [START] key or

4 TRAY4 press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
5 Manual feed
SIMULATION 46-11
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). SELECT 3-11, AND PRESS START.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 1
6. 2.5 7. 3.0 8. 3.5
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 27

<List of set values 1> <Set values>
0 Paper feed tray selection 1 CCD CDD
1 Copy start (Default) 2 CCD EVEN
2 Exposure level selection 3 CS
3 Exposure level 1.0
4 Exposure level 1.5
5 Exposure level 2.0 46-18
6 Exposure level 2.5 Purpose Adjustment
7 Exposure level 3.0 Function Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in each
8 Exposure level 3.5 (Content) copy mode.
9 Exposure level 4.0 Item Picture quality
10 Exposure level 4.5 Operation/ 1) Change the gamma value.
11 Exposure level 5.0 Procedure The current set value is displayed on the right
of each item. (Set value)
<List of display values 1>
2) Set the gamma with 10 digit key pad.
Normal display NOW COPYING Press START to store the set value.
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. (Default 64, set range 0 – 127)
Jam JAM 3) The greater the value is, the greater the gradient is.
paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
SIMULATION 46-18
<List of set values 2> GAMMA SETUP. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. AE 64 2. CHARA 64 3. MIX 64 4. PHOTO 64
1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

4 TRAY4
5 Manual feed SIMULATION 46-18

<List of set values 3>

GAMMA SETUP.INPUT VALUE 0-127, AND PRESS START.
1. AE
64
3 Exposure level 1.0
4 Exposure level 1.5 <Set values>
5 Exposure level 2.0
1 AE mode
6 Exposure level 2.5
2 Text mode
7 Exposure level 3.0
3 Text/Photo mode
8 Exposure level 3.5
4 Photo mode
9 Exposure level 4.0
10 Exposure level 4.5
11 Exposure level 5.0 46-19
Purpose Adjustment
46-17 Function Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in the
(Content) auto copy mode and to set the density detection
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check area, and to set the image process mode.
(display) Item Picture quality
Function Used to adjust the CCD/CIS shading reference Operation/ 1) Change the control method of exposure mode.
(Content) value. Procedure The current set value is displayed on the right
Section Scanner (reading) / DSPF (reading) of each item. (Set value 1)
Item Operation
2) Set with 10 digit key pad. (AE mode)
Operation/ 1) Change the shading reference value of
3) Set with 10 digit key pad. (AE fixed mode)
Procedure CCD/CIS. The current set value is displayed
don the right of each item. (Set value) SIMULATION 46-19
EXP. MODE SETUP . SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad.
1. AE MODE 1
Press START to store the set value. 2. AE STOP MODE 0
(Default: 128, set range: 0 – 255)

SIMULATION 46-17 Select 1, and

Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
CCD/CIS SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. press [START] key.
1. CCD ODD 128 2. CCD EVEN 128
3. CIS 128 1 SIMULATION 46-19
EXP. MODE SETUP . INPUT VALUE 1-2, AND PRESS START.
1. AE MODE
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. 1

SIMULATION 46-17 Select 2, and Press [START] key or

CCD SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP.INPUT VALUE 0-255, AND PRESS press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
START.
1. CCD ODD 128 SIMULATION 46-19
EXP. MODE SETUP . INPUT VALUE 0-1, AND PRESS START.
2. AE STOP MODE
0

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 28

<Set value 1>
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START.
1 AE mode 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2 AE fixed mode 2. MAGNIFICATION 100

<AE mode>
3. CCD(MAIN)
6. CIS(MAIN) 50
50 4. CCD(SUB) 50 5. SPF(SUB) 50 2
1 Picture priority mode
Select other than 0 - 2,
2 Toner consumption priority mode and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

<AE fixed mode>

SIMULATION 48-1
0 AE fixed function : OFF MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
3. CCD(MAIN)
1 AE fixed function : ON 50
Default : 0 Select 1, and
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.
46-20
SIMULATION 48-1
Purpose Adjustment MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.

Function Used to adjust the copy density correction in the

(Content) SPF/DSPF copy mode for the document table copy Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
mode. This adjustment is made so that the copy press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

density becomes the same as that in the document SIMULATION 48-1

table copy mode. MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
Item Picture quality 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
Operation/ 1) The exposure correction of OC and SPF is per- 5. BPT
(ABOVE +10 : DUPLEX MODE)
Procedure formed. The current set value is displayed on
the right of each item. (Set value) Select 2, and
Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
2) Set with 10 digit key pad. (Default 128, set range 0 – 255)
3) Add "Set value - 128" to the shading adjustment value SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT.
(SIM 46-17). (MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%) 100
SIMULATION 46-20
OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
1. SPF(ODD) 128
2. SPF (EVEN) 128 1 <List of set values 1>
3. DSPF 128
0 Paper feed tray selection
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. 1 Copy start (Default)
2 Print magnification ratio
3 Main scan magnification ratio (CCD)
SIMULATION 46-20
OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-255, AND PRESS 4 Sub scan magnification ratio (CCD)
START. 5 SPF surface magnification ratio (sub scan)
1. SPF(ODD) 128 6 SPF back magnification ratio (CIS main scan)
<List of display values 1>
<Set value>
Normal display NOW COPYING
1 SPF (surface CCD odd pixel) ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
2 SPF (surface CCD even pixel) Jam JAM
3 DSPF (back surface) Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
<List of set values 2>
Main code 48 1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2
48-1
3 TRAY3
Purpose Adjustment 4 TRAY4
Function Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio 5 Manual feed
(Content) (main scan direction, sub scan direction).
∗ Above + 10 becomes the duplex mode (DD), making duplex
Section Scanner (reading) copy.
Item Picture quality
<List of set values 3>
Operation/ Perform the magnification ratio correction.
Procedure 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right Set range 25 – 400%
of each item. In this screen, be sure to select
"1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad.
Press P to store the set value. (Default 50, set range 0 – 99)
3) The greater the set value is, the greater the correction is.
1 step : 0.1% adjustment
4) Press START to start copying and store the set value.
(Display value: 1)
5) Select the paper feed tray. (Set value : 2)
6) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 29

48-5 SIMULATION 50-1
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START.
Purpose Adjustment 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 100
Function Used to adjust the exposure motor speed.
(Content)
3. RRCA 50 4. RRCB
6. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD) 15
50 5. DENB 35
7. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE) 20
2
8. DENA 35 9. FR_VOID 35
Section Scanner (reading)
Item Picture quality Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Operation/ 1) The current set value is displayed on the right
Procedure of each item.
SIMULATION 50-1
2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
3. RRCA
3) Press START to store the set value. 50
(Default 50, set range 0 – 99)
Select 1, and
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
SIMULATION 48-5 Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START. Or copying is terminated.
0. MIR(220) 50 1. MIR(169) 50
50 3. MIR(55) 50 SIMULATION 50-1
2. MIR(110)
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
4. SPF(220) 50 5. SPF(110) 50 0
Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
Select 0 -5 and
press [START] key. Press [START] key or
[CUSTOM SETTING] key. SIMULATION 50-1
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
SIMULATION 48-5 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
SCAN MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 5. BPT
START.
0. MIR(220) 50 Select 2, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

<List of display values> SIMULATION 50-1

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT.
0 Mirror motor (220mm/sec) (MAGNIFICATION)
1 Mirror motor (168.7mm) INPUT 25-400(%) 100
2 Mirror motor (110mm/sec)
3 Mirror motor (55mm/sec)
4 SPF motor (220mm/sec) <List of set values 1>
5 SPF motor (110mm/sec) Item Content Default Set range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray — 1–5
selection
Main code 50 1 COPY START Copy start (Initial — —
value)
50-1 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification — 25 – 400
ratio setup
Purpose Adjustment
3 RRCA Document scan start 50 0 – 99
Function Used to adjust the copy image position and the
position adjustment
(Content) void area (image loss) on print paper in the copy
mode. (A similar adjustment can be made with SIM 4 RRCB Resist roller clutch 50 0 – 99
50-2 (simple method).) ON timing
adjustment value
Item Picture quality
5 DENB Rear edge void 35 0 – 99
Operation/ Perform the copy lead edge adjustment.
quantity adjustment
Procedure 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
value
of each item. In this screen, be sure to select
"1: COPY START." (Set value: 1) 6 IMAGE LOSS Lead edge image 15 0 – 99
(LEAD) loss quantity set
2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad.
value
Press P to store the set value.
7 IMAGE LOSS Side image loss 20 0 – 99
3) Press START to start copying and store the set value. (SIDE) quantity set value
(Display value: 1)
8 DENA Lead edge void 35 0 – 99
4) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) quantity set value
9 FR_VOIDFR Void quantity 35 0 – 99
adjustment value
<List of display values 1>
Normal display NOW COPYING
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 30

<List of set values 2> <List of set values 1>
1 TRAY1 Item Content Default Set range
2 TRAY2 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray — 1–5
3 TRAY3 selection
4 TRAY4 1 COPY START Copy start (Initial —
5 Manual feed value)
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification — 25 – 400
<List of set values 3>
ratio setup
Set range 25 – 400% 3 L1 Document scan start — 0 – 999
position adjustment
4 L2 Resist roller clutch — 0 – 999
50-2 ON timing
adjustment value
Purpose Adjustment
5 IMAGE LOSS Rear edge void 15 0 – 99
Function Used to adjust the copy image position and the
(LEAD) quantity adjustment
(Content) void area (image loss) on print paper in the copy
value
mode. (This simulation is a simpler procedure
compared the similar adjustment using SIM 50-1.) 6 IMAGE LOSS Lead edge image 20 0 – 99
(SIDE) loss quantity set
Item Picture quality
value
Operation/ Perform the copy lead edge adjustment.
7 DENB Side image loss 35 0 – 99
Procedure 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
quantity set value
of each item. In this screen, be sure to select
"1: COPY START." (Set value: 1) 8 DENA Lead edge void 35 0 – 99
quantity set value
2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad.
9 FR_VOIDFR Void quantity 35 0 – 99
Press P to store the set value.
adjustment value
3) Press START to start copying and store the set value.
(Display value: 1) <List of display values 1>
4) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) Normal display NOW COPYING
SIMULATION 50-2 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START. Jam JAM
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 400 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
3. L1 320 4. L2 105
6. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE) 20
5. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD) 15 2 <List of set values 2>
7. DENB 35 8. DENA 35 9. FR_VOID 35
1 TRAY1
Select other than 0 - 2, 2 TRAY2
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4
SIMULATION 50-2
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 5 Manual feed
3. L1
50 <List of set values 3>
Select 1, and
Press [START] key.
Set range 25 – 400%
press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.

SIMULATION 50-2 50-6

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). NOW COPYING.
Purpose Adjustment
Select 0, and Press [START] key or Function Copy lead edge adjustment (DSPF)
press [START] key. (Content)
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
Item Picture quality
SIMULATION 50-2
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. Operation/ Perform the SPF copy lead edge adjustment.
(FEED TRAY) Procedure 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1 of each item. In this screen, be sure to select
5. BPT
"1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
Select 2, and Press [START] key or 2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad.
press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
Press P to store the set value.
SIMULATION 50-2 3) Press START to start copying and store the set value.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). (Display value: 1)
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%) 100 4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2)
5) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 31

 <List of set values 2>
SIMULATION 50-6
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS START.
1 TRAY1 11 TRAY1 with Duplex
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 100 2 TRAY2 12 TRAY2 with Duplex
3. SIDE1 50 4. SIDE2 50
2 3 TRAY3 13 TRAY3 with Duplex
5. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE1 15
6. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE1 20 4 TRAY4 14 TRAY4 with Duplex
7. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE2 15
8. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE2 20
5 Manual feed 15 Manual feed with Duplex
9. REAR LOSS SIDE1 0 10. REAR LOSS SIDE2 0
<List of set values 3>
Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. Set range 25 – 200%

SIMULATION 50-6
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 50-7
3. SIDE1
50 Purpose Adjustment
Select 1, and Function Copy lead edge adjustment (Simple method)
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. (Content) (DSPF)
Or copying is terminated.
Item Picture quality
SIMULATION 50-6 Operation/ Perform the SPF copy lead edge adjustment.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). NOW COPYING. Procedure (Simple method)
1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
Select 0, and
press [START] key.
Press [START] key or of each item. In this screen, be sure to select
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
"1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
SIMULATION 50-6 2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START. Press P to store the set value.
(FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1 3) Press START to start copying and store the set value.
5. BPT (Display value: 1)
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE)
Select 2, and Press [START] key or
4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2)
press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key. 5) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3)

SIMULATION 50-6 SIMULATION 50-7

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS START.
(MAGNIFICATION) 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
INPUT 25-200(%) 100 2. MAGNIFICATION 200
3. L4 50 4.L5 160
5. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE1 15
2
6. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE1 20
7. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE2 15
<List of set values 1>
8. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE2 20
9. REAR LOSS SIDE1 0 10. REAR LOSS SIDE2 0
Item Content Default Set range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray — 1–5 Select other than 0 - 2,
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
selection and press [START] key.

1 COPY START Copy start (Initial — —

value) SIMULATION 50-7
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). INPUT VALUE 0-999, AND PRESS
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification — 25 – 200 START.
ratio setup 3. L4 50
(25 – 400%) Select 1, and
press [START] key. Press [START] key.
3 SIDE 1 Document front scan 50 0 – 99 Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.
start position
adjustment SIMULATION 50-7
4 SIDE 2 Document back scan 50 0 – 99 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). NOW COPYING.

start position
adjustment Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
5 IMAGE LOSS Front lead edge 15 0 – 99
(LEAD) SIDE 1 image loss set value SIMULATION 50-7
6 IMAGE LOSS Front side image loss 20 0 – 99 LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
(SIDE) SIDE 1 set value 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
7 IMAGE LOSS Back lead edge 15 0 – 99 5. BPT
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE)
(LEAD) SIDE 2 image loss set value
Select 2, and Press [START] key or
8 IMAGE LOSS Back side image loss 20 0 – 99 press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
(SIDE) SIDE 2 set value
9 REAR LOSS Front rear edge 0 0 – 20 SIMULATION 50-7
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.).
SIDE1 image loss set value (MAGNIFICATION)
10 REAR LOSS Back rear edge 0 0 – 20 INPUT 25-200(%) 100
SIDE2 image loss set value
<List of display values 1>
Normal display NOW COPYING
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 32

<List of set values 1> 50-10
Item Content Default Set range Purpose Adjustment
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray — 1–5
Function Used to adjust the print image center position.
selection (Content) (Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
1 COPY START Copy start — —
Section Image process (ICU)
(Initial value)
Item Picture quality
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 200 25 – 200
Operation/ Perform the print off-center adjustment.
ratio setup
Procedure 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right
(25 – 400%)
of each item. In this screen, be sure to select
3 L4 Distance from the — 0 – 999 "1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
front lead edge of
2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad.
copy image to the
Press P to store the set value.
scale of 10mm.
(SPF: 200%) 3) When the value of UNIT:0.1mm/STEP is increased, the image
4 L5 Distance from the — 0 – 999 is shifted toward the rear side.
back lead edge of 4) Press START to start copying and store the set value.
copy image to the (Display value: 1)
scale of 10mm. 5) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2)
(SPF: 200%) 6) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3)
5 IMAGE LOSS Front lead edge 15 0 – 99
(LEAD) SIDE 1 image loss set value SIMULATION 50-10
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START.
6 IMAGE LOSS Front side image loss 20 0 – 99 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
(SIDE) SIDE 1 set value 2. MAGNIFICATION 100

7 IMAGE LOSS Back lead edge 15 0 – 99

3. TRAY1
6. TRAY4
50 4. TRAY2
50 7. BPT
50
50
5.TRAY3
8.ADU
50
50
2
(LEAD) SIDE 2 image loss set value
8 IMAGE LOSS Back side image loss 20 0 – 99 Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
(SIDE) SIDE 2 set value
9 REAR LOSS Front rear edge 0 0 – 20
SIMULATION 50-10
SIDE1 image loss set value PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
10 REAR LOSS Back rear edge 0 0 – 20 START.
SIDE2 image loss set value 3. TRAY1 50
Select 1, and
<List of display values 1> press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.
Normal display NOW COPYING
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. SIMULATION 50-10
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
<List of set values 2> press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

1 TRAY1 11 TRAY1 with Duplex SIMULATION 50-10

PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
2 TRAY2 12 TRAY2 with Duplex (FEED TRAY)
3 TRAY3 13 TRAY3 with Duplex 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
5. BPT
4 TRAY4 14 TRAY4 with Duplex (ABOVE +10: DUPLEX MODE)
5 Manual feed 15 Manual feed with Duplex Select 2, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
<List of set values 3>
SIMULATION 50-10
Set range 25 – 200%
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT.
(MAGNIFICATION)
100
INPUT 25-400(%)

<List of set values 1>

Item Content Default Set range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray — 1–5
selection
1 COPY START Copy start —
(Initial value)
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 100 25 – 400
ratio setup
(25 – 400%)
3 TRAY 1 Tray 1 adjustment 50 0 – 99
4 TRAY2 Tray 2 adjustment 50 0 – 99
5 TRAY3 Tray 3 adjustment 50 0 – 99
6 TRAY4 Tray 4 adjustment 50 0 – 99
7 BPT Manual feed tray 50 0 – 99
adjustment
8 ADU Adjustment in refeed 50 0 – 99
from ADU

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 33

<List of display values 1>
SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START.
Normal display NOW COPYING 0. TRAY SELECT 1. COPY START
1
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. 2. MAGNIFICATION 100

Jam JAM 3. PLATEN 50 4. SPF SIDE1 50 5. SPF SIDE2 50

2
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
<List of set values 2>
1 TRAY1 SIMULATION 50-12
2 TRAY2 ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START.
3 TRAY3 3. PLATEN 50
4 TRAY4 Select 1, and
5 Manual feed press [START] key. Press [START] key.
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Or copying is terminated.
∗ The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial
screen. SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
At the above value + 10, the SPF enters the duplex mode (DD),
making duplex copies.
Select 0, and Press [START] key or
<List of set values 3> press [START] key.
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

Set range 25 – 400% SIMULATION 50-12

ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
(Adjustment procedure) (FEED TRAY)
1) Select a paper feed tray to be used in the adjustment, set the 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 1
5. BPT
magnification ratio, and enter the adjustment item. (ABOVE +10: DUPLEX MODE)
2) After entering the adjustment value, press START, and print- Select 2, and Press [START] key or
ing is started. press [START] key. press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

3) Check the off-center (distance from the paper edge) of the SIMULATION 50-12
copy. Repeat procedure 2) until a satisfactory result is ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. 100
obtained. (MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%)

50-12 <List of set values 1>

Purpose Adjustment Item Content Default Set range
Function Used to adjust the reading image center position. 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray — 1–5
(Content) (Adjusted for each document mode.) selection
Section Image process (ICU) 1 COPY START Copy start —
Item Picture quality (Initial value)
Operation/ Perform the document print off-center adjustment. 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 100 25 – 400
Procedure 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right ratio setup
of each item. In this screen, be sure to select (25 – 400%)
"1: COPY START." (Set value: 1) 3 PLATEN OC mode adjustment 50 0 – 99
2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad. 4 SPF SIDE1 SPF Front surface 50 0 – 99
Press P to store the set value. adjustment
3) When the value of UNIT:0.1mm/STEP is increased, the image 5 SPF SIDE2 SPF Back surface 50 0 – 99
is shifted toward the front side. adjustment
4) Press START to start copying and store the set value.
<List of display values 1>
(Display value: 1)
5) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) Normal display NOW COPYING
6) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
<List of set values 2>
1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4
5 Manual feed
∗ The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial
screen.
At the above value + 10, the SPF enters the duplex mode (DD),
making duplex copies.
<List of set values 3>
Set range 25 – 400%

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 34

(Adjustment procedure) <List of set values 1>
1) Select a paper feed tray to be used in the adjustment, set the Item Content 42PPM 31PPM
magnification ratio, and enter the adjustment item.
0 TRAY Paper feed tray selection
2) After entering the adjustment value, press START, and print- SELECT (1 – 5)
ing is started.
1 PRINT Copy start (Initial value)
3) Check the off-center (distance from the paper edge) of the
START
copy. Repeat procedure 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained. 2 TRAY1 Tray 1 resist adjustment value 60 65
3 TRAY2 Tray 2 resist adjustment value 50 55
4 DESK Desk resist adjustment value 50 55
Main code 51
5 BPT Manual tray resist adjustment 55 60
value
51-2
6 ADU ADU resist adjustment value 50 55
Purpose Adjustment
7 SPF SPF resist adjustment value 60 60
Function Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on the
(HIGH) (High speed)
(Content) resist roller in each section (machine paper feed,
duplex paper feed, SPF paper feed). 8 SPF SPF resist adjustment value 75 75
(This adjustment is required when the print image (LOW) (Low speed)
position varies or when paper jam occurs
<List of display values 1>
frequently.)
Section Paper transport (paper exit, switchback, transport) Normal display NOW COPYING
Item Operation ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Operation/ Perform the resist quantity adjustment. Jam JAM
Procedure 1) The current set value is highlighted on the right Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
of each item. In this screen, be sure to select
<List of set values 2>
"1: COPY START." (Set value: 1)
2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key pad. 1 TRAY1 11 TRAY1 with Duplex
Press P to store the set value. 2 TRAY2 12 TRAY2 with Duplex
3) When the value is increased by 1, the resist quantity is 3 TRAY3 13 TRAY3 with Duplex
changed by 1ms. 4 TRAY4 14 TRAY4 with Duplex
4) Press START to start copying and store the set value. 5 Manual feed 15 Manual feed with Duplex
(Display value: 1) ∗ The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial
5) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) screen.
SIMULATION 51-2
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START Main code 53
2. TRAY1 60 3. TRAY2 50 4. DESK 50
5. BPT 55 6. ADU 50
7. SPF(HIGH) 60 8. SPF(LOW) 75
1 53-6
Select other than 0 or 1, Purpose Adjustment
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
and press [START] key. Function Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level.
(Content)
SIMULATION 51-2
Section SPF/DSPF
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START. Item Operation
2. TRAY1 Operation/ Adjust the machine SPF document tray size
Procedure adjustment.
1) Extend the guide to MAX. position, select 1,
Select 1, and
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. and press START.
press [START] key.
Or copying is terminated. When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUS-
SIMULATION 51-2 TOM SETTING to return to the initial screen.
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. NOW PRINTING.
2) Move the guide to A4R position, select 2, and press START.
When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to
return to the initial screen.
3) Move the guide to A5R position, select 3, and press START.
Select 0, and Press [START] key or
press [START] key.
When COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to
press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
return to the initial screen.
SIMULATION 51-2 4) Move the guide to MIN. position, select 4, and press START.
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is completed.
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) – 4), repeat the adjust-
5. BPT
(ABOVE +10: DUPLEX MODE)
ment again.
∗ This adjustment is performed only when the width detection vol-
ume is replaced.
Normally use SIM 53-7 for input.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 35

 SIMULATION 53-6 Main code 60
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION
2. POSITION 1
60-1
3. POSITION 2
4. MIN. POSITION
1 Purpose Operation test, check
Function Used to check the ICU (DRAM) operation
Select 1, and (Content) (read/write).
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
(SIMM MEMORY/ON BOARD MEMORY)
Section Image process (ICU)
SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. Item Operation
MAX. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") Operation/ Perform read/write check of the ICU image DRUM.
Procedure After starting, NOW CHECKING is displayed
during checking. When the read/write check is
Select 2, and
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key. normally completed, OK is displayed.
If an error occurs, NG is displayed.
SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SIMULATION 60-1
POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") DRAM TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
1. ICU DRAM
Select 3, and
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.
2. ASIC DRAM 1
SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR")

SIMULATION 60-1
DRAM TEST. ... NOW CHECKING.
Select 4, and 1.ICU DRAM
press [START] key. Press [CUSTOME SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MIN. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") Check completed Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

SIMULATION 60-1
DRAM TEST. ... OK (or NG)
1.ICU DRAM
53-7
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
(display, print)
Function Used to enter the adjustment value of SPF width <List of set values>
(Content) detection. 1 ICU DRAM Image memory for ERDH
Section DSPF 2 ASIC DRAM Image memory for ASIC
Item Operation
Operation/ Enter the adjustment value (indicated on the back
Procedure of SPF) of SPF document tray size.
Main code 61

SIMULATION 53-7 61-1

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION: 66 Purpose Operation test, check
2. POSITION 1: 456
Function Used to check the operations of the laser scan unit.
3. POSITION 2:
4. MIN. POSITION:
713
791
1 (Content)
Section PCU
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. Item Operation
Operation/ Check the LSU. Turn on the LSU and check that
SIMULATION 53-7
Procedure the sync signal (HSYNC) is delivered or not. After
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND starting, NOW CHECKING is displayed during
PRESS START. checking. When the test is normally completed, OK
1. MAX. POSITION is displayed. When an error occurs, NG is
66
displayed.

<List of set values>

Item Initial value Range
1 Max. width 66 0 – 1023
2 Adjustment point 1 456
3 Adjustment point 2 713
4 Min. width 791

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 36

 SIMULATION 61-1 SIMULATION 61-4
LSU TEST. PRESS START. LASER POWER SETTING (PRINTER). PRESS START.
1.LSU 1. PRINTER 104 1
1
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key. or [START] key.

SIMULATION 61-4
SIMULATION 61-1 LASER POWER SETTING (PRINTER). INPUT VALUE 104-150, AND PRESS
LSU TEST. ... NOW CHECKING. START.
1. LSU 1. PRINTER 104

Check completed Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

<List of set values>
Initial value Set range
SIMULATION 61-1 1 PRINTER 42PPM 104 104 – 150
LSU TEST. ... OK (or NG)
1. LSU 31PPM 80 (42PPM)
80 – 150
(31PPM)

61-2
Purpose Adjustment Main code 63
Function Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in
(Content) the copy mode.
63-1
Section PCU Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
Item Operation (display, print)
Operation/ Enter the laser power set value in copying, and Function Used to check the shading correction result.
Procedure press START to store it. (Content) (The shading correction result is displayed.)
Section Scanner (exposure)
SIMULATION 61-2 Item Operation
LASER POWER SETTING (COPY). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. Operation/ The latest shading data are displayed.
1. AE 104 2. CHARA 104
Procedure
3. MIX 104 4. PHOTO 104 1
SIMULATION 63-1
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key SHADING DATA DISPLAY.
or [START] key. (CCD)
ODD GAIN: 128 ODD OFFSET: 2 ODD MAX: 255
SIMULATION 61-2 ODD MIN.: 255 ODD AVE.: 255 ODD DEV.: 0
LASER POWER SETTING(COPY). INPUT VALUE 104-150, AND PRESS START. EVEN GAIN: 128 EVEN OFFSET: 2 EVEN MAX: 255
1. AE EVEN MIN.: 255 EVEN AVE.: 255 EVEN DEV.: 0
104 (CIS)
GAIN: 128 OFFSET: 0 OFFSET: 255
MIN.: 255 AVE.: 255 DEV: 0
<List of set values>
Initial value Set range <Set values>
1 Auto exposure 42PPM 104 104 – 150
CCD data
mode 31PPM 80 (42PPM)
Values Description
2 Text mode 42PPM 104 80 – 150
(31PPM) ODD GAIN Pixel gain adjustment value
31PPM 80
EVEN GAIN Pixel gain adjustment value
3 Text/Photo mode 42PPM 104
ODD MAX Pixel MAX
31PPM 80
ODD MIN Pixel MIN
4 Photo mode 42PPM 104
ODD AVE Od pixel average
31PPM 80
EVEN MAX Even pixel MAX
EVEN MIN Even pixel MIN
61-4 EVEN AVE Even pixel average
ODD OFFSET Black offset
Purpose Adjustment
EVEN OFFSET Even offset
Function Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) in ODD DEV Odd standard deviation
(Content) the printer mode.
EVEN DEV Even standard deviation
Section PCU
CIS data : Only when DSPF installed
Operation/ Set the laser power value in the printer mode.
Values Description
Procedure Enter the value and press START to store it.
GAIN Gain adjustment value
MAX Pixel MAX
MIN Pixel MIN
AVE Pixel average
OFFSET Black offset
DEV Standard deviation

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 37

 Main code 64
63-2
64-1
Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
(display, print) Purpose Operation test, check
Function Used to execute shading. Function Used to check the operations of the printer section
(Content) (Content) (self printing).
Section Scanner (exposure) (The print pattern, paper feed mode, print mode,
print quantity, density can be changed optionally.)
Item Operation
Section Printer
Operation/ Execute shading. During shading, EXECUTING is
Procedure displayed. Item Operation
When shading is completed, COMPLETED is Operation/ Perform self printing. The current set data is
displayed. Procedure displayed on the right side of the menu.

SIMULATION 64-1
SIMULATION 63-2
SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
SHADING EXECUTION.SELECT1-3, AND PRESS START. 0.TRAY SELECT :1 1.PRINT START
1. OC SHADING 2.PRINT PATTERN : 87 3.DENSITY : 1
2. DSPF SHADING
3. CCD TEST SHADING
1 4.MULTI :1 5.MODE :1
1
6.LEVEL :1 7.DUPLEX : 1

Press [START] key. Select 1, and Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key

press [START] key. or [START] key.
SIMULATION 63-2 (2) SIMULATION 64-1
SHADING EXECUTING...
1. OC SHADING 1 SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
(PRINT PATTERN)
INPUT 50-99. 87
After completion
Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key to stop.
(3) SIMULATION 64-1
SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
SIMULATION 63-2
(DENSITY)
SHADING COMPLETED.
1 1-255 100
1. OC SHADING
(4) SIMULATION 64-1
SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
<List of set values> (MULTI COUNT)
1-999 1
1 OC analog data correction and shading correction data
making (5) SIMULATION 64-1
2 DSPF analog level correction and shading correction data SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-8, AND PRESS START.
(MODE)
making 1.STANDARD 2.SMOOTHING 3.TONER SAVE 4.HALF TONE
3 Execution of CCD data taking test 5.SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE 6.SMOOTHING+ HALF TONE
7.TONER SAVE+ HALF TONE
8. SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE+ HALF TONE 1
63-7 (6) SIMULATION 64-1
SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
Purpose Adjustment (LEVEL)

Function Used to adjust the white plate scan start position in

1-5 3
(Content) shading white correction.
Section Scanner (exposure) (0) SIMULATION 64-1
SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
Item Operation
(FEED TRAY)
Operation/ Adjust the white plate scan start position in shading 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 5. BPT
1
Procedure white correction. Enter the adjustment value and (7) SIMULATION 64-1
press START to store it. SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
(DUPLEX)
1.NO 2.YES
1
SIMULATION 63-7
SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START.
1. CCD 6 1 SIMULATION 64-1
SELF PRINT MODE... EXECUTING...
0.TRAY SELECT :1
2.PRINT PATTERN : 87 3.DENSITY : 1
Press [START] key. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key
or [START] key.
4.MULTI
6.LEVEL
:1
:1
5.MODE :1
7.DUPLEX : 1
0
SIMULATION 63-7
SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 1-16, AND PRESS
START.
1. CCD 6

<Set value>
Initial value Range
1 CCD scan 6 1-16
(1 count : 0.5 mm)

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 38

<List of set values>
Main code 65
0 Paper feed tray 1: TRAY1
2: TRAY2 65-1
3: TRAY3
Purpose Adjustment
4: TRAY4
Function Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display
5: MANUAL
(Content) section) detecting position.
1 Print execution Print is started with the set data.
Section Operation (display, operation)
2 Print pattern Refer to the print pattern.
Operation/ Adjust the coordinates of the touch panel.
3 Picture density Enable only when No. 79, 80, or 84 is
Procedure Press the four cross marks on the LCD, and the
selected.
pressed mark will turn gray. When all four marks
4 Print quantity — are pressed, the adjustment is completed.
5 Print mode 1: Standard
2: Smoothing ON SIMULATION 65-1
3: Toner save ON
4: Half tone ON
5: Smoothing + Toner save
6: Smoothing + Half tone
7: Toner save + half tone
8: Smoothing + Toner save + Half tone
6 Print level 1–5
7 Duplex 1: Single print
65-2
2: Duplex print Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check
<Print pattern> (display, print)
Function Used to check the result of the touch panel
50 Total surface 1BY1 (Vertical) (Content) (LCD display section) detecting position
51 Total surface 1BY1 (Horizontal) adjustment. (The coordinates are displayed.)
52 Total surface 1BY2 (Vertical) Section Operation (display, operation)
53 Total surface 1BY2 (Horizontal) Operation/ Check the touch panel. When the touch panel is
54 Total surface 1BY3 (Vertical) Procedure pressed, the coordinates (dot conversion values) in
55 Total surface 1BY3 (Horizontal) X/Y directions are displayed.
56 Total surface 1BY4 (Vertical)
57 Total surface 1BY4 (Horizontal) SIMULATION 65-2
400 500 600
58 Total surface 1BY5 (Vertical) 40

100 200 300

59 Total surface 1BY5 (Horizontal) 100

60 Total surface 2BY2 (Vertical)

61 Total surface 2BY2 (Horizontal) 140
X: 600
62 Total surface 2BY3 (Vertical) 180 Y: 200
63 Total surface 2BY3 (Horizontal)
64 Whole surface background copy
65 Special pattern (Vertical)
66 1 block 128 pixels/every 32 gradations
Main code 67
67 1 block 128 pixels/every 16 gradations
68 1 block 128 pixels/every 8 gradations 67-2
69 11-do t pattern
Purpose Operation test, check
70 Scaled print adjustment pattern (Vertical)
Function Used to check the parallel I/F operation of the
71 Grid pattern
(Content) printer.
72 Slant line 45 degrees
(This simulation is made only in the production site
73 Slant line 26.6 degrees and not in the market. It requires a special tool.)
74 Slant line 63.4 degrees Section Printer
75 ID-BG pattern Item Operation
76 Dot pattern 12.5% Operation/ The Centro port is checked.
77 Dot pattern 28% Procedure 1) Insert the adjustment jig into the Centro port
78 Dot pattern 50% under the ready state, and press STRT.
79 Whole surface error diffusion background 2) The Centro port check is started.
70 Whole surface dither process background 3) If normal, OK is displayed. If abnormal, the
81 1 block 128 pixels/every 32 gradations stage number where an error occurred and NG
82 1 block 128 pixels/every 16 gradations are displayed.
83 1 block 128 pixels/every 8 gradations
<This simulation is used only for production, and inhibited in the
84 Memory check pattern market.>
85 Cleaning check pattern
86 Offset check pattern
87 Test B image (for aging)
88 Printer 6%
89 Printer 5%
98 List of setup values

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 39

 SIMULATION 67-2 67-11
CENTRO PORT CHECK.
CENTRO PORT: READY Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to set Enable/Disable of the parallel I/F select
Press [START] key (Content) signal of the printer.
under the ready state. Press [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
Section Printer
SIMULATION 67-2 Item Operation
CENTRO PORT CHECK. Operation/ The select signal of Centro port is set.
CENTRO PORT: OK (or STAGE7 NG )
Procedure Press START to set.

<Display message> SIMULATION 67-11

CENTRO SELECT IN SIGNAL SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
WAITING Waiting 0. OFF
READY Check start OK 1. ON 0
OK Check complete (normal)
STAGE*NG Check end (An error occurred in Stage *: 1-11) <Set values>
0 OFF
1 ON (Initial value)

2. Adjustment values
LCD MFP CONTROLLER
A. Processing adjustment values
Each controller has its EEPROM. The adjustment values are col-
lected to the MFP controller. When any adjustment value is
changed, it is retuned to each
If any adjustment value is changed, the changed value is returned controller and saved.
to the controller and saved.
Transmission of saved
adjustment value
(When turning on the power, etc.)

SCANNER
PCU CONTROLLER

B. Adjustment values
(1) Adjustment values saved in PCU
Counters Adjustment values Others
Drum rotating time counter Developing bias voltage value Serial number
(accumulated time)
Developing unit rotating time counter Cleaning mode developing bias voltage value Trouble history
Toner supply time (Section IC chip) Main high voltage adjustment Tray 1 size
Drum rotating time (Section IC chip) Transfer charger voltage value Manual feed destination information
Total counter Transfer belt cleaning voltage value Tray 2 destination information
Maintenance counter Toner concentration reference value Desk 1 destination information
Developing counter Concentration correction start set time (Developing Desk 2 destination information
unit)
Drum counter Concentration correction rotating time (Developing Machine tray remaining paper quantity
unit) data
Toner cartridge counter Concentration correction quantity (Developing unit) Multi-purpose remaining paper quantity
data
Effective paper counter Correction execution direction, upper/lower limits Option tray 1 remaining paper quantity
(Developing unit) data
Tray 1 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction Option tray 2 remaining paper quantity
(low temperature side) correction quantity data
Multi-purpose paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction Final toner concentration sensor output
(low temperature side) set temperature value
Desk 1 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction Toner cartridge IC chip destination
(low temperature side) cancel temperature
Desk 2 paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction Counter mode setup
(high temperature side) correction quantity
Manual paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction White paper exit count setup
(high temperature side) judgment temperature
ADU paper feed counter Toner concentration temperature correction Trouble memory mode setup
(high temperature side) judgment voltage difference
Staple counter Toner concentration temperature correction Fusing operation mode (anti-curling)
(high temperature side) correction value

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 40

 Counters Adjustment values Others
Punch counter Toner concentration temperature correction CE mark conforming operation mode
(low temperature side) cancel temperature
Machine right side paper exit counter Toner concentration temperature correction Maintenance cycle
(high temperature side) toner control delay time
Multi-purpose width adjustment value Print stop setup at developer life over
Manual feed width adjustment value Saddle alignment operation priority mode
Heater lamp temperature (center, normal control)
Lead edge adjustment
Lead edge void set value
Rear edge void set value
Side edge setup
Print off-center adjustment value
Resist quantity adjustment value
Laser power adjustment value
PPD1 sensor adjustment
Process correction inhibit allow setup value
Developing bias rising correction wait time
Developing bias rising correction adjustment value
Built-in finisher jogger position adjustment
Saddle adjustment value

(2) Adjustment values saved in SCANNER

Counters Adjustment values Others
Scan counter Original lead edge adjustment value Exposure mode setup value
SPF paper pass counter Original off-center adjustment value Serial number
Original image loss quantity adjustment value
Magnification ratio adjustment value
SPF resist quantity adjustment value
Exposure motor speed adjustment value
Platen original detection adjustment value
SPF width detection adjustment value
Touch panel adjustment value
Exposure level adjustment value
Gamma change value
OC/SPF exposure correction value
Shading adjustment value (CCD/CIS)
CCD shading start position adjustment value
(3) Adjustment values saved in MFP controller
Counters Adjustment values Others
Copy counter Trouble history
Printer counter Jam history
Trouble counter Destination setup
Jam counter Language setup
Toner save mode setup
13" setup
Auditor setup
Serial number
Middle binding mode AMS setup
PC/Modem communication trouble
detection YES/NO setup
Tag number setup
γ change value
Exposure mode setup
OC/SPF exposure correction value
Printer setup values

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 SIMULATIONS 9 - 41

[10] MACHINE OPERATION • When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot.

1. Acceptable originals
Hole positions
A stack of up to 50 original sheets of the same size paper can be
set in the document feeder tray provided the stack
height is within the limit shown below. Hole
A stack of up to 30 mixed size originals can be set if the width of positions
the originals is the same and the stack height is within
the limit shown below. In this case, however, stapling and duplex Hole positions
will not function and some special functions may not
give the expected result.

A. Size and weight of acceptable originals

2. Standard original setting orientation
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" Descriptions of functions that follow in this manual assume that
or A5
Original size: 11" x 17" originals are oriented as shown.
or A3 Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document
(148 x 210 mm) (297 x 420 mm) glass so that the top of the original is positioned to the rear side of
the machine.
Weight (thickness):
If not, staples will be incorrectly positioned and some special fea-
tures may not give the expected result.
14 lbs. or 50g/m 2 34 lbs. or 128g/m 2
Top Top
2
g/m ... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m 2

B. Total amount of originals that can be set in

the document feeder tray Bottom
Bottom

Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 1/4" or

6.5 mm (for 14 to 21 lbs. or 50 to 80 g/m2 paper). Top
Top
1/4" or 6.5 mm
or less

Bottom
Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 3/16" or Bottom
5.0 mm (for 21 to 34 lbs. or 80 to 128 g/m2 paper).
3/16" or 5.0 mm
or less
3. Automatic copy image rotation -
rotation copying
<Notes on use of the automatic document feeder> If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the
• Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of original image will be automatically rotated 90" and copied. (When
originals out of the specified range may cause an original mis- an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) When enlarge-
feed. ment of originals larger than 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 is selected, rotation
• Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure cannot be done.
to remove any staples or paper clips.
[Example]
• If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue
from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they are fed. If not,
the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotation
be soiled.
• To prevent incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds or
smudges on copies, use the following as a guide for feeding
originals.
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper
or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be
fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through
the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled or folded or have Face down Face down
loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with
multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole
punched paper may not feed correctly.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MACHINE OPERATION 10 - 1

4. Specifications of paper trays
The specifications for types and sizes of paper for loading paper trays are shown below.
Tray No.
Tray (tray Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes Paper weight
name)
Paper tray 1 Tray 1 Plain paper • 8-1/2 x 11, A4, B5 16 to 28 lbs. or
(Refer to the next page for applicable papers.) 60 to 105g/m²
Stand with Tray 2/ Plain paper • If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the 16 to 34 lbs. or
multipurpose drawer/ bypass (Refer to the next page for applicable papers.) paper size and type, the following paper 60 to 128g/m²
bypass tray tray sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function:
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11,
8-1/2 x 11R, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2R
• If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the
paper size and type, the following paper
sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2 x 13
• Non-standard sizes
Special • Thick paper • If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the See the
paper • Labels, transparency film paper size and type, the following paper remarks for
(Refer to sizes can be used with the automatic special paper
the next detection function:
page for 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11R
applicable • If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the
papers.) paper size and type , the following paper
sizes can be used with the automatic
detection function:
A4, A4R, B5, B5R
• Non-standard sizes smaller than 8-1/2 x 11
or A4
Postcard • Japanese official postcard
Envelopes can only be fed from • Applicable standard size envelopes:
the multi-purpose drawer. COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5
Applicable paper stock weight for • Non-standard size
envelopes is 20 to 23 lbs. or 75 to
90g/m²

A. Applicable plain paper

For satisfactory results, plain paper must conform to the following requirement
Paper in AB system Paper in inch system
A5 to A3 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 to 11 x 17
Plain paper 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105g/m²
Recycled, colored, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions as above.
B. Applicable special paper
For satisfactory results, special paper must conform to the following requirements.
Type Remarks
Special paper Thick paper • For 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 to 8-1/2 x 11 or A5 to A4 sizes, thick paper ranging from 16 to 34 lbs.
or 60 to 128g/m² can be used.
• For sizes larger than 8-1/2 x 11 or A4, thick paper ranging from 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105g/m²
can be used.
• Other thick papers Index stock (65 lbs. or 176g/m²) can be used. Cover stock (110 lbs. or 200 to
205g/m²) can be used but only for 8-1/2 x 11, A4 or smaller paper in the portrait orientation.
Transparency film, • Use SHARP recommended paper. Do not use labels other than SHARP recommended labels.
labels, and tracing Doing so may leave adhesive residue in the printer, causing paper misfeeds, smudges on prints
paper or other machine trouble.
Postcards • Japanese official postcards can be used.
Envelopes • Applicable standard envelopes: COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5
• Envelopes can only be fed from the multi-purpose drawer.
Applicable paper stock weight for envelopes is 20 to 23 lbs. or 75 to 90g/m².

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MACHINE OPERATION 10 - 2

5. Printing onto envelopes 3) Gently close the duplex module.
If the machine is not equipped with a duplex module, close the
• Do not use envelopes that have metal clasps, plastic snaps, side cover.
string closures, windows, linings, self-adhesive patches or syn-
thetic materials. Attempting to print on these may cause mis-
feeds, inadequate toner adherence or other trouble.
• Envelopes of which the surface is not flat because of embossing
may cause the prints to become smudges.
• Under high humidity and temperature conditions the glue flaps
on some envelopes may become sticky and be sealed closed
when printed.
• Use only envelopes which are flat and crisply folded. Curled or
poorly formed envelopes may be poorly printed or may cause
misfeeds.

A. Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers

When feeding envelopes from the multi purpose drawer, damage
to the envelopes or smudges on prints may occur even if enve-
lopes within specification are used. In this case, the problem may
be reduced by shifting the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers
from the normal position to the lower pressure position. Follow the 6. Loading transparency film
procedure below.
NOTE: Be sure to return the lever to the normal position when Be sure to load the transparency film with the white label side up.
finished feeding envelopes. If not, inadequate toner Make sure no image will be printed on the label.
adherence, paper misfeeds or other trouble may occur. Printing on the label may cause smudges on prints. Transparency
1) Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to the left. film must be set in the portrait orientation.
Unlatch the module and gently move the module away from
the machine. If the machine is not equipped with a duplex
module, open the side cover similarly.

2) Lower the two fusing unit pressure adjusting levers marked A

and B in the illustration.
A

Normal position

Lower pressure position

A: Rear side of B: Front side of

fusing unit fusing unit

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 MACHINE OPERATION 10 - 3

[11] TROUBLE CODES Trouble
Contents Remark
Trouble
codes detection
F1 00 Finisher communication With PCU
1. General trouble Finisher
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a con- installed
sumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the Mail bin stacker With Mail PCU
machine detects and displays it on the display section. This allows communication trouble bin stacker
the user and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of installed
a trouble, this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and 02 mail bin stacker main drive With Mail PCU
stops the machine to minimize the damage. motor trouble bin stacker
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a installed
trouble.) 03 Console finisher paddle With Console PCU
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is motor trouble Finisher
stopped on detection of a trouble.) installed
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be 06 Console finisher slide motor With Console PCU
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, trouble Finisher
improving the repair efficiency.) installed
08 Finisher staple shift motor With PCU
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
trouble Finisher
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
installed
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
sumable part.) 10 Finisher stapler motor trouble With PCU
Finisher
installed
2. Trouble codes list Console finisher stapler With Console PCU
Trouble Trouble motor trouble Finisher
Contents Remark installed
codes detection
C1 00 MC trouble PCU 11 Finisher bundle exit motor With Finisher PCU
C2 00 TC trouble PCU trouble installed
E6 10 CIS shading trouble When the SCANNER Console finisher bundle exit With Console PCU
(Black correction) scanner is motor trouble Finisher
installed installed
11 CIS shading trouble When the SCANNER 12 Mail bin stacker gate trouble With Mail PCU
(White correction) scanner is bin stacker
installed installed
14 CIS-ASIC communication When the SCANNER 15 Finisher lift motor trouble With PCU
trouble scanner is Finisher
installed installed
E7 01 Image data memory trouble ICU Console finisher lift motor With Console PCU
02 Laser trouble PCU trouble Finisher
installed
06 Decode error trouble Controller
19 Finisher alignment motor With PCU
10 Shading trouble When the SCANNER
trouble FRONT Finisher
(Black correction) scanner is
installed
installed
Console finisher alignment With Console PCU
11 Shading trouble When the SCANNER
motor trouble FRONT Finisher
(White correction) scanner is
installed
installed
20 Finisher alignment motor With PCU
13 CCD light quantity check SCANNER
trouble Finisher
error
installed
14 CCD-ASIC communication When the SCANNER
Console finisher alignment With Console PCU
trouble scanner is
motor trouble Finisher
installed
installed
17 DSPF scanning position When the SCANNER
30 Console finisher With Console PCU
adjustment trouble (Detected scanner is
communication trouble Finisher
only when executing an installed
installed
adjustment SIM.)
31 Console finisher fold sensor With Console PCU
50 LSU connection trouble PCU
trouble Finisher
80 SCANNER PWB When the ICU
installed
communication trouble scanner is
32 Console finisher punch unit With Console PCU
installed
communication trouble Finisher
90 PCU communication trouble When the ICU
installed
scanner is
33 Console finisher punch side With Console PCU
installed
register motor trouble Finisher
installed
34 Console finisher punch motor With Console PCU
trouble Finisher
installed

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 1

Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble
Contents Remark Contents Remark
codes detection codes detection
F1 35 Console finisher punch side With Console PCU L8 01 No full-wave signal PCU
register sensor trouble Finisher 02 Full-wave signal width PCU
installed abnormality
36 Console finisher punch With Console PCU U2 00 EEPROM read/write error Controller
timing sensor trouble Finisher (Controller)
installed 11 Counter check sum error Controller
37 Console finisher backup With Console PCU (Controller EEPROM)
RAM trouble Finisher 12 Adjustment value check sum Controller
installed error (Controller EEPROM)
38 Console finisher punch With Console PCU 22 SRAM memory check sum ICU
backup RAM trouble Finisher error (ICU)
installed 80 Scanner section EEPROM When the SCANNER
39 Console finisher punch dust With Console PCU read/write error scanner is
sensor trouble Finisher installed
installed 81 Scanner section memory When the SCANNER
40 Console finisher punch With Console PCU sum check error scanner is
power interruption trouble Finisher installed
installed 90 PCU section EEPROM read/ PCU
80 Finisher 24V power supply With Finisher PCU write error
trouble installed 91 PCU section memory sum PCU
Mail bin stacker 24V power With Mail bin PCU check error
supply trouble stacker U6 00 Desk/LCC communication With Paper PCU
installed trouble feed desk
81 Console finisher transport With Console PCU installed
motor trouble Finisher 01 Desk/LCC1CS lift-up trouble With Paper PCU
installed (Multi-purpose tray) feed desk
87 Finisher staple rotation motor With Finisher installed
trouble installed 02 Desk2 CS lift-up trouble/ With Paper PCU
F2 00 Toner concentration sensor PCU LCC1 lift-up trouble feed desk
open installed
02 Toner supply abnormality PCU 03 Desk3 CS lift-up trouble/ With Paper PCU
04 Improper cartridge PCU LCC2 lift-up trouble feed desk
(Destination error, life cycle installed
error) 10 Desk/LCC transport motor With Paper PCU
05 CRUM error PCU trouble feed desk
39 Process thermistor PCU installed
breakdown U7 00 PC/MODEM communication Controller
F3 12 Tray 1 lift-p trouble PCU error
22 Tray 2 lift-up trouble Multi- PCU CH -- Door open (CH ON) PCU
(Multi-purpose tray) purpose tray 00 No developer cartridge PCU
F9 02 Centro port check error Controller 01 No toner cartridge PCU
H2 00 Thermistor open (HL1) PCU 02 No drum cartridge PCU
01 Thermistor open (HL2) PCU EE EL Auto developer adjustment Only during PCU
H3 00 Heat roller high temperature PCU trouble (Over-toner) DIAG
detection (HL1) EU Auto developer adjustment Only during PCU
01 Heat roller high temperature PCU trouble (Under-toner) DIAG
detection (HL2) PC -- Personal counter not Controller
H4 00 Heat roller low temperature PCU installed
detection (HL1) PF -- RIC copy inhibit command Controller
01 Heat roller low temperature PCU reception
detection (HL2) -- -- Auditor not ready Controller
H5 01 5-time continuous POD1 PCU
not-reaching JAM detection
02 Fusing thermister PCU
abnormality detection
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble When the SCANNER
scanner is
installed
L3 00 Scanner return trouble When the SCANNER
scanner is
installed
L4 01 main motor lock detection PCU
02 Drum motor lock detection PCU
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection PCU

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 2

3. Details of trouble codes MAIN SUB Contents
E7 01 Content Image data memory trouble
MAIN SUB Contents
Detail The ICU ASIC image data memory
C1 00 Content MC trouble
(SDRAM) cannot output data of more
Detail Main charger output abnormality
than 16MB.
(Output open)
The necessary capacity of the SDRAM
Trouble signal is outputted from the
required for the model Is not satisfied.
high voltage transformer.
Cause The SDRAM is not installed to the ICU
Cause The main charger is not installed
ASIC PWB.
properly.
The SDRAM on the ICU ASIC PWB
The main charger is not assembled
does not work properly.
properly.
The SDRAM is not installed properly to
Disconnection of connector of high
the ICU ASIC PWB.
voltage transformer.
The ICU ASIC PWB is not installed. (on
High voltage harness disconnection or
the PCI bus)
breakage.
ICU PWB abnormality
Check and Use the SIM 8-2 to check the main
Check and Check installation of the SDRAM on
remedy charger output.
remedy the ICU ASIC PWB.
Check for disconnection of the main
Use SIM22-10 to check the SDRAM
charger.
capacity.
Replace the high voltage unit.
Replace the SDRAM on the ICU ASIC
C2 00 Content TC trouble PWB.
Detail Transfer charger output abnormality Check installation of the ICU ASIC
(Output shortcut) PWB. Replace the PWB.
A trouble signal is outputted from the Replace the ICU PWB.
high voltage transformer. 02 Content Laser trouble
Cause A foreign material is attached to the Detail BD signal from LSU is kept OFF, or
transfer charger. ON.
The wire of the transfer charger is cut
Cause The connector of LSU or the harness in
off.
LSU is disconnected or broken.
The connector of the high voltage
The polygon motor does not rotate
transformer is disconnected.
normally.
Check and SIM8-6 transfer charger output check. The laser home position sensor in LSU
remedy Replace the high voltage unit. is shifted.
E6 10 Content CIS shading trouble (Black correction) The proper voltage is not supplied to
Details The CIS black scan level is abnormal the power line for laser.
when the lamp is off. Laser emitting diode trouble
Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS PCU PWB trouble
unit Controller PWB trouble
CIS unit abnormality Check and Check for disconnection of the LSU
Scanner PWB abnormality remedy connector.
Check & Check CIS unit harness. Use SIM 61-1 to check LSU operation.
Remedy Check CIS unit. Check that the polygon motor rotates
Check scanner PWB. normally or not.
11 Content CSI shading trouble (White correction) Check light emission of laser emitting
Details The CIS white reference plate scan diode.
level is abnormal when the lamp is on. Replace the LSU unit.
Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS Replace the PCU PWB.
unit Replace the Controller PWB.
Dirt on the white reference plate. 06 Content Decode error trouble
CIS lighting error Detail A decode error occurs during making of
CIS unit installation trouble an image.
CIS unit abnormality Cause Data error during input from PCI to PM.
Scanner PWB abnormality PM trouble
Check & Clean the white reference plate. Data error during image compression/
Remedy Check CIS light quantity (SIM 5-3) and transfer.
lighting. Controller PWB abnormality
Check CIS unit harness. Check and Check insertion of the PWB. (PCI bus)
Check scanner PWB. remedy Check the Controller PWB.
14 Content CIS communication trouble Replace the Controller PWB.
Details Communication trouble (clock sync)
between scanner PWB and CIS-ASIC
Cause Abnormal harness installation to CIS
unit
CIS unit abnormality
Scanner PWB abnormality
Check & Check CIS unit harness.
Remedy Check CIS unit.
Check scanner PWB.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 3

MAIN SUB Contents MAIN SUB Contents
E7 10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction) E7 17 Content DSPF scanning position adjustment
Details CCD black scan level abnormality trouble (Detected only when executing
when the copy lamp is off. an adjustment SIM.)
Cause Abnormal installation of flat cable to Details The black Mylar which serves as the
CCD unit. reference of the DSPF scanning
CCD unit abnormality position is not detected.
Scanner PWB abnormality Cause Black Mylar installing failure on the
Check & Check installation of CCD unit flat DSPF side
Remedy cable. Check & Check the DSPF black Mylar.
Check CCD unit. Remedy
Check scanner PWB. 50 Content LSU connection trouble
11 Content Shading trouble (White correction) Detail An LSU which does not conform to the
Details CCD white reference plate scan level machine is installed.
abnormality when the copy lamp is ON. Cause PCU PWB trouble
Cause Abnormal installation of flat cable to LSU trouble
CCD unit. Check and Check LSU PWB. Check PCU PWB.
Dirt on mirror, lens, white reference remedy Check connection of the connector and
plate the harness between PCU and LSU.
Copy lamp lighting abnormality 80 Content Communication trouble (ICU detection)
Abnormal installation of CCD unit between ICU and scanner
CCD unit abnormality Details Communication establishment error/
Scanner PWB abnormality Fleming/Parity/Protocol error
Check & Clean mirror, lens, and white reference Cause Defective connection of slave unit PWB
Remedy plate. connector
Check copy lamp light quantity (SIM 5- Defective harness between slave unit
3) and lighting. PWB and Controller PWB
Check CCD unit. Slave unit PWB mother board
Check scanner PWB. connector pin breakage
13 Content CCD light quantity check error Check & Check connector and harness of slave
Details Light quantity adjustment is not made Remedy unit PWB and Controller PWB.
when shading. Check grounding of machine.
Cause Copy lamp lighting abnormality 90 Content PCU communication trouble
(disconnection, improper installation) Details Communication establishment error/
Improper installation of the flat cable to Fleming/Parity/Protocol error
the CCD unit
Cause Defective connection of slave unit PWB
Improper connection of the CL lead connector
wire for the copy lamp Defective harness between slave unit
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the
PWB and Controller PWB
reference white board. Slave unit PWB mother board
The power source is not provided connector pin breakage
properly for the copy lamp.
Check & Check connector and harness of slave
The CCD unit is not installed properly.
Remedy unit PWB and Controller PWB.
CCD unit abnormality
Check grounding of machine.
Scanner PWB abnormality
F1 00 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) communication
Check & Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
trouble
Remedy reference white board.
Detail Communication cable test error after
Check the copy lamp light quantity.
turning on the power or exiting from
(SIM 5-3)
SIM.
CCD unit check
Communication error with the finisher
Scanner PWB check
Cause Improper connection or disconnection
14 Content CCD communication trouble
of connectors and harness between the
Details Communication trouble (clock sync)
machine and the finisher.
between scanner PWB and CCD-ASIC
Finisher control PWB trouble
Cause Abnormal installation of harness to Control PWB (PCU) trouble
CCD unit
Malfunction by noises
CCD unit abnormality
Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the
Scanner PWB abnormality
remedy power.
Check & Check CCD unit harness. Check connectors and harness in the
Remedy Check CCD unit. communication line.
Check scanner PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB or
PCU PWB.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 4

MAIN SUB Contents MAIN SUB Contents
F1 00 Content Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1) F1 10 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) stapler motor
communication trouble trouble
Detail Communication cable test error after Detail Stapler motor operation abnormality
turning on the power or exiting from Cause Motor lock
SIM. Motor rpm abnormality
Communication error with the Mail-bin Overcurrent to the motor
stacker. Console finisher control PWB trouble
Cause Improper connection or disconnection Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
of connector and harness between the remedy operation.
machine and the Mail-bin stacker. 10 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble stapler motor trouble
Control PWB (PCU) trouble Detail Stapler motor operation abnormality
Malfunction by noises
Cause Motor lock
Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the Motor rpm abnormality
remedy power. Overcurrent to the motor
Check harness and connector in the Console finisher control PWB trouble
communication line.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Replace the Mail-bin stacker PWB or
remedy operation.
PCU PWB.
11 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) bundle exit motor
02 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) transport motor
trouble
abnormality
Detail Bundle exit motor operation
Detail Transport motor drive trouble
abnormality
Cause Motor lock
Cause Motor lock
Motor RPM abnormality
Motor rpm abnormality
Overcurrent to the motor
Overcurrent to the motor
Finisher control PWB trouble
Console finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the transport
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
remedy motor operation.
remedy operation.
02 Content Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1)
11 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
transport motor abnormality
bundle exit motor trouble
Detail Transport motor trouble
Detail Bundle exit motor operation
Cause Motor lock abnormality
Motor rpm abnormality
Cause Motor lock
Overcurrent to the motor
Motor rpm abnormality
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble
Overcurrent to the motor
Check and Use SIM3-21 to check the transport Console finisher control PWB trouble
remedy motor operation.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
03 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7) remedy operation.
paddle motor trouble
12 Content Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1) gate trouble
Detail Paddle motor operation abnormality
Detail Gate operation abnormality
Cause Motor lock
Cause Gate lock
Motor rpm abnormality
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble
Overcurrent to the motor
Check and Use SIM3-21 to check the transport
Console finisher control PWB trouble
remedy gate operation.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
15 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) lift motor trouble
remedy operation.
Detail Lift motor operation abnormality
06 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
Cause Motor lock
slide motor trouble
Motor rpm abnormality
Detail Slide motor operation abnormality
Overcurrent to the motor
Cause Motor lock
Console finisher control PWB trouble
Motor rpm abnormality
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Overcurrent to the motor
remedy operation.
Console finisher control PWB trouble
15 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7) lift motor
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
trouble
remedy operation.
Detail Lift motor operation abnormality
08 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) staple shift motor
Cause Motor lock
trouble
Motor rpm abnormality
Detail Staple motor drive trouble
Overcurrent to the motor
Cause Motor lock
Console finisher control PWB trouble
Motor rpm abnormality
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Overcurrent to the motor
remedy operation.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check operations of the
remedy staple motor.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 5

MAIN SUB Contents MAIN SUB Contents
F1 19 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) front alignment F1 32 Content Communication trouble between the
motor trouble console finisher (AR-FN7)
Detail Front alignment motor operation and the punch unit (AR-PN1).
abnormality Detail Communication err between the
Cause Motor lock console finisher and the punch unit.
Motor rpm abnormality Cause Improper connection or disconnection
Overcurrent to the motor of connector and harness between the
Console finisher control PWB trouble console finisher and the punch unit.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor Console finisher control PWB trouble
remedy operation. Control PWB (PCU) trouble
19 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7) Malfunction by noise
front alignment motor trouble Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the
Detail Front alignment motor operation remedy power.
abnormality Check connectors and harness in the
Cause Motor lock communication line.
Motor rpm abnormality Replace the console finisher control
Overcurrent to the motor PWB.
Console finisher control PWB trouble 33 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor punch (AR-PN1) side registration
remedy operation. motor trouble
20 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) rear alignment Detail Punch side registration motor operation
motor trouble abnormality
Detail Rear alignment motor operation Cause Motor lock
abnormality Motor rpm abnormality
Cause Motor lock Overcurrent to the motor
Motor rpm abnormality Console finisher control PWB trouble
Overcurrent to the motor Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Console finisher control PWB trouble remedy operation.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor 34 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
remedy operation. punch (AR-PN1) motor trouble
20 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7) Detail Punch motor operation abnormality
rear alignment motor trouble Cause Motor lock
Detail Rear alignment motor operation Motor rpm abnormality
abnormality Overcurrent to the motor
Console finisher control PWB trouble
Cause Motor lock
Motor rpm abnormality Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
Overcurrent to the motor remedy operation.
Console finisher control PWB trouble 35 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor punch (AR-PN1) side registration
remedy operation. sensor trouble
30 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7) Detail Sensor input value abnormality
communication trouble Cause Sensor breakage
Detail Communication cable test error after Harness disconnection
turning on the power or exiting from Console finisher control PWB trouble
SIM. Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor
Communication error with the console remedy operation.
finisher 36 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
Cause Improper connection or disconnection punch (AR-PN1) timing sensor trouble
of connector and harness between the Detail Sensor input value abnormality
machine and the console finisher. Cause Sensor breakage
Console finisher control PWB trouble Harness disconnection
Control PWB (PCU) trouble Console finisher control PWB trouble
Malfunction by noises Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor
Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the remedy operation.
remedy power. 37 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7)
Check connectors and harness in the backup RAM trouble
communication line. Detail Backup RAM contents are disturbed.
Replace the console finisher control Cause Console finisher control PWB trouble
PWB or PCU PWB. Malfunction by noise
31 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7) Check and Replace the console finisher control
fold sensor trouble remedy PWB.
Detail Sensor input value abnormality
Cause Sensor breakage
harness breakage
Console finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor
remedy operation.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 6

MAIN SUB Contents MAIN SUB Contents
F1 38 Content Console finisher (AR-FN7) F2 00 Content Toner control sensor abnormality
punch (AR-PN1) backup RAM trouble Detail Toner control sensor output open
Detail Punch unit backup RAM contents are Cause Connector harness trouble
disturbed. Connector disconnection
Cause Punch control PWB trouble Check and Check connection of the toner control
Malfunction by noise remedy sensor.
Check and Replace the punch control PWB. Check connection of connector and
remedy harness to the main PWB.
39 Content Console finisher punch dust sensor Check for disconnection of harness.
trouble 02 Content Toner supply abnormality
Detail Punch dust sensor detection trouble Detail Toner control sensor output value
Cause When the punch dust sensor is not becomes under-toner too earlier.
normally detected. Cause Connector harness trouble
Check and Sensor breakage Toner control sensor trouble
remedy Harness disconnection The toner cartridge seal is not removed
Punch control PWB trouble Check and Check connection of the connector in
40 Content Console finisher punch power remedy the toner motor section.
interruption trouble Check connection of connector and
Detail When power interruption of the punch harness to the main PWB.
unit is detected Check for disconnection of harness.
Cause Though 24V is supplied to the punch Toner control sensor output check
unit, the punch unit detects power SIM25-1.
interruption. Remove the toner cartridge seal.
Check and Harness disconnection 04 Content Improper cartridge (life cycle error, etc.)
remedy Punch control PWB trouble Detail An improper process cartridge is
80 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) power abnormality inserted.
Detail The 24V power is not supplied to the Cause IC chip trouble
finisher PWB. Improper cartridge
Cause Improper connection or disconnection Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
of connector and harness remedy
Finisher control PWB trouble 05 Content CRUM error
Power unit trouble Detail Communication with IC chip cannot be
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the sensor. made.
remedy Cause IC chip trouble
80 Content Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1) Improper cartridge
power abnormality Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
Detail The 24V power is not supplied to the remedy
Mail-bin stacker PWB. 39 Content Process thermistor trouble
Cause Improper connection or disconnection Detail Process thermistor open
of connector and harness Cause Process thermistor trouble
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble Process thermistor harness
Power unit (AR-DC1) trouble disconnection
Check and Use SIM3-20 to check the sensor PCU PWB trouble
remedy operation. Check and Check connection of harness and
81 Content Console finisher transport motor remedy connector of the process thermistor.
abnormality Check PCU PWB.
Detail Transport motor trouble F3 12 Content Machine no. 1 tray lift-up trouble
Cause Motor lock Detail PED does not turn ON in the specified
Motor rpm abnormality time.
Overcurrent to the motor LUD does not turn ON in the specified
Console finisher control PWB trouble time.
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor Cause PED/LUD trouble
remedy operation. No. 1 tray lift-up trouble
87 Content Finisher (AR-FN6) staple rotation Check connection of harness between
motor trouble the PCVU PWB, lift-up unit, and paper
Detail Front staple rotation motor trouble feed unit.
Cause Motor lock Check and Check PED, LUD, and their harness
Motor rpm abnormality remedy and connectors.
Overcurrent to the motor Check the lift-up unit.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the motor
remedy operation.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 7

MAIN SUB Contents MAIN SUB Contents
F3 22 Content Multi purpose tray lift-up trouble H4 00··· Content Fusing section low temperature trouble
Detail MCPED does not turn ON in the HL1 Detail • The set temperature is not reached
specified time. (RT within the specified time (normally 3
MCLUD does not turn ON in the H1) min) when warming up or resetting
specified time. from pre-heating.
Cause MCPED/MCLUD trouble 01··· • Under the ready state.
Multi purpose tray lift-up motor trouble HL2 (An input voltage of 1.21V or below is
Harness disconnection f the PCU (RT detected 5 times continuously.)
PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper H2)
Cause Thermistor trouble
feed unit. Heater lamp trouble
Check and Check MCPED, PCLUD, and their Control PWB trouble
remedy harness and connectors. Thermostat trouble
Check the lift-up unit. AC power trouble
F9 02 Content PRT Centro port check error Interlock switch trouble
Detail Controller Centro port trouble Check and Use SIM5-2 to check the heater lamp
Cause Centro port trouble remedy Blinking operation.
Controller PWB trouble If the heater lamp blinks normally:
Check and Replace the Controller PWB. Check the thermistor and its
remedy harness.
H2 00··· Content thermistor open Check the thermistor input circuit in
HL1 Fusing unit not installed the control PWB.
(RT If the heater lamp does not light:
Detail Thermistor is open.
H1) (An input voltage of 2.92V or above is Check for heater lamp disconnection
detected.) and thermostat disconnection.
01··· Check the interlock switch.
Fusing unit not installed
HL2 Check the AC PWB and the lamp
Cause Thermistor trouble
(RT control circuit in the control PWB.
Control PWB trouble
H2) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Fusing section connector
disconnection H5 01 Content 5-time continuous POD1 not-reaching
jam detection
AC power trouble
Fusing unit not installed Detail 5-time continuous POD1 not-reaching
jam detection
Check and Check harnesses and connectors from
remedy the thermistor to the control PWB. Cause A fusing section jam is not properly
Use SIM14 to clear the self diag removed. (Jam paper remains.)
display. POD1 sensor trouble, or harness
H3 00··· Content Fusing section high temperature disconnection
Improper installation of fusing unit
HL1 trouble
(RT Detail The fusing temperature exceeds Check and Check jam paper in the fusing section.
H1) remedy (winding, etc.)
242°C.
(An input voltage of 0.27V or above is Check POD1 sensor harness, and
01··· detected.) check the fusing unit installation.
HL2 Use DIAG (SIM14) to cancel the
Cause thermistor trouble
(RT trouble.
Control PWB trouble
H2) 02 Content Fusing thermister abnormality
Fusing section connector
disconnection detection
AC power trouble Detail Temperature transition of the fusing
Check and Use SIM5-2 to check the heater lamp thermister is abnormal. (Paper is
remedy Blinking operation. wound up.)
If the heater lamp blinks normally: Cause Paper is wound up around the fusing
Check the thermistor and its roller.
harness. Fusing pawl abnormality
Check the thermistor input circuit in Improper installation of the fusing unit
the control PWB. Check and Check the fusing section for paper jam
If the heater lamp keep lighting: remedy (winding). Check installation of the
Check the AC PWB and the lamp fusing unit.
control circuit in the control PWB. Check the fusing pawl.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
L1 00 Content Scanner feed trouble
Details Scanner feed is not completed within
the specified time.
Cause Scanner unit abnormality
Scanner wire disconnection
Check & Check scanning with SIM 1-1.
Remedy

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 8

MAIN SUB Contents MAIN SUB Contents
L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble L8 02 Content Full wave signal width abnormality
Details Scanner return is not completed within Detail It is judged as full wave signal
the specified time. frequency abnormality.
Cause Scanner unit abnormality (When the detection cycle is judged as
Scanner wire disconnection 69Hz or above or 42.5Hz or below)
Check & Check scanning with SIM 1-1. Cause The connector or harness of the PCU
Remedy PWB and the power PWB is
L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection disconnected.
Detail The motor lock signal is detected for PCU PWB trouble
1.5sec during rotation of the main Power unit trouble
motor. Check and Check connection of the harness and
Cause main motor trouble remedy connector.
Check connection of harness between Replace the PCU PWB.
the PCU PWB and the main motor. Replace the power unit.
Control circuit trouble U2 00 Content EEPROM read/write error (Controller)
Check and Use SIM25-1 to check the main motor Detail EEPROM write error
remedy operation. Cause EEPROM trouble
Check harness and connector between EEPROM is not initialized.
the PCU PWB and the main motor. Controller PWB EEPROM access
02 Content Drum motor lock detection circuit trouble
Detail The motor lock signal is detected for Check and Check that EEPROM is properly
1.5sec during rotation of the drum remedy inserted.
motor. Save the counter/adjustment values
Cause Drum motor trouble with the simulation.
Improper connection of harness Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
between the PCU PWB and the drum Replace the Controller PWB.
motor. 11 Content Counter check sum error (Controller)
Control circuit trouble Detail Counter data area check sum error
Check and Use SIM25-1 to check the drum motor Cause EEPROM trouble
remedy operation. Control circuit trouble by noise
Check harness and connector between Controller PWB EEPROM access
the PCU PWB and the drum motor. circuit trouble
L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection Check and Check that EEPROM is properly
Detail It is judged that the polygon motor lock remedy inserted.
signal is not outputted. Save the counter/adjustment values
Lock signal is checked in the interval of with the simulation.
10sec after starting the polygon motor, Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
and it is judged that the polygon motor Replace the Controller PWB.
does not rotate normally. 12 Content Adjustment value check sum error
Cause The LSU connector or harness in the (Controller)
LSU is disconnected or broken. Detail Adjustment data area check sum error
Polygon motor trouble Cause EEPROM trouble
Check and Use SIM61-1 to check the polygon Control circuit trouble by noise
remedy motor operation. Controller PWB EEPROM access
Check connector and harness circuit trouble
connection. Check and Check that EEPROM is properly
Replace LSU. remedy inserted.
L8 01 Content No fullwave signal Save the counter/adjustment values
Detail Full wave signal is not detected. with the simulation.
Cause The PCU PWB connector or the power Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
unit harness is disconnected or broken. Replace the Controller PWB.
PCU PWB trouble 22 Content SRAM memory check sum error (ICU)
Power unit trouble Detail MFPC section SRAM memory check
Check and Check connection of the harness and sum error
remedy connector. Cause SRAM trouble
Replace PCU PWB. Control circuit runaway due to noises
Replace the power unit. ICU PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Check and Initialize the SRAM.
remedy Since the registered data are deleted,
register the data again.
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Replace the ICU PWB.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 9

MAIN SUB Contents MAIN SUB Contents
U2 80 Content EEPROM read/write error (Scanner) U6 01 Content Desk No. 1 tray lift-up trouble
Details Scanner EEPROM write error Detail Desk No. 1 tray lift-up trouble
Cause EEPROM abnormality Cause Sensor trouble
EEPROM which is not initialized is Desk control PWB trouble
installed. Gear breakage
Hang of control circuit due to noises Lift-up motor trouble
Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit Check and Use SIM4-2 to check the lift-up sensor
abnormality remedy detection.
Check & Check that EEPROM is set properly. Use SIM4-3 to check the lift-up motor
Remedy Record counter/adjustment values with operation.
the simulation to protect the data from 02 Content Desk No. 2 tray/LCC1 lift-up trouble
being deleted. Detail Desk No. 2 tray/LCC lift-up trouble
Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16. Cause Sensor trouble
Replace scanner PWB. Desk control PWB trouble
81 Content Memory check sum error (Scanner) Gear breakage
Details Scanner memory check sum error Lift-up motor trouble
Cause EEPROM trouble Check and Use SIM4-2 to check the lift-up sensor
Control circuit freeze by noises remedy detection.
Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit Use SIM4-3 to check the lift-up motor
trouble operation.
Check & Check that EEPROM is set properly. 03 Content Desk No. 3 tray lift-up trouble
Remedy Record counter/adjustment values with Detail Desk No. 3 tray lift-up trouble
the simulation to protect the data from Cause Sensor trouble
being deleted. Desk control PWB trouble
Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16. Gear breakage
Replace scanner PWB. Lift-up motor trouble
90 Content EEPROM read/write error (PCU) Check and Use SIM4-2 to check the lift-up sensor
Detail PCU EEPROM write error remedy detection.
Cause EEPROM trouble Use SIM4-3 to check the lift-up motor
EEPROM is not initialized. operation.
Hang of control circuit due to noises 10 Content Desk transport motor trouble
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit Detail Desk transport motor operation trouble
trouble Cause Motor lock
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly Motor rpm abnormality
remedy inserted. Overcurrent to the motor
Save the counter/adjustment values Desk control PWB trouble
with the simulation.
Check and Use SIM4-3 to check the transport
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. remedy motor operation.
Replace the Controller PWB.
U7 00 Content RIC communication trouble
91 Content Memory check sum error (PCU)
Detail RIC communication trouble
Detail PCU memory check sum error
Communication cable test error after
Cause EEPROM trouble turning on the power or exiting SIM.
EEPROM is not initialized.
Cause Disconnection of connector and
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit harness
trouble RTC control PWB trouble
Uninitialized EEPROM installed.
Control PWB (Controller) trouble
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly Noise or interference
remedy inserted.
Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the
Save the counter/adjustment values remedy power.
with the simulation. Check connector and harness in the
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
communication line.
Replace the Controller PWB.
EE EL Content Auto developer adjustment trouble
U6 00 Content Desk/LCC communication trouble
(Over-toner)
Detail Desk/LCC communication error Detail The sample data is at 68 or below
Communication cable test error after
when auto developer adjustment is
turning on the power or exiting SIM. performed.
Cause Improper connection or disconnection
Cause Toner concentration sensor trouble
of connector and harness Charging voltage, developing voltage
Desk control PWB trouble abnormality
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Insufficient toner concentration
Noise or interference Developing unit trouble
Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the PCU PWB trouble
remedy power. Check and Use SIM25-2 to perform auto
Check connection of the harness and remedy developer adjustment.
connector in the communication line.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 10

MAIN SUB Contents (3) Basic flow of countermeasures
EE EU Content Auto developer adjustment trouble
Monitors the machine
(Under-toner) conditions.
Detail The sample data is of 168 or above
when auto developer adjustment is
performed. Detects/analyzes
the content.
Cause Insufficient toner concentration
Charging voltage, developing voltage
abnormality
Insufficient toner concentration Warning
Trouble/Warning
Developing unit trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM25-2 to perform auto Trouble
remedy developer adjustment.
The machine is stopped.
PF 00 Content RIC copy inhibit signal is received.
Detail Copy inhibit command from RIM (host)
is received.
Cause Judged by the host.
The content is displayed.
Check and Inform to the host.
remedy
Warning A consumable NO
4. Other related items Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime.
(1) Self diag operation
Trouble YES
The machine always monitors its own status. When it detects any
abnormality or a status which requires warning, it performs the self Troubleshoot the cause. Replace or supply
diag operation to display the trouble or warning message as fol- the consumable part.
lows:
Warning Content This message is displayed to warn Repair
mainly the user to inform that a
consumable part is near life, etc. It is
no direct relation with machine Cancel the self-
troubles. diagnostic message with
the diagnostics
Machine The machine operation may be
(test commands).
operation stopped and may be not.
Message The message may be automatically
clear cleared by replacement or supply of Reset
the consumable part, or may be
cleared by the specified simulation
operation.
Standby state
Trouble Content This message is a trouble message
related to a machine trouble.
Machine The machine operation is stopped.
operation
Message This message may be automatically
clear cleared by repairing the trouble, or
may be cleared by the specified
simulation operation.

(2) Power ON trouble detection function

• When the power is turned on, if the stored trouble is H3, H4, H5,
U2, PF, or U6 (sub code 2, 3), it is immediately judged as a trou-
ble.
∗ E7-50 and 60 are not judged as a storing trouble, (Detected
every time when the power is turned on.)
Trouble cancel command
Trouble code Storing
simulation
H3, H4, H5 PCU SIM 14
U2 Each block SIM 16
PF ICU SIM 17
U6-2, 3 PCU SIM 15

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 11

(4) List of trouble modes
● Troubles where the machine can be operated under some conditions
When a trouble occurs, the dialogue is displayed and OK button is added to the trouble message.
Operation-possible mode
Trouble Judgment block Trouble code Copy read
Print List print
(interruption, etc.)
Scanner section troubles (Mirror motor, lens, copy lamp) SCANNER L1,L3,U2 (80,81) X O O
Staple trouble PCU F1(10) 1 1 1
Paper feed tray trouble PCU F3, U6 (Desk) 2 2 2
PCU section troubles (Motor, fusing, etc.) PCU X X X
After-work trouble PCU 3 3 3
Laser trouble PCU E7 (02 only), L6 X X X
CCD troubles (Shading, etc.) SCANNER E7 (10, 11, 13) X O O
Scanner communication trouble Controller E7 (80) X O O
PCU communication trouble Controller E7 (90) X X X

O: Operation possible X: Operation impossible : Operation possible depending on conditions

1: Operation possible except for the staple mode

2: Operation possible except for the trouble tray
3: Operation possible except for the trouble paper exit section

● Troubles where the machine cannot be operated

When a trouble occurs, the dialogue is displayed. OK button is not added to the trouble massage, and only setting can be performed. The
message remains displayed until the trouble is canceled.
Operation-possible mode
Trouble Judgment block Trouble code Copy read
Print List print
(interruption, etc.)
Memory trouble (Expansion RAM not installed, etc.) Controller U2 (00, 11, 12) X X X
External communication invalid (RIC) Controller U7, PF X X X
Image memory trouble, decode error Controller E7 (01, 06) X X X

X: Operation impossible

(5) Writing to the trouble memory

In this series, the simulation allows to select whether the same
trouble is written to the trouble memory when it occurs. If the DIAG
simulation is set as above, when any trouble occurs, its hysteresis
is written to the trouble memory. SIM 26-35
0: The same trouble as the previous one is not recorded.
(Default)
1: When a trouble occurs, it is written to the trouble memory with-
out exception.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 TROUBLE CODES 11 - 12

[12] ROM VERSION-UP METHOD (2) Controller PWB jumper switch selection
To update the ROM, the ROM write protect jumper switch (herein-
after referred to as “jumper”) on the controller PWB must be prop-
1. General erly switched.
Firmware update is executed by collectively writing the files with When the PCU and the scanner ROM are inserted into the control-
each ROM inserted to its specified slot. ler PWB for writing, it is required to set only the protect jumper of
If update by collective writing is failed by power interruption during the controller socket and the diag mode selection jumper.
the update process, etc., insert a preliminary ROM into the control- When the PCU or the ROM on the scanner PWB is written
ler PWB and make update for each ROM individually. The update onboard, it is required to set the corresponding jumper addition-
process flow in such a case is shown in “G. Update process flow.” ally.
The files for update can be transferred from a PC in which printer a. MFP PWB
setting is made (regardless of Centro connection type) to the
On the MFP PWB shown in Fig. 1, the Flash ROM slot is for CN4,
printer by the use of File2PRN.EXE described later. In the other
CN5, and CN6. The jumper is for JP2 and JP5. In the default set-
cases, use FCOPY.EXE to transfer the files.
ting, the boot ROM is installed to CN4 and the main ROM is
installed to CN5, and CN6 is empty. To write into the ROM, the
2. Cautions jumper setting must be performed. Table 1 shows the jumper
selection for writing into the ROM. "H" and "L" or "OFF" and "ON"
• In this method, verify for each byte is not made in order to
of the jumper are marked on the PWB.
shorten the writing time. The reliability of writing is assured by
comparing the sum value. If the operation should be abnormal, Table 1. MFP PWB jumper functions
make updater (C.) by the controller PWB. Jumper
JP2 JP3 JP5 JP7
name
• When the power is turned off during writing, the process may be
Silk VCCW SCN-VCCW DIAG PCU-VCCW
failed and the machine may not be booted.
display H⇔L H⇔L OFF ⇔ ON H⇔L
In this case, refer to “E. Power OFF during update.”
or or or
• After completion of update, the update window may be dis- FLASH WP SCN-FLASH PCU-FLASH
played by resetting the DIP switch on the controller PWB and OFF ⇔ ON WP WP
booting the machine normally. In this case, the PCU and the OFF ⇔ ON OFF ⇔ ON
scanner may not have been updated normally. Refer to “F. Details Controller CN4 Scanner ROM DIAG mode PCU write
Update window when normal booting.” to 6 write write protect selection protect
protect selection DIAG mode on selection
• It takes a longer time (about 5 minute) to write to the PWB’s on
selection Protect cancel ON side Protect cancel
the PCU and the scanner ROM than to write by CN6 of the con- Protect cancel on H side or on H side or
troller PWB. This is because the difference in the communica- on H side or OFF side OFF side
tion speeds of the PWB’s, etc. Also when the version of the OFF side
software which is updated is the same, the process may be
completed quickly.

3. Flash ROM update procedures

A. Preliminary arrangement
(1) Necessary tools
1) A machine with the operating ROM in it
2) A spare PCU ROM, a controller boot ROM, a scanner ROM
(which operate normally) (Used when writing is failed.)
3) A PC operating on Windows with a parallel port. (When
File2PRN is used, it must be set as a printer.)
4) Centronics cable (Used to connect the PC and the controller
PWB.)
5) File2PRN.EXE (Used to transfer the files to the machine con-
nected with the parallel port. However, it is not mentioned
here.), or FCOPY.EXE (parallel port file transfer tool). For the
operating procedures of them, refer to <Reference> described
Fig. 1 MFP PWB slot & jumper
later.
6) Compression files for update (SFU files for each of the PCU, b. Jumper selection
the scanner, the controller boot ROM and the MAIN ROM, or When writing into each ROM, the corresponding jumper must be
the collective SFU file) set to the cancel side (H side or OFF side). (In the default setting,
it is in L side or ON side (not the cancel side). After completion of
updating, return the jumper to L side or ON side (not the cancel
side).
(3) Controller PWB slot
The Flash Rom slots of the controller PWB are CN4, CN5, and
CN6. Normally the BOOT ROM is inserted to CN4, and the main
ROM is inserted to CN5, and CN6 is empty. When, however, the
controller PWB is used to make a ROM, CN6 is used.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ROM VERSION-UP METHOD 12 - 1

(4) Operation panel 4) When files are transferred from the PC by Fcopy.EXE or
When the machine is booted by the diag mode, each operation is File2PRN.EXE (collective files or a separate file for each
performed with the hard keys of the scanner. The window display ROM), the LED flashes and the display is changed sequen-
is made by the LCD panel. The keys used in the diag mode are tially as shown below. When the scanner is updated, the back-
assigned as follows: light of the LCD is instantaneously turned off. Since it is not a
breakdown, do not turn off the power but wait for a while.
START key → OK key
When “Result: OK” is displayed after completion of writing
PRINT key → Up/Down select key (several minutes), press Up/Down key to check that there is
COPY key → Up/Down select key no “Result: NG” for each ROM. When “Result: NG” is dis-
Job status key → Menu key played, refer to (D.).
Clear key → BACK key
Firm Update ***
Up/Down key BACK key Receiving Data
↓
Firm Update
Writing Data
LCD touch panel
↓
Firm Update ***
Result: OK

MENU key OK key 5) Reboot the machine, and use Up/Down key on the window of
1) to check to confirm that the version of the updated software
B. Update procedure 1 (Writing with each ROM has been updated.
inserted to the specified slot) 6) Turn off the power, and reset the DIP switches to the upper
side (normal side).
In this case, the ROM’s on the PCU, and the scanner must be
operating ROM’s. An empty ROM which cannot boot the machine C. Update procedures 2 (Writing to each ROM by
cannot be used for writing. use of CN6 of the controller PWB)
(1) Preparation By use of an empty slot of the controller PWB, writing can be
1) Set the DIP switches on the back of the machine to the diag made to an empty ROM which is not operating.
mode (lower side) and the write protect switch to the release (1) Preparation
side (lower side).
1) Set the DIP switch on the back of the machine to the diag
2) Check to confirm that the scanner unit is connected with the mode (lower side), and set the write protect switch to the
machine. release side (lower side).
3) Connect the PC and the controller PWB with the Centronics 2) Insert one of the ROM’s of the PCU and the SCN into the
cable. empty slot (CN6) of the controller PWB.
4) Turn on the power of the PC and the machine to be updated. 3) Check to confirm that the scanner unit is connected with the
(2) Update procedures machine.
1) When the machine is booted, the following display is shown. 4) Connect the PC and the controller PWB with the Centronics
cable or USB cable.
Version Check
5) Turn on the power of the PC and the machine to be updated.
CONF: *********
(2) Update procedures
2) Press MENU key a few times to display the following window.
1) When the machine is booted, the following window is dis-
Firm Update played.
From Parallel Version Check
3) Press OK key, and the following window is displayed. CONF: *********

Firm Update 2) Press MENU key a few times to display the following window.
Waiting Data CN Update
From Parallel

3) Press OK key, and the following window is displayed.

CN Update
Waiting Data

4) When files are transferred from the PC by the use of

Fcopy.EXE or File2PRN.EXE, the data LED flashes and the
window is changed sequentially as follows. The LED finishes
flashing in a few minutes, and “Writing: OK” is displayed.

CN Update
Receiving Data

5) Press OK key, and the following window is displayed.

CN Update ***-> CN5

Writing OK?

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ROM VERSION-UP METHOD 12 - 2

6) Use Up/Down key to select the slot No. to which the ROM is At that time, use Up/Down key to check the version of the PCU or
inserted, and press OK key. The LED flashes and the window the scanner. If the version is displayed as “BootMode,” or if the
is changed sequentially as shown below. After completion of key operation is invalid (all the LED’s are flashing), retry updating
writing (several minutes), check to confirm that “Result: OK” is as follows.
displayed. 1) When the key operation is possible and the version is dis-
CN Update ***-> CN6 played as “BootMode”
Writing Data Turn off the power and retry the update procedure of (B.). At
that time, be sure to set the DIP switches properly. After
↓ updating again, if the result is still NG, replace the ROM’s with
CN Update ***-> CN6 the spare one of the PCU and the scanner ROM, and perform
Result: OK the update procedure of (C.) for the replaced ROM's.
2) When the key operation is invalid
7) After turning off the power, replace the ROM to which writing is
made with the ROM of the specified slot of the PWB, and turn Turn off the power and replace the ROM’s with the spare one
on the power and check the operation and the version. (Use of the PCU and the scanner ROM, and perform the update
Up/Down key to check on the window of 1).) procedure of (C.) for the replaced ROM’s. Be sure to set the
DIP switches properly.
8) Turn off the power, and reset the DIP switches to the upper
side (protect side, normal side). G. Update process flow
D. In case of “Result: NG” The brief descriptions on the update procedures are as follows.
For turning off during update, refer to “E. Turning off the power
(1) Possible causes of “Result: NG” during update.”
There are following possible causes of “Result: NG.” If the update window is displayed after booting with the DIP
1) The DIP switch of write protect is not set properly. switches on the back of the machine set to the normal side, refer
• The write protect switch of the controller PWB is not set to to “F. Update window display in normal booting.”
the release side (lower side).
→ If the write protect switch is not set to the release side, Write with the onboard
data are not written into the ROM. Set the DIP switch collective files.(B)
properly, and retry updating.
2) In rare cases, the ROM is broken down.
→ Check the ROM, and retry writing. If the trouble remains, Reset
replace the ROM. YES
Result: OK ?
(* There are three types of ROM device: the common type for
the PCU and the scanner, the common type for BOOT and NO Update completed
MAIN.)

E. Turning off the power during update YES

Setting failure ? (D.)
When the power is turned off during the update process, though
the machine is booted, data writing cannot be assured. Retry NO
update as follows.
1) When the power is turned off during update process of (B.)
YES
Retry the update procedure of (B.). If the machine is not Boot NG?
booted or the hard keys are not invalid (**), or retry of the
update is failed again, replace the ROM’s with the spare one NO
of the PCU, the controller BOOT, and the scanner ROM, and
try the update procedure of (C.) for the replaced ROM’s.
(** When the backlight of the display is lighted but the hard YES
SCN NG?
keys are invalid, all LED’s flash.)
2) When the power is turned off during update process of (C.)
NO
Retry updating.

F. Update window display in normal booting

After completion of updating, when the power is turned off and the
DIP switches on the back of the machine are set to the normal
side and the machine is booted, the update window is displayed
as shown below instead of the normal boot window, the PCU or
the scanner may not have been properly updated.

Version Check
CONF: *********

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ROM VERSION-UP METHOD 12 - 3

 NO YES
Rebootable?

Write with onboard

Remove the boot ROM and collective files (B.)
replace it with a spare.
(If another ROM is NG, replace it, too.)

YES
Result: OK ?

Writing by CN6 of the

Update completed
controller PWB (C.) NO

YES
Result: OK ?

NO Update completed

ROM trouble?
Replace the ROM and retry.

NO YES
Rebootable?

Write with onboard

Remove the ROM and collective files (B.)
replace it with a spare.

YES
Result: OK ?

Writing by CN6 of the

Update completed
controller PWB (C.) NO

YES
Result: OK ?

NO Update completed

ROM trouble?
Replace the ROM and retry.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ROM VERSION-UP METHOD 12 - 4

 Enter the path of the transfer file to “Input File Path.” (Or press
Reference button and select a file to be transferred.) Then select
the target printer in “Select Printer.” Select a parallel port connec-
tion printer or a USB connection printer depending on the connec-
tion type. After completion of the above transfer file selection and
the target printer setting, press Send button to transfer the file.
Write with onboard
collective files (B.)

YES
Result: OK ?

Update completed NO

ROM trouble?
Replace the ROM and retry.

<Reference> File transfer procedures

(1) File transfer by Fcopy.EXE
For file transfer by Fcopy, put Fcopy.exe and the files in a same
directory, and boot the MS-DOS. Go to the directory of the files,
and type “Fcopy file name” and transfer is made. In the following
case, the SFU file is in the C:\ROM directory and it is transferred.

(2) File transfer by File2PRN.EXE

For file transfer by File2PRN, the machine to which the files are
transferred must be set as a printer. The connection types as a
printer are parallel port. For transfer of the files, execute
File2PRN.EXE, and the following window is displayed.

AR-M312U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ROM VERSION-UP METHOD 12 - 5

 SCANNER UNIT
OP PANEL
DELIVERY
LCD OPE PWB 6Pin
ORSPD POD3
TOUCH BACKLIGHT BUZZER
PANEL
Paper exit detection POD2 POM
FFC FFC 3Pin
4Pin 20Pin CFM2
FFC FFC OZONE exhaust fan
POD1
24Pin 30Pin CCD PWB
LVDS PWB
1. Block diagram

FM2 VFM2 DSW-F DSWL

FFC Controller cooling fan Heat exhaust fan
FFC 5Pin 32Pin Front door open detection Left door open/close
30Pin CL detection

DSPF (AR-EF6 only) SCN JNT PWB MFP B to B TONER HOPPER

MOTHER BOARD Pressure 2Pin
CONTROL 50Pin TM
FFC CIS 80Pin B to B
CISun 35Pin PWB FFC FFC 8Pin
CNT 28Pin 28Pin CRU
26Pin SCANNER (Interface cable)
6Pin (SCSI cable 68Pin) DV unit
SPF MOTOR PWB PSPS Paper separation solenoid
concentration
3Pin TCS Toner
sensor
SPED
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

Original set sensor DVCH

3Pin 26Pin
SCOV 11Pin
Cover open sensor
SRU MAIN DRIVE
3Pin
SPPD FFC 8Pin
Resist front sensor LSU DM
2Pin SPF 5Pin
SDSS SCANNER M FFC 8Pin
Original stopper solenoid 3Pin PWB POLYGON M MM
3Pin PCU PWB Left door unit
SPOD MHPS Casette paper feed
Original exit sensor
BD CFM1 DRAWER PWB PED CPFC clutch
No.1 mirror home
2Pin Suction fan Cassette paper empty detection
SPFC position sensor Resist roller clutch
Original feed clutch 3Pin HVR PWB LUD RRC
3Pin ORSLED VFM1 LD 30Pin Cassette upper limit detection Paper transport
SRRC 3Pin CONTROL PWB 24Pin TRC clutch
Resist roller clutch 3Pin VFM1
OCSW CASSETTE unit PS roller unit
SPFVR PWB Original open/close sensor FFC 14Pin HVR PWB
HV UNIT CSS PWB LUM PPD1
3Pin
SPLS1 5Pin Cassette detection Lift-up motor Paper transport ADU (OPTION)
Original length sensor 1 detection
3Pin 6Pin ADUM1 ADUM2
SPLS2 14Pin 30Pin
Original length sensor 2
3Pin Manual paper feed solenoid MPFS APID
SOCD
Open/close sensor FUSING
2Pin Manual paper feed clutch MPFC APOD
SPFS Rth1 24Pin ADU
Original pick-up solenoid Heat roller temperature detection Manual paper feed transport
22Pin width detection MPWS APPD1

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1

detection
POWER Rth2
Manual paper empty
AC IN FUSE MSW detection MPED APPD2
PWB DCPS HL1 ADU
Manual paper feed
CFM3 FINISHER1 MULTICS stopper solenoid
MSS DSW-D door switch
HL2
(OPTION) MCPPD MCLUD MCLUM MCPCL
(AC PWB) Manual paper feed
MPLS1 ADU SET
OPTION DCPS FINISHER2 MCDRS MCSPD MCSS MCFCL tray pullout detection
(OPTION) (OPTION) MPLS2 MPF SET
MCPED MCPWS MCM MC SET Manual paper feed
DH 2Pin DESK length detection MPLD
(OPTION) (OPTION)
DGS ADUFM
REACTOR
PWB
200V only
 CN1 CN16 CN19 I/F PWB-CN
TX25-80P-LT-H1 BOARD TO BOARD TX24-80R-LT-H1 1_CLK+ 48 1 1_CLK+ 8AL050S
+24V 1 1+24V BM50B-SRDS-G-TF
1_CLK- 47 35 1_CLK-
GND2 2 2GND2 1_DATA0+ 46 2 1_DATA0+
+12V 3 3+12V 1_DATA0- 45 36 1_DATA0-
GND2 4 4GND2 1_DATA1+ 44 3 1_DATA1+
+5V 5 5+5V 1_DATA1- 43 37 1_DATA1-
+5V 6 6+5V /1_DBL+ 42 4 /1_DBL+
GND2 7 7GND2 /1_DBL- 41 38 /1_DBL-
+3.3V 8 8+3.3V GND2 40 5 GND2
GND2 9 9GND2 GND2 39 39 GND2
GND2 10 10GND2 2_CLK+ 38 6 2_CLK+
A. Scanner

RES_CCD 11 11RES_CCD 2_CLK- 37 40 2_CLK-

TXD_CCD1 12 12TXD_CCD1 2_DATA0+ 36 7 2_DATA0+
CLK_CCD1 13 13CLK_CCD1 2_DATA0- 35 41 2_DATA0-
FRM_CCD1 14 14FRM_CCD1 2_DATA1+
AR-EF5/EF6 (1/3)

2_DATA1+ 34 8
/1_DBL+ 15 15/1_DBL+ 2_DATA1- 33 42 2_DATA1-
1_DATA1+ 16 161_DATA1+ /2_DBL+ 32 9 /2_DBL+
1_DATA0+ 17 171_DATA0+ /2_DBL- 31 43 /2_DBL-
1_CLK+ 18 181_CLK+ GND2 30 10 GND2
PDSEL1 19 19PDSEL1 GND2 29 44 GND2
PD 20 20PD LcdD0+ 28 11 LcdD0+
SEG0 21 21SEG0 LcdD0- 27 45 LcdD0-
SEG2 22 22SEG2 LcdD1+ 26 12 LcdD1+
/F1 23 23/F1 LcdD1- 25 46 LcdD1-
/F3 24 24/F3 LcdD2+ 24 13 LcdD2+
2. Actual wiring chart

TH 25 25TH LcdD2- 23 47 LcdD2-

/CCFT 26 26/CCFT LcdD3+ 22 14 LcdD3+
MFP
lcdS- 27 27lcdS- LcdD3- 21 48 LcdD3-
lcdM- 28 28lcdM- LcdM+ 20 15 LcdM+ PWB
lcdCP1- 29 29lcdCP1- LcdM- 19 49 LcdM-
lcdCP2- 30 30lcdCP2- LcdS+ 18 16 LcdS+
(NC) 31 31(NC) LcdS- 17 50 LcdS-
CN101 CN5 LCD-VEE 32 32LCD-VEE LcdCP1+ 16 17 LcdCP1+
SFW30S-2STE1 30FMZ-BT LcdD0- 33 33LcdD0- LcdCP1- 15 51 LcdCP1-
GND2(DGND) 1 1GND2 lcdD1- 34 34lcdD1- LcdCP2+ 14 18 LcdCP2+
1_CLK+ 2 21_CLK+ LcdD2- 35 35LcdD2- LcdCP2- 13 52 LcdCP2-
1_CLK- 3 31_CLK- LcdD3- 36 36LcdD3- LcdDIS 12 19 LcdDIS
1_DATA0+ 4 41_DATA0+ GND2 37 37GND2 SCN LCD-VCC 11 53 LCD-VCC
1_DATA0- 5 51_DATA0- /XL 38 38/XL LCD-VEE 10 20 LCD-VEE
GND2(DGND) 6 6GND2 XH 39 39XH RES_MFP 9 54 RES_MFP
1_DATA1+ 7 71_DATA1+ SCN /STMPS 40 40/STMPS VCCW_SCN 8 21 VCCW_SCN
1_DATA1- 8 81_DATA1- +24V 41 41+24V PWB FRDY 7 55 FRDY
/1_DBL+ 9 9/1_DBL+ GND2 42 42GND2 TXD_SCN 6 22 TXD_SCN
/1_DBL- 10 10/1_DBL- JNT +12V 43 43+12V RXD_SCN 5 56 RXD_SCN
GND2(DGND) 11 11GND2 GND2 44 44GND2 DSR_SCN 23 DSR_SCN
4
FRM_CCD1 12 12FRM_CCD1 PWB +5V 45 45+5V DTR_SCN 3 57 DTR_SCN
PAGE1 13 13PAGE1 +5V 46 46+5V RES_SCN 2 24 RES_SCN
CLK_CCD1 14 14CLK_CCD1 GND2 47 47GND2 POF_SCN 1 POF_SCN
58
ADD_CCD1 15 15ADD_CCD1 +3.3V 48 48+3.3V
TXD_CCD1 16 16TXD_CCD1 CN18
CCD1 GND2 49 49GND2 /SCNSET 20 25 /SCNSET
RXD_CCD1 17 17RXD_CCD1 50
BM20B-SRDS-G-TF GND2 19
GND2 50 GND2 59 GND2
RES_CCD 18 18RES_CCD /CL1 51 51/CL1 +12V 18 26 +12V
GND2(DGND) 19 19GND2 RXD_CCD1 52 52RXD_CCD1 +12V 17 60 +12V
+3.3V 20 20+3.3V ADD_CCD1 53 53ADD_CCD1 GND2 16 27 GND2
+3.3V 21 21+3.3V PAGE1 54 54PAGE1 GND2 15 61 GND2
GND2(DGND) 22 22GND2 /1_DBL- 55 55/1_DBL- +5V 14 28 +5V
+5V(+5VD) 23 23+5V 1_DATA1- 56 561_DATA1- +5V 13 62 +5V
+5V(+5VD) 24 24+5V 1_DATA0- 57 571_DATA0- +5V 12 29 +5V
GND2(AGND) 25 25GND2 1_CLK- 58 581_CLK- +5V 11 63 +5V
+5V(+5VA) 26 26+5V PDSEL0 59 59PDSEL0 +3.3V 10 30 +3.3V
+5V(+5VA) 27 27+5V PDSEL2 60 60PDSEL2 +3.3V 9 64 +3.3V
GND2(AGND) 28 28GND2 /KEYIN 61 61/KEYIN GND2 8 31 GND2
+12V 29 29+12V SEG1 62 62SEG1 GND2 7 65 GND2
+12V 30 30+12V /F0 63 63/F0 +24V 6 32 +24V
/F2 64 64/F2 +24V 5 66 +24V
FRDY 65 65FRDY +24V 4 33 +24V
/BZR 66 66/BZR GND2 3 67 GND2
CN102
BM03B-SRSS-TB lcdS+ 67 67lcdS+ GND2 2 34 GND2
SH LcdM+ 68 68LcdM+ GND2 1 68 GND2
1
LcdCP1+ 69 69LcdCP1+ CN7 H3P-SHF-AA+B3P-SHF-1AA
GND2(AGND) 2 S6B-PH BL
LcdCP2+ 70 70LcdCP2+ BL 1 +5V
A_IN 3 +5V 1 GY
lcdDIS 71 71lcdDIS GY 2 GND2
GND2 2 LB OCSW
LCD-VCC 72 72LCD-VCC LB 3 OCSW
OCSW 3
lcdD0+ 73 73lcdD0+ RD

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 2

+24V 4 RD
lcdD1+ 74 74lcdD1+ BR
/LED0 5 BR ORS
lcdD2+ 75 75lcdD2+ LB
/LED1 6 LB
lcdD3+ 76 76lcdD3+ CN10 LED
GND2 77 77GND2 S3B-PH 53053-0310(MOLEX)
LB LB
YH 78 78YH MHPS 1
GY 1 MHPS
GND2 2 GY
/YL 79 79/YL BL 2 GND2 MHPS
+5V 3 BL
/STSET 80 80/STSET 3 +5V
CN6
S5B-PH
MIMA 1
CN7 MIMB 2
9604S-05C FFC-5Pin /MIMA 3 MIM
GND2 1 5 GND2 /MIMB 4
GND2 2 4 GND2 +24V 5
/CL1 3 3 /CL1 CN5
CL1 B13B-PH PHR-13
+24V 4 2 +24V /PNC 1 1
+24V 5 1 +24V /COPY 2 2
CN6 /CA 3 3
B4B-PH-K-S /READY 4 4
+24V1 1 /AUD 5 5
/STAMPS 2 +5V 6 6
/STSET 3 GND2 7 7
GND2 4 +24V 8 8
(NC) 9 9
/TC 10 10
+24V 11 11
PNC-a 12 12
GND2 13 13
AR-EF5/EF6 (2/3)

INVERTER
-LVDS
PWB
CN4
20FLS-SM1-GB-TB
GND2 20 1 GND2(Vss)
CN4
(NC) 19 2 (NC) 9604S-05C
(NC) 18 3 (NC)
1 +3.3V
(NC) 17 4 (NC)
2 +3.3V
(NC) 16 5 (NC)
3 LCD-VEE
GND2(Vss) 15 6 GND2(Vss)
4 GND2
LCD D3 14 7 LCD D3
5 GND2
LCD D2 13 8 LCD D2
LCD D1 12 9 LCD D1
LCD LCD D0 11 10 LCD D0
GND2(Vss) 10 11 GND2(Vss)
LCD-VEE 9 12 LCD-VEE
LCD-VCC 8 13 LCD-VCC
lcd DIS 7 14 lcd DIS CN1 CN2
GND2(Vss) 30FMZ-BT 30FMN-BTK
6 15 GND2(Vss)
CP2 5 16 CP2 XH 30 1 XH
GND2(Vss) 4 17 GND2(Vss) /YL 29 2 /YL
CP1 3 18 CP1 /XL 28 3 /XL
LCD M 2 19 LCD M YH 27 4 YH
LCD S 1 20 LCD S /CCFT 26 5 /CCFT
+24V 25 6 +24V
GND2 24 7 GND2
TH 23 8 TH
GND2 22 9 GND2
LcdD3- 21 10 LcdD3-
LcdD3+ 20 11 LcdD3+
LcdD2- 19 12 LcdD2-
CN2 LcdD2+ 18 13 LcdD2+
FFC-4PIN 04FM-1.0ST LcdD1- 17 14 LcdD1-
/YL 4 1 /YL LcdD1+ 16 15 LcdD1+
XH XH LcdD0- 16 LcdD0-
TOUCH YH
3
2
2
3 YH LcdD0+
15
14 17 LcdD0+
/XL 1 4 /XL LVD-VEE 13 18 LVD-VEE
LCD-VCC 12 19 LCD-VCC
LcdDIS 11 20 LcdDIS
GND2 10 21 GND2
LcdCP2- 9 22 LcdCP2-

CN3
S02(8.0)B-BHS-L
LcdCP2+
GND2
8
7
23 LcdCP2+
24 GND2 SCN
LcdCP1- 25 LcdCP1-
CCFT
WH
PK
1 /CCFT
2 HV
LcdCP1+
LcdM-
6
5
4
26 LcdCP1+
27 LcdM-
JNT
LcdM+
LcdS-
3
2
28 LcdM+
29 LcdS-
PWB
LcdS+ 1 30 LcdS+

CN1 CN3
T24FAZ-SMT-TF 24FMN-BTK
(NC) 24 1(NC)
CN2
PHR-6 B6B-PH-SM3-TB (NC) 23 2(NC)
BR /BZR 22 3/BZR
PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
LB (NC) 21 4(NC)
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
PL FRDY 20 5FRDY
PDSEL2 PDSEL2
ORS PD +5V
3
4
BL
3
4 +5V GND2 19 6GND2
BR GND2 18 7GND2
PD 5 5 PD
GY GND2 17 8GND2
GND2 6 6 GND2
/F3 16 9/F3
/F2 15 10/F2
MFP /F1 14 11/F1
/F0 13 12/F0
OPE SEG2 12 13SEG2
PWB SEG1
SEG0
11
10
14
15
SEG1
SEG0
/KEYIN 9 16/KEYIN
+5V 8 17+5V
+5V 7 18+5V
GND2 6 19GND2
PD 5 20PD
+5V 4 21+5V
PDSEL2 3 22PDSEL2
PDSEL1 2 23PDSEL1
PDSEL0 1 24PDSEL0

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 3

 PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H CND
B6B-PH-K-S
BR 6 /B 1 BR BR 2 /B
RD 5 +24V 2 RD RD 4 +24V CN14
SPF PL 4 B 3 PL PL 1 B 1-171825-2
BR 3 A 4 BR BR 3 A +24V 1
MOTOR RD 2 +24V 5 RD RD 5 +24V GND2 2
PL 1 /A 6 PL PL 6 /A /CV_COPY 3
/CV_COUNT 4
179228-3 /CV_START 5
BL
+5V 1 /CV_CA 6
BR
AR-EF6 only (3/3)

SPED SPED 2 /CV_STAPLE 7

GY
GND2 3 /CV_DUPLEX 8
179228-3 /CV_SIZE0 9
CNB
BL PHNR-11-H+BU11P-TR-P-H /CV_SIZE1 10
+5V 1 B22B-PHDSS-B
PL BL BL BL /CV_SIZE2 11
SCOV SCOV 2 1 +5V 11 5 +5V
GY BR BR BR /CV_SIZE3 12
GND2 3 2 SPED 10 16 SPED
GY GY GY
179228-3 3 GND2 9 1 GND2
BL BL BL (NO ASSEMBLY) CN17
BL 4 +5V 8 7 +5V
+5V 1 PL PL PL B12B-PH-K-S
BR 5 SCOV 7 18 SCOV
SPPD SPPD 2 GY GY GY +24V 1
GY 6 GND2 6 2 GND2
GND2 3 BL BL BL GND2 2
7 +5V 5 8 +5V
BR BR BR +5V 3
8 SPPD 4 14 SPPD
SMP-02V-NC+SMR-02V-N GY GY GY (NC) 4
9 GND2 3 3 GND2 //MIMDA 5
RD RD RD RD
1 +24V 1 10 +24V 2 11 +24V /MIMDA
BR BR BR 6
SDSS 2 /SDSS 2 11 /SDSS 1 BR 15 /SDSS
BL //MIMDB 7
SRA-21T-4 9 +5V(POD) /MIMDB 8
GY GY GY
SRA-21T-4 FG 4 GND2
PL /MIRMO0 9
20 SPOD CNC CN13
PHR-3 PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H BL B26B-PHDSS-B /MIRMO1 10
BL BL BL 10 +5V S26B-PHDSS
+5V(POD) 1 6 +5V(POD) 1 PL BR BR /MIRMO2 11
GY 22 SOCD SPFA 1 1SPFA
GND2 2 GY 5 GND2 2 GY GY PL PL MIRMOV 12
SPOD PL 6 GND2
/SPFA 2 2/SPFA
SPOD 3 PL 4 SPOD 3 PL RD PK PK
BL BL 12 +24V /SPFMO0 3 3/SPFMO0
3 +5V 4 BL BL
179228-3 PL BR +5V 4 4+5V
BL 2 SOCD 5 PL 19 /SPFC GY GY
+5V 1 GY RD GND2 5 5GND2 CN15
PL 1 GND2 6 GY 13 +24V GY GY B8B-PH
SOCD 2 PL GND2 6 6GND2
SOCD GY 17 /SRRC RD RD GND2
GND2 3 +24V 7 7+24V 1
21 (NC) RD RD RES-SCN
+24V 8 8+24V 2
PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H GY GY DSR_SCN 3
RD GND2 9 9GND2
2 +24V 1 GY RXD_SCN 4
BR SPF GND2 10 10GND2
SPFC 1 /SPFC 2 LB LB TXD_SCN 5
/SPFB 11 11/SPFB
LB LB DTR_SCN 6
PHNR-3-H+BU3P-TR-P-H SDSS 12 12SDSS
PK PK SCN +5V 7
RD SPFB 13 13SPFB
3 +24V 1 PK PK
PWB SRRC 14 14SRRC (NC) 8
SRRC 2 (NC) 2 PL PL
PL /SPFSET 15 15/SPFSET
1 /SRRC 3 PL PL
SPFS 16 16SPFS PWB
BL BL
VAREF 17 17VAREF CN12 CN2 CN1
BR BR S28B-PHDSS B26B-PHDSS 9604S-35F FF3-35-R15
SPFC 18 18SPFC LB
BR BR /2_DBL- 1 1 /2_DBL- VLED 35 35VLED
SPPD 19 19SPPD PK
PL PL /2_DBL+ 2 2 /2_DBL+ DGND 34 34DGND
SPLS2 20 20SOCD PL
LB LB 2_DATA1- 3 3 2_DATA1- VAS 33 33VAS
SPED 21 21SPED BR
BR PL 2_DATA1+ 4 4 2_DATA1+ DGND 32 32DGND
SMR-03V-NC+SMP-03V-N SPLS1 22 22SPLS2 LB
LB LB 2_DATA0- 5 5 2_DATA0- VDS 31 31VDS
BL BL SCOV 23 23SCOV PK
VAREF 1 LB BR 2_DATA0+ 6 6 2_DATA0+ DGND 30 30DGND
BR 1 BR SPWS 24 24SPLS1 PL
SPWS 2 PK PK 2_CLK- 7 7 2_CLK- SCN 29 29SCN
SPFVR GY 2 GY SPOD 25 25SPOD BR
3 CNA PL LB 2_CLK+ 8 8 2_CLK+ DGND 28 28DGND
3 GND2 B12B-PHDSS-B SOCD 26 26SPWS GY
BL GND2 9 9 GND2(DGND) LGATE 27 27LGATE
179228-3 1VAREF BR
BL BR FRM_CCD2 10 10 FRM_CCD2 DGND 26 26DGND
+5V 1 2SPWS PK
BR GY CLK_CCD2 11 11 CLK_CCD2 CLK 25 25CLK
SPLS1 2 9GND2 PL
SPLS1 GY BL PAGE2 12 12 PAGE2 DGND 24 24DGND
GND2 3 5+5V LB CIS
BR ADD_CCD2 13 13 ADD_CCD2 DATA 23 23DATA
4SPLS1 BR
GY TXD_CCD2 14 14 TXD_CCD2 DGND 22 22DGND
179228-3 12GND2 PK CNT
BL BL RES_CIS 15 15 RES_CIS LD 21 21LD
+5V 1 7+5V PL
PL PL RXD_CCD2 16 16 RXD_CCD2 DGND 20 20DGND CISun
SPLS2 2 6SPLS2 OR
SPLS2 GY GY +3.3V 17 17 +3.3V SCLK 19 19SCLK
GND2 3 10GND2 OR
RD +3.3V 18 18 +3.3V DGND 18 18DGND
11+24V RD
PL +24V 19 19 +24V /LST 17 17/LST
PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H GY

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 4

3/SPFS GND2 20 20 GND2(AGND)
RD DGND 16 16DGND
2 +24V 1 OR
PL +12V 21 21 +12V SD0 15 15SD0
SPFS 1 /SPFS 2 GY
GND2 22 22 GND2(AGND) DGND 14 14DGND
BL
+5V 23 23 +5V SD1 13 13SD1
GY
GND2 24 24 GND2(AGND) DGND 12 12DGND
BL
+5V 25 25 +5V SD2 11 11SD2
LB
/CISSET 26 26 /CISSET DGND 10 10DGND
(NC) 27 SD3 9 9 SD3
(NC) 28 DGND 8 8 DGND
SD4 7 7 SD4
DGND 6 6 DGND
SD5 5 5 SD5
DGND 4 4 DGND
SD6 3 3 SD6
DGND 2 2 DGND
SD7 1 1 SD7

GY GY GY
SRA-21T-4 FG
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GY GY
SRA-21T-4 FG
SRA-21T-4
 B. Engine
Engine (1/4)

BOARD to BOARD

CN3 CN1 CN1

TX24-50R-LT-H1 TX25-50P-LT-H1 9604S-28C 9604S-28F
+12V 1 1+12V GND2 28 1GND2 CN3
+12V 2 2+12V GND2 27 2GND2 24FMN-STRK-A
+24V3 3 3+24V3 +12V 26 3+12V RS 1
+24V3 4 4+24V3 +3.3V1 25 4+3.3V R/W 2
+24V3 5 5+24V3 +3.3V1 24 5+3.3V EN 3
+5V1 6 6+5V1 +3.3V1 23 6+3.3V D0 4
+5V1 7 7+5V1 +3.3V1 22 7+3.3V D1 5
+5V1 8 8+5V1 +3.3V1 21 8+3.3V D2 6
+5V1 9 9+5V1 +3.3V1 20 9+3.3V D3 7
+3.3V1 10 10+3.3V1 +3.3V1 19 10+3.3V D4 8
+3.3V1 11 11+3.3V1 +3.3V1 18 11+3.3V D5 9
+3.3V1 12 12+3.3V1 +3.3V1 17 12+3.3V D6 10
POF\ 13 13POF\ +3.3V1 16 13+3.3V D7 11
FWP-PCU 14 14FWP-PCU +3.3V1 15 14+3.3V +5V1 12
MSW_MON 15 15MSW_MON +3.3V1 14 15+3.3V +5V1 13
GND2 16 16GND2 +5V1 13 16+5V1 GND2 14
GND2 17 17GND2 +5V1 12 17+5V1 GND2 15
FM2\ 18 18FM2\ +5V1 11 18+5V1 KEY1 16
GND2 19 19GND2 +5V1 10 19+5V1 KEY2 17
VIDEOin+ 20 20VIDEOin+ +5V1 9 20+5V1 KEY3 18
PCU_RES 21 21PCU_RES +5V1 8 21+5V1 KEY4 19
PCU_DSR 22 22PCU_DSR +5V1 7 22+5V1 KEY5 20
PCU_DTR 23 23PCU_DTR +24V3 6 23+24V3 PCU KEY6 21
PCU_RXD 24 24PCU_RXD +24V3 5 24+24V3 LED1\ 22
PCU_TXD 25 25PCU_TXD +24V3 4 25+24V3 LED2\ 23
+12V 26 26+12V +24V3 3 26+24V3 LED3\ 24
+12V 27 27+12V +24V3 2 27+24V3 PWB
+12V 28 28+12V +24V3 1 28+24V3
+24V3 29 29+24V3
MFP +24V3 30 30+24V3 CN2 CN2 LSU UNIT
+24V3 31 31+24V3
MOTHER 9604S-28C 9604S-28F
CONTROL +5V1 32 32+5V1 BOARD +24V1 28 1+24V1 CN16 CN101
+5V1 33 33+5V1 FM2\ 27 2FM2\ S30B-PHDSS-B S30B-PHDSS-B
GY CN102
BOX +5V1 34 34+5V1 PWB PCU_RXD 26 3PCU_RXD GND2 1 30 GND2 S11B-PH-K-S PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
BR RD RD
+3.3V1 35 35+3.3V1 GND2 25 4GND2 SYNC\ 2 29 SYNC\
GY +24V1 11 3 +24V1 1
+3.3V1 36 36+3.3V1 PCU_TXD 24 5PCU_TXD GND2 3 28 GND2 BR BR
GY VFM1\ 10 2 VFM1\ 2 VFM1
+3.3V1 37 37+3.3V1 GND2 23 6GND2 GND2 4 27 GND2 GY GY
GY GND2 9 1 GND2 3
+3.3V1 38 38+3.3V1 PCU_DSR 22 7PCU_DSR GND2 5 26 GND2 RD
BR +24V1 8 Power
GND2 39 39GND2 GND2 21 8GND2 LSU S/H 6 25 LSU S/H BR
BR VFM1\ 7 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H source section
GND2 40 40GND2 PCU_DTR 20 9PCU_DTR VRB 7 24 VRB GY RD
GY GND2 6 3 +24V1 1
GND2 41 41GND2 GND2 19 10GND2 GND2 8 23 GND2 RD BR
GY +24V1 5 2 VFM1\ 2
PAGE 42 42PAGE PCU_RES 18 11PCU_RES GND2 9 22 GND2 BR GY VFM1
BR PMCLK\ 4 1 GND2 3
GND2 43 43GND2 GND2 17 12GND2 TEST(TEST\) 10 21 TEST(TEST\) BR
BR READY(READY\) 3
HSYNC 44 44HSYNC VIDEOin+ 16 13VIDEOin+ VIDEO 11 20 VIDEO BR
BR LSU START\ 2
VIDEOin- 45 45VIDEOin- VIDEOin- 15 14VIDEOin- VIDEO\ 12 19 VIDEO\ GY
BR GND2 1
GND2 46 46GND2 GND2 14 15GND2 LDON\ 13 18 LDON\
GY PHR-5
GND2 47 47GND2 HSYNC 13 16HSYNC GND2 14 17 GND2
GY 1 PMCLK
GND2 48 48GND2 GND2 12 17GND2 GND2 15 16 GND2
BL 2 READY
GND2 49 49GND2 GND2 11 18GND2 +5V1 16 15 +5V1
GY 3 START\ PM
GND2 50 50GND2 PAGE 10 19PAGE GND2 17 14 GND2
BL 4 GND2
GND2 9 20GND2 +5V1 18 13 +5V1
RD 5 +24V1
MSW_MON 8 21MSW_MON +24V1 19 12 +24V1 CN103 CN101
RD
FWP-PCU 7 22FWP-PCU +24V1 20 11 +24V1 S4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-K-S
BR BR
POF\ 6 23POF\ VFM1\ 21 10 VFM1\ GND2 1 4 GND2
GY LB
+5V1 5 24+5V1 GND2 22 9 GND2 SYNC\ 2 3 SYNC\

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 5

BR BR BD
+5V1 4 25+5V1 START\ 23 8 START\ GND2 3 2 GND2
BR BL
+5V1 3 26+5V1 VFM1\ 24 7 VFM1\ +5V1 4 1 +5V1
BR
+5V1 2 27+5V1 PMCLK\ 25 6 PMCLK\
BR
+5V1 1 28+5V1 READY(READY\) 26 5 READY(READY\)
GY
GND2 27 4 GND2
GY
GND2 28 3 GND2
BL
+5V LD 29 2 +5V LD
GY
GND2 30 1 GND2

CN4
B3B-PH-K-S
RD
+24V1 1 1 +24V1
BR
FM2\ 2 2 FM2\ FM2
GY
GND2 3 3 GND2
 (NO ASSEMBLY) DELIVERY UNIT
CN19
B4B-PH-K-S SMR-06V+SMP-06V-NC
POM2 1 BR BR
CN6 1 POM0\ 1
POM0 2 BR RD
8FE-BT-VK-N 9604S-08C 2 POM2\ 2
POM3 3 BR BL
DSW-L 8 1 DSW-F 3 POM1\ 3
POM1 4 BR YL
DSW-L 7 2 DSW-F 4 POM3\ 4 POM
RD WH
MAIN GND1 6 3 GND2 (NO ASSEMBLY) 5 +24V1 5
RD BK
Engine (2/4)

GND1 5 4 GND2 CN20 6 +24V1 6

DM DM\ 4 5 DM\
B4B-PH-K-S
DRIVE DM-T 3 6 DM-T
POM1\ 1
POM3\ 2
SMP-03V-BC+SMR-03V-B 179228-3
DMCLK\ 2 7 DMCLK\ BL BL BL
(NC) 1 POM0\ 3 1 +5V1 1 1 +5V1
8 (NC) BR BR BR
POM2\ 4 2 POD1 2 2 POD1 POD1
GY GY GY
(NC) 5 3 GND2 3 3 GND2

CN7 179228-3
CN4 BL
173979-2 173981-2 1 +5V1
BK B32B-PHDSS-B BR
TMA 1 1 TMA BR 2 POD2 POD2
BK POM0\ 1 GY
TONER HOPPER TM1 TMB 2 2 TMB BL 3 GND2
+5V1 2
BR
POM2\ 3 179228-3
BR BL
POD1 4 1 +5V1
CN9 BR BR
8FE-ST-VK-N 9604S-08F POM1\ 5 2 POD3 POD3
GY GY
DSW-L 8 1DSW-F GND2 6 3 GND2
BR
DSW-L 7 2DSW-F POM3\ 7
BL DSW-L
GND1 6 3GND2 +5V1 8
RD RD
GND1 5 4GND2 +24V1 9
MAIN BR SFPS-41T-187
MM +5V1 4 5+5V1 POD2 10
RD RD
GND2 3 6GND2 +24V1 11
GY
DRIVE MM\ 2 7MM\ GND2 12 SMR-03V-N+SMP-03V-NC
GY SMR-03V-N DSW-F
MM-T 1 8MM-T GND2 13 RD RD RD
BL 1 DSW-L 1 1 DSW-L 1
9MMCLK\ +5V1 14 SFPS-41T-187
BR 2 (NC) 2 2 (NC) 2
10(NC) CFM2\ 15 RD RD RD
BR 3 DSW-F 3 3 DSW-F 3
PCU POD3 16
RD
+24V1 17
GY PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
GND2 18
RD RD
TONER HOPPER CN5 +24V1 19 3 +24V1 1
PWB BR BR
TSR-04V-K B8B-PH-K-S CFM2\ 20 2 CFM2\ 2
BR RD GY GY CFM2 Duct section
GND2 1 1 GND2 +24V1 21 1 GND2 3
GY
CRU +5V1 2 2 +5VCRU VFM2\ 22
BL RD
CRUCLK 3 3 CRUCLK +24V1 23
BR GY PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
PWB CRUSDA 4 4 CRUSDA GND2 24
BR RD RD
5 PSPS\ (NC) 25 3 +24V1 1
RD BR BR Paper exit unit
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 6 +24V1 GND2 26 2 VFM2\ 2 VFM2
RD GY GY section
2 PSPS\ 1 7 (NC) DSW-L 27 1 GND2 3
PSPS RD
1 +24V1 2 8 +24V1 DSW-L 28
(NC) 29
(NC) 30
(NC) 31
RD PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DEVELOPER UNIT CN8 DSW-F 32 TSR-04V-K PHR-3
GY RD RD
QR/P8-12S-C(01) B11B-PH-K-S 1 GND2 +24V1 1 3 +24V1 1
HVR
BR BR RD DRAWER BR BR GY
1 DVCH1 1 1 DVCH1 2 +24V1 CFM1\ 2 2 CFM1\ 2 CFM1
BR GY GY GY
2 DVCH2 2 2 DVCH2 3 GND2 PWB GND2 3 1 GND2 3 PWB
BR BR
3 DVCH3 3 3 DVCH3 4 CFM1\
BR BR
53047-0410 4 PTH 4 4 PTH PS
GY GY
(NC) 1 5 GND2 5 5 GND2 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 179228-3(AMP )
GY BL
+24V1 2 6 GND2 6 6 GND2 CN13 PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H 1 +5V1 3
BR BR B24B-PHDSS-B 1 +5V1
TCS TCS 3 7 TCS 7 7 TCS GY BL BL BR HVR GY
GY GY 1 +5V1 9 2 PPD1 2 2 PPD1
GND2 4 8 GND2 8 8 GND2 GND2 1 GY PPD1
RD RD RD BR BR 3 GND2 1 3 GND2 PWB
9 +24V1 9 9 +24V1 +24V1 2 2 PPD1 8
BL BL BR GY GY
S4B-PH-K-S 10 +5V1 10 10 +5V1 PED 3 3 GND2 7 179228-3(AMP)
BR BR BR BL BL
+5V1 1 11 DVCRU 11 11 DVCRU\ CPFC\ 4 4 +5V1 6 1 +5V1
RD RD BL BR BR
DVCRU 2 12 DVBias 12 +5V1 5 5 LUD 5 2 LUD LUD
INITIAL RD GY
6 GND2 4
GY
PTH 3 +24V1 6 3 GND2
PWB GY BL BL
#187 GND2 7 7 +5V1 3
GND2 4 Bias BR BR BR
RRC\ 8 8 PED 2
BR GY GY 179228-3(AMP)
LUD 9 9 GND2 1
Bias RD 1 +5V1
+24V1 10
BL

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 6

2 PED
+5V1 11 PED
BR 3 GND2
TRC\ 12
(NC) 13
BR CASETTE UNIT
CSS 14
GY
GND2 15 CN1
GY CSS PWB
GND2 16 S4B-PH-K-S
BR BR
PPD1 17 1 CSS CN2
BR GY CSS
LUMB 18 2 GND2 173979-2 173979-2
BL BR OR
+5V1 19 3 LUMB LUMB 1 1 LUMB
BR BR OR LUM
LUMA 20 4 LUMA LUMA 2 2 LUMA
BR
CFM1\ 21
GY
GND2 22
RD
+24V1 23
CN22 GY PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
GND2 24
173981-2 BR
1 CPFC\ 2
1 PCU_RES RD CPFC
2 +24V1 1
2 GND2
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
BR
1 RRC\ 2
RD RRC
2 +24V1 1
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
MAIN DRIVE
BR
1 TRC1\ 3
2 (NC) 2 TRC
RD
3 +24V1 1
 FUSING UNIT
09R-RWZV-K2GGP4+CZHR-04V-H
SMP-04V-NC+SMR-04V-N
GY BR BR
Rth1 B-4 Rth1 Rth1 B-1 1 RTH1 1
GY GY GY
Engine (3/4)

B-3 GND2 GND2 B-2 2 GND2 2

GY BR BR
B-2 Rth2 Rth2 B-3 3 RTH2 3
Rth2 GY GY GY
B-1 GND2 GND2 B-4 4 GND2 4
CN14
CN2 CN1 CN2 B14B-PHDSS-B
SRA-51T-4 BR
VLR-03V+VLP-03V B03P-VL B03P-VL B7B-PH-K-S 1 FW
WH WH WH WH RD RD
HL1 1 HL1 HL1 1 1 HL1 1 HL1 HL1 1 1 HL1 +24VPR 1 2 +24VPR
WH WH WH BR BR
2 HL2 HL2 2 2 HL2 2 BR HL2 HL2 2 2 HL2 HLPR2\ 2 3 GND2
BK BK BK BR
3 L L 3 3 L 3 BK L 3 3 L HLPR 3 4 HLPR\
HL2 BK GY L BR BR
4 F-GND F-GND 4 CN1 HLCNT1 4 5 HLCNT1
SRA-51T-4 BR BR
SRA-51T-4 B2P4-VH #187 HLCNT2 5 6 HLCNT2
WH BR BR
L2 1 L2 MSW MON 6 7 Rth1
SRA-51T-4 GY
(NC) 2 DC CNT 7 8 GND2
SRA-51T-4 BR
(NC) 3 #187 9 Rth2
WH GY
L2R 4 L2R 10 GND2
REACTOR PWB 11 +24V1
12 MSWPR
BR
13 MSW MON PCU
14 (NC)
* 200V only
CN5
B12P-HL-A
RD PWB
+24V1 1
RD
+24V2 2
RD
+24V3 3
BL
+5V1 4
BL
+5V1 5
OR
+3.3V 6
OR
+3.3V 7
GY
GND2 8
GY
#250(BK) GND2 9
BK GY
L1 GND2 10
GY
GND2 11
AC,DC BR
#250(WH) FW 12
WH CN17
N1 CN15
PWB B5P-VH
RD 9604S-14F 1-84432-4

BK
1 +24V1

WH
DSW-F 1 14 DSW-F #187(RD) SRA-21T-4L
RD
2 +24V2 RD
RD GND2 2 13 GND2 MHV
3 +24V3

L1
N1
GY GND2 3 12 GND2

MSL
4 GND2 #187(WH) SRA-21T-3
CN4 CN3

#250(BL)

#250(BL)
GY DHVREM 4 11 DHVREM WH
B03B-XASK-1 B03P-VH 5 GND2 MHVREM\ THV
5 10 MHVREM\
MSW 1 L L2 1 BK THV+PWM\ 6 9 THV+PWM\ #187(YL) SRA-21T-4L
2 (NC) (NC) 2 WH
CN18 DHVPWM\ 7 8 DHVPWM\ GB
3 N N2 3 WH HV
B6P-VH GBPWM\

L
8 7 GBPWM\

N
BL SRA-21T-3

MSN
1 +5V1 THV-PWM\ 9 6 THV-PWM \ #187(BL)

#250(WH)
#250(WH)
BL RD
2 +5V1 DVREM\ 10 5 DVREM \ DHV
OR

BK
WH
3 +3.3V DVPWM\ 11 4 DVPWM\
OR #187(GR)
4 +3.3V THVREM\ 12 3 THVREM\
GY DV BIAS
5 GND2 MHV-T 13 2 MHV-T
GY
6 GND2 THVin 14 1 THVin
VLP-02V+VLR-02V
WH WH
1 N 1
BK BK ELP-03V+ELR-03V
2 L 2
BK
1 L2 1 L2 L2
2 (NC) 2 YL/GR
WH
3 N2 3 F-GND F-GND OPTION DCPS
N2 N2

OUTLET

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 7

FUSE PWB
#250(BL)
BK
INLET L1
#250(YL)
WH
L L N1
CN1
B3P-VH
FG FG BK
3 L
2 (NC)
WH
N N 1 N

SIN-21T-1.8S(BK)
BK
DH-L ELP-02V+ELR-02VF
SIN-21T-1.8S(WH) 1 DH-L 1
WH DESK
DH-N 2 DH-N 2
Engine (4/4)

CN12 CN10
B30B-PHDSS-B B24B-PADES
1VAREF +5V1 1
2+5V1 VAREF 2
3+24V2 +24V2 3
4+24V2 GND2 4
5GND2 GND2 5
6GND2 MCPPD 6
7ADMEN1\ MCDRS 7
8ADMCK1\ MCPED 8
9ADMEN2\ MCLUD 9
10ADMCK2\ MCPWS 10
11MPFC\ MCSS1 11
12
13
14
MPFS\
DGS\
APID
MCSS2
MCSS3
MCSS4
12
13
14
AR-D29
ADU 15
16
17
APOD
APPD2
APPD1
MCSPD
MC SET
MCPCL\
15
16
17
18MPLD1 MCFCL\ 18
19MPED MCLUM\ 19
20MPWS MCM-T 20
21DSW-D MCMCLK\ 21
22ADU SET MCM\ 22
23MPF SET MCPFS\ 23
24MSS\ DCPR\ 24
25ADM H/L
26ADUFM\
27
28
29
MPLS2
MPLS1
(NC)
PCU
30(NC)

PWB CN11
B22B-PADRS
TXD-FIN1 1
RXD-FIN1 2
DTR-FIN1\ 3
DSR-FIN1\ 4
RES-FIN1 5
GND2 6
TXD-FIN2 7
RXD-FIN2 8
DTR-FIN2\ 9
DSR-FIN2\ 10
RES-FIN2 11
GND2 12
OPTION
TXD-DSK 13
RXD-DSK 14
DTR-DSK\ 15
DSR-DSK\ 16
RES-DSK 17
TRC-DSK\ 18
FGS-FIN\ 19
FM1\ 20
DCPR\ 21
+24V2 22

AR-M320U/M420U, AR-EF5/EF6 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 8

Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
n
s
i

Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use
soldering iron is recommendable.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is
inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed
the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is
confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after
completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES"

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
 COPYRIGHT © 2005 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000,
Windows® XP, Windows® 2000 Server, Windows® Server 2003 and Internet
Explorer® are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
• IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
Quality Enhancement Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2005 May Printed in Japan